Home

TANDBERG E5714 Flat Panel Television User Manual

1. Option Slot 1 optonSht1 o men 9 o Ie om Q7 L Bandin L Band Out TANDBERG Television Technical Earth use only Figure 2 6 E5740 L Band 2U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 11 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment RS 232 Audio In and RS 422 RS 232 RS 485 ASI Composite Audio Alarm Data Data Control Ethernet Outputs SDIIn H Sync Video Reference Out J O L yore cool PT ETHERNET 2 Option Slot 4 i Option S Base Board Option Slots 4 5 Option Slot 1 3 Option Slot z Option S Option Slot3 IF OUT 1 IF OUT 2 Figure 2 7 E5750 2U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors 2 6 2 Connecting Up the Basic Encoder Once the unit has been installed in its intended operating position it is ready to be connected up to the rest of the system equipment see Figure 2 8 providing it too has been installed see Section 2 5 DC Operating Voltage and Earthing for pin out details of the connectors Video Input Serial Digital Interface S DI IN ASI OUT 1 DVBJATSC Transport stream output Studio Black and Burst ASI OUT 2 DVB ATSC Transport stream output Analogue composite video ASI OUT 3 DVB ATSC Transport stream output A
2. with Remux Service 7 7 ASI x4 IF Output Service 6 Service 1 IF Output contains 13 services Contributing Encoders Encoder with Remux Service 11 AS103 Figure 3 5 Block Diagram Two Stages of Remultiplexing Page 3 14 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 3 6 4 Options and Upgrades Function of Remultiplexer It is the function of the Remultiplexer to combine the locally generated host services with the externally supplied input services connected via ASI inputs to the rear of the unit If the Service ID DVB or Program Number ATSC PIDs or service names of two or more of the services clash the Remultiplexer can remap the Service ID or program number remap PIDs and alter the service names to resolve the clash If a new service is detected on any input and it clashes with an existing service it is the new service s Service ID or Program Number PIDs or Service Name that are remapped to resolve the conflict Service names are made unique by the addition of a number for example Default Service may be renamed Default Service 2 The way the Remultiplexer deals with user requests to remap PIDs depends on its mode of operation When set to Intelligent Mode see Remux Mode Option if the user then attempts to move remap a PID to a PID already being used the Remultiplexer allows this to happen and automatically
3. ccccseceees 4 26 Config Name Option 4 26 Local Time Option cccceeeeeee 4 26 Local Date Option cecceeseeeeeeeeees 4 26 UTC Offset Option cceceeceeeeeeeee 4 27 Temperature Option c ccccecceeeeeees 4 27 Screen Saver Option scceceeseceees 4 27 Keypress Beep Option ceccceceees 4 27 Power Dip Recovery Option c 4 28 Upgrade Encoder Option ceceeee 4 28 Software Release Option ceccee 4 28 Fan Control Option ccceeeeeeeee 4 28 4 7 6 Advanced Menu cccecceeeeesteeeees 4 29 OVENVIOW sisi casies teeasevtessandatcestsenesistatesterastienl 4 29 Setup Password Option cecceee 4 29 Current Password Option c csccsee 4 29 Display Errors Option ccececeseeceees 4 29 System Control Option cscs 4 29 Action On PID Error Option 0 ce0 4 30 SNMP Control Option 4 30 Display Contrast Option cceceee 4 30 No Services Option 3 1 and later 4 30 Reset On Download Option ce 4 30 Reset Encoder Option cccseeeee 4 30 4 7 7 Build Menu ce eeeeeeseeeeeseeteseeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 4 31 48 Video MENU sxvacnsrd ianvareiainnsanbaiin nia 4 31 ABA IMtrOduction 0 eee eects eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeees 4 31 4 8 2 Video Source Menu 4 31 OVEIVIEW pieniin anaran naiaiaee 4 31 Video Input Option ececeeeseeeeeeee 4 31 Input Source Select cc
4. DVB AS OUT is disabled CAUTION When remultiplexing be aware that both PIDs and Service Names will be remapped according to the Host Encoder input used Encoder oy The output is a multiplex of the Analogue Composite Video Rae Output Transport Stream three input transport streams of Serial Digital ee ASIOUT2 Output Transport Stream the Remux option and the Audio Input ASIOUT3 Output Transport Stream J transport stream produced by the host Encoder Remux Option Input Transport Stream 1 DVB ASI IN 1 Input Transport Stream 2 DVB ASI IN 2 Input Transport Stream 3 DVB ASI IN3 DVS S OU Tal Outputis disabled Figure 3 3 Remux Option M2 EOM2 REMUX Page 3 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades DVB ASI IN 1 2 and 3 Connectors A 75 Q BNC connector provides an input to the unit Table 3 7 DVB ASI In Connector a Pin Signal Centre Signal Screen Ground NOTE When connecting the inputs always start from DVB ASI IN 1 and work upwards DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector A A 75 Q BNC connector provides an output from the unit Table 3 8 DVB ASI Out Connector Pin Signal Centre Signal Screen Ground NOTE This output is disabled 3 6 3 Stages of Remultiplexing The Remultiplexer is capable of combining four inputs Three inputs are in the form of ASI feeds to the rear panel the fourth input is fed from the host Encoder or pri
5. Default Service Menu 1 Some of these relate to software options which are enabled when the appropriate option is purchased and some are not available for the E5710 and E5720 Contact Customer Services for details 2 Only shown if Logical Chan Desc On 3 Not shown if the Encoder is set to generate PSIP externally or is under MEM control 4 Available from Build Version 3 0 0 and later Service Info Menu Menu options depend on Syntax selected ATSC DVB Service Type Advanced Menu Current Display System Display L Short Channel Namet H Network Name Long Channel Namet Service Provider Syntax Service Name SI Level Syntax Major Channel H SI Level Minor Channel Network ID3 Program Number Service ID Transport Stream ID PMT PID Service Type DST Start Date PMT PID DST End Date Stream Id Descriptor Dolby AC 3 Descriptor Logical Chan Desc Logical Channel Setup Password Password Errors Control Action on PID Error SNMP Control Contrast No Services Reset On Download Reset Encoder Figure 4 9 Menu Hierarchy Setup System Menu Page 4 18 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 7 2 Operating the Equipment Locally Service Info Menu Syntax ATSC Overview The Ser
6. Video Type Selected Option Description None Off Video input switched off Analogue PAL B G HII PAL B G H I composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector Composite PAL D PAL D composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector PAL M PAL M composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector NTSC with Pedestal NTSC M composite video input with Pedestal on COMP VIDEO connector NTSC No Pedestal NTSC M composite video input with no Pedestal on COMP VIDEO connector Ident Digital Serial Digital Serial digital video input on SDI IN connector and Internal Bars amp Red Colour bars and red internal test pattern Test Pattern Video Black Black internal test pattern Sources Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Moving Pattern Moving internal test pattern Ident Video Source which allows the user to superimpose identification text on the video Mainly used for test purposes Page 4 31 Operating the Equipment Locally Setup Menu Video Menu VBI 29 97 Hz t Video Source t Video Encoder VBI Menu Menu options depend on Frame Rate selected in Video Source menu when Video Input is Digital Video Encoder Menu 25 Hz VBI on PID VBI PID VBI Component Tag VBI in Picture Closed Caption CC Format CC Packet Size Auto Detect VITC VBI Line 10
7. Si no entiende el contenido de este manual NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducci n de este manual al idioma previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deber abonar usted mismo This document and the information contained in it is the property of TANDBERG Television Ltd and may be the subject of patents pending and granted It must not be used for commercial purposes nor copied disclosed reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise whether in whole or in part without TANDBERG Television s prior written agreement 2001 2002 TANDBERG Television Ltd All rights reserved Page ii ITALIANO LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale NON UTILIZZARE L APPARECCHIATURA anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo manuale ma il costo a carico dell utente NEDERLANDS LEES DIT EERST Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt STEL DEZE APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING U kunt tevens op eigen kosten een vertaling van deze handleiding krijgen SUOMI LUE ENNEN K YTT Jos et ymm rr k sikirjan sis lt ALA KAYTA LAITETTA K sikirja voidaan my s suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella DANSK L S DETTE F RST Udstyret m ikke betjenes MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTAR INDHOLDET AF DENNE H NDBOG Vi kan ogs for Deres r
8. Composite Video Output A 75 Q female BNC connector provides a composite video output See Annex B Technical Specification for a list of supported video standards Table 3 15 Composite Video Connector Item Specification Connector Type 75 Q BNC Female Connector designation COMP VIDEO Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground Audio Output A 15 way D type socket provides the audio output Table 3 16 Audio Output Connector Item Specification Connector Type 15 way D type Socket Connector designation AUDIO OUT Pin outs 1 Ch 1 Left Analogue Ch 1 Digital nalogue Ground Ch 1 Right Analogue Ch 2 Left Analogue Ch 2 Digital nalogue Ground Ch 2 Right Analogue Reserved gt gt gt nalogue Ground Ch 1 Left Analogue Ch 1 Digital Ch 1 Right Analogue Analogue Ground Ch 2 Left Analogue Ch 2 Digital Ch 2 Right Analogue nalogue Ground olol usui aJ ot amp wy rm ePledlelre uvilje e j e j gt gt Reserved 8 1 eee eee 88 A a eee ee08d8 d 15 9 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 3 9 3 9 1 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Options and Upgrades RS 232 RS 422 Data Output A 1 A 9 way D type socket provides the data outputs Table 3 17 RS232 RS422 Data Output Connector 9 6 Item Specification Connector Type 9 way D type Socket Connector designation RS232 RS422 DATA
9. IF Frequency Type Of Service Modulation Modulation Mod Type Mod Type Symbol Rate t Symbol Rate FEC Rate FEC Rate Spectrum Invert t Spectrum Invert Roll Off Factor Roll Off Factor Tx Bandwidth Factor Tx Bandwidth Factor Tx Bandwidth Preset Pwr Low Preset Pwr Low Preset Pwr Norm Preset Pwr Norm Upconverter Power Sat Deliv Freq Sat Deliv Freq t Sat Orb Pos Sat Orb Pos Sat West East Sat West East t Polarisation Polarisation 1 this option is status only unless Manual has been selected in the Band Plan option Figure 4 17 Menu Hierarchy Setup Output Menu Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 71 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 11 2 4 11 3 4 11 4 4 11 5 Page 4 72 Output Format Option To access the Output Format option press the Output Format softkey in the Output Menu The menus available depend upon which option cards are fitted to the unit If the Output Format option ASI then the following menu option is Delivery Descriptor otherwise it is the menu associated with the output format selected i e satellite modulator OFDM modulator or IP Output Delivery Descriptor Menu To access the Delivery Descriptor Menu press the Delivery Descriptor softkey in the Output Menu The screens in this menu vary according to the Descriptor Type selected Descriptor Type Option To access the
10. Major Channel Option cseseeeeeeees 4 101 Minor Channel Option 0 cecceee 4 101 Logical Channel Option cseeeeeeees 4 101 CA Input Option 2 0 0 eceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 101 BISS Key Code Option nsss 4 101 Enc Session Word Option 0 c 4 101 Session Word Option cccceccee 4 101 PMT PID Option ccccssecsssessecssseeseeseees 4 102 PCR PID Option c ccscceccsseseessseeseeeeees 4 102 Vid o Optisan 4 102 ECM CA PID Option c cccecsseeeeeees 4 103 VBI PID Option nsis cccceseceeseeeeseseeseeeeees 4 103 Audio Type of Audio Option ee 4 103 Data Type of Data Option eee 4 104 Teletext Option ou eececeeeeceeseeeteeeeeees 4 104 IRD Menu 3 1 and later cesses 4 105 4 14 1 OVOIVIOW ececceccceeeeseseceesesteeseeesttneneeees 4 105 4 14 2 IRD Mode Option cceccsecseeeeeees 4 105 4 14 3 IRD TS Source Option cece 4 105 4 14 4 IRD Demod Menu ccecccceeeeceteees 4 107 Frequency Option ccccesesseseeeeeees 4 107 Symbol Rate Option cscs 4 107 FEC Rate Option cececececeseeeees 4 107 Polarisation Option cceceeeeeeees 4 108 Sat Input Option ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 108 Modulation Option cecsceceeeeeeees 4 108 LNB Option esnan 4 108 LNB Lo Freq Option 0 ccccceecee 4 109 LNB Hi Freq Option ccceeceeeeeeeeees 4 109 LNB Switch Freq Option ccceee 4 109 L
11. NOTE This option is only shown if the Logical Chan Desc option is set to On To access the Logical Channel option press the Logical Channel softkey inthe Service Info Menu This enables a number to be given to the Logical Channel Remote Control Menu Overview The Remote Control Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the Remote Control softkey This menu provides options for amending the remote control options See Figure 4 9 for the Remote Control Menu structure IP Address Option To access the IP Address option press the IP Address softkey in the Remote Control Menu MAC Address Option The MAC Address option is found in the Remote Control Menu It cannot be changed Network Mask Option To access the Network Mask option press the Network Mask softkey in the Remote Control Menu Gateway Address Option To access the Gateway Address option press the Gateway Address softkey in the Remote Control Menu This gives the default gateway address used on the Ethernet network interface connected via the 10OBaseT socket Any communications to network hosts not on the local IP network will be sent to this address Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally SNMP Master Option To access the SNMP Master option press the SNMP Master softkey in the Remote Control Menu This gives the SNMP Master s IP address If this is set only one SN
12. QPSK as per EN 300 421 DVB S Symbol Rate 1 45 Msym s 0 3 45 Msym s optionally Page B 26 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification B 10 7 M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD 16QAM Demodulator Card Option NOTE The M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD 16QAM Demodulator Card Option is supported by Encoder software version 3 1 and later Table B 44 L band Inputs 16QAM Demodulator Item Safety Status Connector Type Connector Designation Input Impedance Input Power maximum Capture Range Signal Type Symbol Rate Specification SELV F type Female L Band Input 1 L Band Input 2 75 Q 25 dBm Up to 3 5 MHz QPSK as per EN 300 421 DVB S BPSK 16QAM as per EN 301 210 DVB DSNG option 1 45 Msym s B 10 8 M2 EOM2 1P IP Output Card Option NOTE The M2 EOM2 IP IP Output Card Option is supported by Encoder software version 3 1 and later Table B 45 Ethernet P ort IP Output Card Item Specification Safety Status SELV Connector Type 8 way RJ 45 Connector Designation 10 100 BT Signal Type 10 100 baseT Ethernet IEEE 802 3 802 3u Transport Stream Rate Up to 50 Mbit s Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page B 27 ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification BLANK Page B 28 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Annex C Predefined User Configurations
13. Transmission Modes ST TM E10076 3 Specification SELV SMA Female L Band Out Main 50Q 20 dBm to 5 dBm in 0 1 dB steps 0 5dB gt 14 dB 950 MHz to 1750 MHz BPSK as per ETSI TR 101 198 option QPSK as per EN 300 421 DVB S 8PSK 16QAM as per EN 301 210 DVB DSNG option 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 with BPSK and QPSK 2 3 5 6 8 9 with BPSK 3 4 7 8 with 16QAM 1 48 Msym s 0 3 48 Msym s option available 20 25 30 35 selectable Normal Inverted Modulation on off Carrier on off Carrier frequency 950 MHz to 1750 MHz in 1 kHz steps Carrier Frequency Error lt 1 kHz all causes over 10 years Phase Noise lt 46 dBc at 10 Hz offset lt 66 dBc at 100 Hz offset lt 76 dBc at 1 kHz offset lt 86 dBc at 10 kHz offset lt 96 dBc at 100 kHz offset lt 120 dBc at 1 MHz offset Spurious Output lt 60 dBc 4 kHz modulated carrier 500 2500 MHz lt 55 dBc unmodulated carrier 500 2500 MHz Noise Floor No C lt 120 dBc Hz Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page B 11 Technical Specification Table B 17 L Band Monitor Output Specification E5740 Lband Item Safety Status Connector Type Connector Designation Output Impedance Output Power Return Loss Specification SELV F type Female L Band Out Monitor 75 Q 30 dB 3 dB relative to main output gt 10 dB 950 MHz to 1750 MHz B 3 4 OFDM Modulator Outputs E5750 Table B 18 OFDM IF
14. upstream of the Encoder Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Composite Input Calibrati Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Page H 5 Error Messages H 5 H 6 H 7 Page H 6 VBI Related Errors Table H 3 VBI Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Duplicate VBI PID Invalid VBI PID Duplicate Teletext PID Invalid Teletext PID Closed Caption Line 21 Closed Caption Ext Data Neilson AMOL 1 Detection Neilson AMOL 11 Detection Check the Encoder configuration Verify that the appropriate VBI is present in the video source If itis power VPS Detection Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do WSS Detection this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer VITC Detection Video Index Detection No Teletext Data Detected No inverted Teletext Dat Remote Control Related Errors Table H 4 Remote Control Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Ethernet Comms Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the SNMP Undo Fail chassis Do this by firmly pressing it
15. 2 Mbit s Mega Low Delay MP ML IP 4 Mbit s Mega Low Delay MP ML IP 6 Mbit s Mega Low Delay MP ML IP 8 Mbit s Mega Low Delay MP ML IP 15 Mbit s Mega Low Delay MP ML IP 25 Mbit s Standard Delay 422P ML IBBP Annex D Language Abbreviations Languages are shown in alphabetical LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION order MACEDONIAN MAC LANGUAGE ABBREVIATION uid sa MISCELLANEOUS MIS oS ai MULTIPLE LANGUAGES MUL ALBANIAN ALB NDEBELE NDE ARAUL aa NORWEGIAN NOR BASQUE BAQ POLISH POL AEAN a PORTUGESE POR BULGARIAN BUL ROMANIAN RUM LLa eM RUSSIAN RUS aa ce SERBO CROAT SCR pe SLOVAK SLK ene aut SOMALI SOM ENGEN Ai SPANISH SPA ESTONIAN EST SWAHILI SWA PAN ii SWEDISH SWE FRENCH FRE THAI THA oe ile TIBETAN TIB ern GER UNDEFINED UND ene Gr UKRANIAN UKR HUNGARIAN HUN WELSH CYM ICELANDIC ICE INDONESIAN IND IRISH IRI ITALIAN ITA JAPANESE JPN KOREAN KOR LATVIAN LAV LITHUANIAN LIT Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page D 1 ST TM E10076 3 Language Abbreviations The following non 1SO languages are The non SO languages allow tagging of supported audio without reference to specific languages The system can then transmit two languages as Main and NOTE Auxiliary which could be any type of Only applicable for a transport stream going to an Alteia Receiver audio REFERENCE ABBREVIATION NOTE WAIN ONE The non ISO languages need to be user defined in the MEM o
16. NOTES 1 This option module is installed as a daughter card to the Base Board with no external connectors and does not use an option slot 2 The BISS software must also be enabled in the Encoder see Customer Services 1 5 Mbit s but possibly higher if limited by Coding Mode 3 BISS is implemented according to EBU Tech 3292 May 2002 BISS E is available from Build version 2 2 0 and later Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 5 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 4 3 4 1 Page 3 6 BISS scrambling when fitted is enabled and controlled via the Setup Mux Menu see Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Section 4 12 12 Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option M2 EOM2 AUDLIN Overview The Additional Audio option module supplements the audio encoding functionality of the Encoder This module supports audio standards MPEG 1 layer 2 Dolby Digital AC 3 Linear PCM Dolby Digital AC 3 Pass through and Dolby E Pass through The module can take in audio as either stereo analogue or digital AES EBU on left channel only via a 15 way D type connector provided on its rear panel Alternatively any two of the four pairs of embedded AES EBU channels extracted from the video can be routed to the module for encoding This option supports all the standard bit rates and encoding modes associated with each compression standard The Audio Menu associated with this option
17. PMT PID 1Bit Rate 204 is only available when the Packet Length is ae i set to 204 gt This name changes to be the same as the Service Name There could be more menus depending upon the number of inputs to the Remux card 3 Only available when BISS Mode 1 is selected as the Scrambling mode Available in Build version 2 2 and later 0 Only available when BISS E is selected as the Scrambling mode Available in Build version 2 2 and later 5 This option is not available from Build version 2 2 6 Only available when the Remux card is fitted and enabled ECM CA PID VBI PID5 Audio type of audio Data type of data Figure 4 18 Menu Hierarchy Setup Mux Menu DVB Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page 4 91 Operating the Equipment Locally Setup Menu Mux Menu Mux Remux Module 2 Service 3 Program 2 1 up to xxxx Service When BISS scrambling has been enabled Mux Menu When RAS scrambling has been enabled Packet Length Packet Length On Air _ On Air Bit rate 188 _ Bit rate 188 Bit rate 204 Bit rate 204 Host Bit rate 188 Host Bit rate Scramble Scramble SNG Key RAS 1 BISS Key Entry Clock Session Word PCR PID _ Enc Session Word BISS E Injected Id4 Clock PCR PID I
18. fixed single line Field 1 Frequency response NTSC Video Performance Figures Table B 6 NTSC System Video Performance Figures Pattern NTC 7 Composite NTC 7 Composite NTC 7 Composite NTC 7 Composite NTC 7 Composite 100 Luma Ramp 5 step staircase modulated 5 step staircase modulated Item Input return loss Jitter Bar amplitude ref bp 2T pulse K rating Chrom lum delay Chrom lum gain Luma noise weighted Filters tilt null unified weighting 5 MHz LPF Fsc trap 100 kHz HP Differential gain Differential phase Teletext Extraction Technical Specification Specification 0 5 KF 99 101 20 ns 95 105 lt 60 dB 1 5 1 lt 5 0 5 MHz 0 2 dB 1 0 MHz 0 2 dB 2 0 MHz 0 2 dB 4 0 MHz 0 2 dB 4 8 MHz 0 5 dB 5 8 MHz 0 to 2 5 dB Specification 30 dB 5ns 100 1 5 IRE 1 KF 20ns 90 110 lt 60 dB 1 5 1 Teletext is extracted from the Vertical Blanking Interval VBI Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page B 5 Technical Specification International Television Standards Table B 7 shows television standards appropriate to the Encoder Table B 7 International Television Standards As indicated in Menus M M B G H l D Region USA Japan Europe Asia UK Standard NS OR PAL Lines frame 525 525 625 625 625 625 625 Fields second 60 60 50 50
19. 1 Service Menu This option allows the service output name to be changed Service Prov In Option NOTE This option is only shown on an incoming Service menu 2 13 Service Menu This option indicates the input service provider s name It is set for status only and cannot be changed Service Provider Option To access the Service Provider option press the Service Provider softkey in the 1 Service Menu This option relates to the output service provider and allows the name to be changed Service Id Out Option To access the Service Id Out option press the Service Id Out softkey in the 1 Service Menu This enables the output Service Identity to be specified It is the number at the start of the remuxxed services Table 4 122 Service Id Out Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Service identity number Max 65535 Step Size 1 Program Number Out Option NOTE This option is only shown in ATSC mode To access the Program Number Out option press the Program Number Out softkey in the 2 Service Menu This enables the output program number to be specified Table 4 123 Program Number Out Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Program Number Max 65535 Step Size 1 Page 4 100 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Major Channel Option NOTE This option is only shown in ATSC mode To access the Major
20. A subset of the MPEG 2 standard which supports digital video storage DVD etc and transmissions up to 15 Mbit s over various mediums Main Profile at High Level A subset of the MPEG 2 standard which supports digital video storage DVD etc and transmissions up to 80 Mbit s over various mediums Moving Pictures Experts Group The name of the ISO IEC working group which sets up the international standards for digital television source coding Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression and multiplexing techniques to minimise video signal bit rate in preparation for broadcasting Specified in ISO IEC 13818 The standard is split into layers and profiles defining bit rates and picture resolutions Most significant bit Msym s Mega million Symbols per second 10 Symbols per second A number of discrete data streams typically 8 to 12 from encoders that are compressed together in a single DVB compliant transport stream for delivery to a Modulator Masking pattern adapted Universal Sub band Integrated Coding And Multiplexing An audio bit rate reduction system relying on sub band coding and psychoacoustic masking Multiplexer Transmission Multiplexer receives EMMs from the ACC ECMs from the BCC video audio data from the encoders and the SI stream from the SIC It then multiplexes them all into a single DVB compliant transport stream and delivers the signal to the uplink after modulation The Multipl
21. However because the Performance Upgrade has not been bought the picture quality will be reduced see Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Minimum Bit rates With and Without Performance Upgrade Performance Reflex Bmin Non seamless Bmin Seamless Modes Bmin Seamless Modes Upgrade Licence Modes Front Panel SNMP Reflex MEM x x 1 5 Mbit s 1 5 Mbit s Not Possible x v 1 5 Mbit s 1 5 Mbit s2 Depends on Coding Mode v x 0 256 Mbit s Depends on Coding Mode Not Possible v v 0 256 Mbit s Depends on Coding Mode Depends on Coding Mode NOTE Bminis the minimum bit rate that can be set Basic Interoperable Scrambling System BISS M2 EDCOM2 BISS With the appropriate configuration the Encoder can use the Basic Interoperable Scrambling System BISS to scramble the outgoing transport stream This system has been developed by the European Broadcasting Union EBU as an open scrambling system BISS has three main levels of operation Mode 1 Mode 2 and Mode 3 Mode 0 corresponds to no scrambling BISS E is also available in Build version 2 2 0 and later NOTE Only Modes 0 and 1 are available at Build version 2 1 0 Modes 2 and 3 are not supported BISS Mode 1 operation uses a fixed value for the control word to scramble the services in the transport stream from the Encoder To descramble the transmission the Decoder needs to have the matching control word value The BISS Module M2 EDCOM2 BISS comprises Assembly S 12284 and Card S11484
22. Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Bit rate Option To access the Bit rate option press the Bit rate softkey in the Data B RS422 Menu This enables the bit rate of the RS 422 synchronous data channel to be set Table 4 70 Bitrate Options Selected Option Description Settings cycle from 56 to 1792 in steps of 56 then from 64 to RS 422 synchronous data 2048 in steps of 64 then back to 56 channel bit rate RS422 PID Option The RS422 PID option is selected from the Data B RS422 Menu by pressing the RS422 PID softkey The option is used for entering or updating data PIDs Enter a PID using the softkeys then press the Enter softkey to accept it To be DVB compliant PIDs below 32 are reserved Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are available for use In the event of a clash one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder s internal checking algorithm Test Mode Option The Test Mode option is selected from the Data B RS422 Menu by pressing the Test Mode softkey The option is used for turning the test mode On and Off Delay Option The Delay option is selected from the Data A RS232 Menu by pressing the Delay softkey The option cannot be changed D Mode Option The D Mode option is selected from the Data A RS232 Menu by pressing the D Mode softkey The option cannot be changed SNMP oid index Option The SNMP oid index option i
23. NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the DC Filter option press the DC Filter softkey in the Audio A Menu This parameter is used to activate a dc high pass filter for all input channels The option can be turned On or Off Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 63 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 64 Low Pass Filter Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the Low Pass Filter option press the Low Pass Filter softkey in the Audio A Menu This parameter is used to activate a low pass filter with a cut off near the specified audio bandwidth that is applied to the main input channels The option can be turned On or Off Embedded 1 2 DID Option To access the Embedded 1 2 DID option press the Embedded 1 2 DID softkey in the Audio A Menu Refer to Annex G Audio Modes for information about DIDs Table 4 61 Embedded 1 2 DID Options Selected Option Description Min 0 Off Max 1023 Select DID Other gt 1023 Default DID Embedded 3 4 DID Option The Embedded 3 4 DID option is selected from the Audio A Menu by pressing the Embedded 3 4 DID softkey The Embedded 3 4 DID option has the same choices as the Embedded 1 2 DID option Audio PID Option The Audio PID option is selected from the Audio A Menu by pressing the Audio PID softkey The option is u
24. Output Source Option cece 4 65 Output Format Option cece 4 66 Output FSR Option ccceceseeeeseeeeees 4 66 Firmware Release Option ece 4 66 Hardware Release Option 0ceee 4 66 410 Data Men s issada 4 66 410 1 IMtroduction cecesecceeceeseeeeseteeeteeeeees 4 66 4 10 2 Data A RS232 Menu 3 0 and later 4 67 Encoding Option seissen 4 67 Baud Rate Option ccceeseeeeeeteees 4 67 RS232 PID Option eects 4 68 Delay Option cicntsincinndnneveieain 4 68 SNMP oid index Option ceceeee 4 68 4 10 3 Data B R8422 Menu eset 4 68 Encoding Option cesses 4 68 Bit rate Option ccceeeeeseeteeeeeteeees 4 69 RS422 PID Option surorii 4 69 Test Mode Option c ccceseceeeeeseeees 4 69 Delay Option cccsecseseeseresseeseeeesteneeeeees 4 69 D Mode Option ccccccecseeseseeseteeeeees 4 69 SNMP oid index Option ceceeee 4 69 Version Options sisceasasseiiuesteusarcuens 4 69 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 10 4 Data XA RS232 Menu When M2 EOM2 DAT Fitted 4 70 OQVGIVIOW vis iesta tise EA 4 70 Hardware Release Option s cceee 4 70 Software Release Option cecccee 4 70 410 5 Data XB RS422 Menu M2 EOM2 DAT FIG E E A E S E E 4 70 OVENI OW seniidis norae aaea a a ea 4 70 Hardware Release
25. Pin outs 1 RS422 CLK_A 2 RS232_RXD 3 RS232_TXD 4 No Connection 5 Ground 6 RS422_CLK_B 7 No Connection 8 RS422_DATA_A 9 RS422_ DATA B QPSK Demodulator M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD Overview NOTE The M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD QPSK Demodulator Option is supported by Build version 3 1 and later The module allows the Encoder to receive and demodulate satellite transmissions that comply to EN 300 421 DVB S It must be used with an SD Decoder Module M2 EOM2 DEC which takes and decodes the transport stream produced by the demodulator The module has three inputs an IF input that operates over a frequency range of 50 MHz to 180 MHz and 20 dBm to 40 dBm input power and two L Band inputs that operate over a frequency range of 950 MHz to 2150 MHz and 25 dBm to 65 dBm input power It can normally receive signals with symbol rates in the range 1 to 45 Msymbol s but if the low symbol rate option M2 EOS2 LSYM is purchased this can be expanded to cover 0 3 to 45 Msymbol s Page 3 23 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 9 2 3 10 3 10 1 Page 3 24 Assembly Rear Panel IF In A 75 Q female BNC connector provides an IF Input Table 3 18 IF In Connector ay Item Specification Connector Type 75 Q BNC Female Connector designation IF IN Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground RF in Two 75 Q F type female connectors provide RF inputs im Table 3 19 RF In Connector Se Item Specification Connector Type
26. This enables the transmission mode i e number of carriers in an OFDM frame used by the terrestrial transmitter to be specified Table 4 80 Carriers Options Selected Option Description 2k Mode Terrestrial transmitter uses 2k transmission mode 2k carriers in an OFDM frame 8k Mode Terrestrial transmitter uses 8k transmission mode 8k carriers in an OFDM frame Other Frequency Option To access the Other Frequency option press the Other Frequency softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the flag which specifies whether other frequencies are in use or not to be set Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 75 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 81 Other Frequency Options Selected Option Description None No other frequency is in use in use One or more other frequencies are in use 4 11 6 Descriptor Type Cable Frequency Option See Frequency Option on page 4 73 Modulation Type Option To access the Modulation Type option press the Modulation Type softkey inthe Delivery Descriptor Menu This screen enables the type of modulation used by the cable channel to be specified Table 4 82 Modulation Type Options Selected Option Description 16 QAM Cable channel uses 16QAM modulation 32 QAM Cable channel uses 32QAM modulation 64 QAM Cable channel uses 64QAM modulation 128 QAM Cable channel uses 128QAM mod
27. UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz 1 47 500 6 191 500 2 57 500 7 198 500 3 64 500 8 205 500 4 177 500 9 212 500 5 184 500 10 219 500 Table F 7 China UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz in MHz in MHz 1 52 500 18 514 000 35 690 000 52 826 000 2 60 500 19 522 000 36 698 000 53 834 000 3 68 500 20 530 000 37 706 000 54 842 000 4 80 000 21 538 000 38 714 000 55 850 000 5 88 000 22 546 000 39 722 000 56 858 000 6 171 000 23 554 000 40 730 000 57 866 000 7 179 000 24 562 000 41 738 000 58 874 000 8 187 000 25 610 000 42 746 000 59 882 000 9 195 000 26 618 000 43 754 000 60 890 000 10 203 000 21 626 000 44 762 000 61 898 000 11 211 000 28 634 000 45 770 000 62 906 000 12 219 000 29 642 000 46 778 000 13 474 000 30 650 00 41 786 000 14 482 000 31 658 000 48 794 000 15 490 000 32 666 000 49 802 000 16 498 000 33 674 000 50 810 000 17 506 000 34 682 000 51 818 000 Table F 8 OIRT UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz RI 52 500 R VII 186 000 RII 62 000 R VIII 194 000 R III 80 000 R IX 202 000 RIV 88 000 RX 210 000 RV 96 000 R XI 218 000 R VI 178 000 R XII 226 000 1 Organisation that co ordinated TV standards and programme interchange among the Eastern bl
28. and 7 8 with 16QAM 1 to 48 Msymbol s 20 25 30 35 selectable Normal inverted Modulation on off Carrier on off 50 180 MHz tuneable in 1 kHz steps lt 1 kHz all causes over 10 years gt 60 dB gt 40 dB lt 66 dBc Hz at 100 Hz offset lt 76 dBc Hz at 1 kHz offset lt 86 dBc Hz at 10 kHz offset lt 96 dBc Hz at 100 kHz offset lt 120 dBc Hz at 1 MHz offset and above lt 60 dBc 4 kHz over the frequency range 0 to 500 MHz but excluding the frequency range of the wanted output signal equal to 1 06 x Symbol Rate about the carrier frequency as defined by the spectrum mask Figure A 1 in EN 300 421 lt 55 dBc each component lt 120 dBc Hz gt 30 dB 50 180 MHz Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification Table B 15 IF OUT MONITOR Specification E5740 IF Item Safety status Connector type Connector designation Output impedance Output power Return loss Specification SELV BNC female 75 Q IF OUT MONITOR 75Q 20 dB 2 dB relative to main IF output power gt 20 dB 50 180 MHz L Band Outputs E5740 LBAND Table B 16 L Band Out Main Specification E5740 Lband Item Safety Status Connector Type Connector Designation Output Impedance Output Power Power Level Stability Return Loss Modulation format FEC Rate Symbol Rate Spectrum roll off factor Spectrum sense
29. audio PID option 4 64 audio video menu 4 11 4 13 auto detect VITC option 4 48 auto lip sync option 4 56 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Index 1 ST TM E10076 3 Indexes background colour option 4 34 backup configurations 4 120 band plan option 4 72 band plans F 3 G 4 countries F 3 manual option F 3 bandwidth option 4 45 4 73 4 86 basic interoperable scrambling system BISS 3 5 mode 1 3 6 4 95 battery disposal 6 12 baud rate option 4 67 beryllium 2 5 BISS key entry option 4 95 BISS firmware option 4 94 BISS hardware option 4 94 BISS key code option 4 101 BISS E injected id option 4 96 bit stream mode option 4 59 bit rate and resolution 1 9 audio 1 10 1 12 range 1 9 reflex 3 5 setting used with M2 PSR 3 422BAS 4 38 bit rate 188 option 4 81 4 84 4 87 4 93 bit rate 204 option 4 81 4 87 4 93 bit rate option 4 38 4 69 4 97 boards in basic encoder 1 19 break out cable audio 1 11 2 14 buffer mode 6 10 settings 6 10 build menu 4 31 build revision 1 5 reference number 1 5 build version 1 3 C CA input option 4 100 cable routing 2 5 wiring colours 2 7 cables used during EMC testing B 19 carriers option 4 75 cautions meaning of vi cc format option 4 48 ce mark B 19 centre frequency option 4 87 changing a setting 1U 4 10 channel option 4 59 4 73 cleaning 6 3 clip level option 4 58 clock option
30. commonly known as MPEG 2 and within these specifications all timing is derived from a 27 MHz system clock The system clock is required to have an accuracy of better than 30 ppm An oven controlled crystal oscillator OCXO within this equipment achieves the 30 ppm accuracy within five minutes of applying power This accuracy is maintained over the specified operating temperature range for the life of the product without further adjustment Composite television systems such as PAL and NTSC have traditionally used high precision oscillators for colour sub carrier Many different specifications are in common use and a required accuracy in the range 0 2 ppm to 2 ppm is common Typically an entire TV studio runs from a central frequency standard with all equipment being fed with a Black and Burst reference signal Generally individual items of equipment are not capable of the required accuracy in the absence of this reference Where a suitable reference is not available e g outside broadcast or intercontinental programme exchange the specifications allow a relaxed accuracy When this equipment is used to source a timing reference which is used to generate a composite video output for instance the PAL or NTSC output of a TANDBERG Television Receiver Decoder the accuracy of the resultant sub carrier is directly traceable to the 27 MHz system clock in this equipment To ensure continuing accuracy the system clock in this equipment can
31. e A freeze frame with or without ident text e Cut to a black screen with or without ident text Audio Encoding General Audio can be encoded to e MPEG 1 Audio layer 2 standard sampling rate 32 kHz or 48 kHz e Dolby Digital AC 3 sampling rate 32 kHz or 48 kHz Output bit rate is selectable in the range 32 kbit s 384 kbit s dependent on configuration for MPEG 1 Audio layer 2 and 56 kbit s 640 kbit s dependent on configuration for Dolby Digital AC 3 coding mode selectable between 1 0 and 2 0 e Dolby Digital AC 3 pre encoded audio IEC 61937 specification in pass through mode is also available it only operates at 48 kHz This is where an audio stream has already been encoded externally prior to entering the Encoder Linear PCM SMPTE 302M Dolby E Pass through NOTES 1 See Annex G Audio Modes for details of setting up the audio 2 MPEG 1 audio sampling rate is fixed at 48 kHz when controlled from the front panel 14 To ensure broadcast quality it is recommended that the studio reference is fed to HYSNC 15 Dolby Digital AC 3 is only available when software option M2 ESO2 AC3 is purchased 16 To achieve lip sync in all modes the audio option M2 EOM2 AUDLIN must be used Page 1 10 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Audio I nputs The standard audio input is e AUDIO IN 15 way male D t
32. eects B 20 B 10 3 M2 EOM2 REMUX Remux Option Mod le warctiaicdiiiannnrnnicmani B 21 COMME COIS ceceseceeseeeseeseseeeeeeeeeeteeeeseees B 21 LEDS scie B 21 B 10 4 M2 EOM2 XLR XLR Expander Card OPON inona nanaii B 23 B 10 5 M2 EOM2 DEC SD Decoder Card Option B 24 B 10 6 M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD QPSK Demodulator Card Option eee B 26 B 10 7 M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD 16QAM Demodulator Card Option ce B 27 B 10 8 M2 EOM2 IP IP Output Card Option B 27 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page B 1 Technical Specification List of Tables Table B 22 Alarm Specification cc cccsccssessesscssesesneseesesses B 13 Table B 1 Serial Digital Video Specification 0 0 B 3 Table B 23 Remote Control Specification esses B 13 Table B 2 H SYNC Specification ccccscscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssses B 3 Table B 24 RS 422 Data Specification 0 cece B 14 Table B 3 Analogue Video Specification B 4 Table B 25 AC Power Supply Specification 0 esses B 15 Table B 4 Encoder Settings for PALINTSC Video Table B 26 DC Power Supply Specification 0 0 0 B 16 Performance FiQures cscsssscsesse cesses B 4 Table B 27 Physical Details ccccseeeeeeestesteseetesereeeees B 16 Table B 5 PAL System Video Performance Figures 0 6 B 4 Table B 28 Environmental Specification 0 cccseccceeeee B 17 Table B 6 NTSC System Video Perfo
33. evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification B 5 B 5 1 Power Supply AC Power Input This equipment is fitted with an wide ranging power supply It is suitable for supply voltages of 100 120 Vac 10 6 or 220 240 Vac 10 6 at 50 60 Hz nominal Table B 25 AC Power Supply Specification Item Power distribution system Connection to supply Class of equipment Rated voltage Rated frequency Voltage selection Rated current 1U 2U Input connector Fuse Fuse type Fuse current rating Power consumption 1U 2U Stand by power 1U 2U Specification Type TN ONLY EN 60950 para 1 2 12 1 Power distribution system having one point directly earthed the exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to that point by protective earth conductors This equipment must NOT be used with single phase three wire and PE TT or IT Type Power distribution systems Pluggable Equipment Type A EN 60950 para 1 2 5 Equipment which is intended for connection to the building power supply wiring via a non industrial plug and socket outlet or a non industrial appliance coupler or both Correct mains polarity must always be observed Do not use reversible plugs with this equipment Class I Equipment EN 60950 para 1 2 4 electric shock protection by basic insulation and protective earth 100 120 220 240 Vac single phase 50 60 Hz Wide ranging 2 A 100 120 Vac rang
34. key to cycle through the test patterns and to return to the menu Keyboard Test Press the Keyboard softkey to access the option and then press each softkey and keypad key in turn The display shows the name of each key pressed Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu Fail Relay Test Press the Fail Relay softkey to access the option and then press any key except the Quit softkey to toggle the fail relay on and off Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu The relay can usually be heard clicking as it changes state The relay is connected to the rear panel ALARM connector see Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment for the connector pin out details Alarm Relay Test Press the Alarm Relay softkey to access the option and then press any key except the Quit softkey to toggle the alarm relay on and off Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu The relay can usually be heard clicking as it changes state The relay is connected to the rear panel ALARM connector see Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment for the connector pin out details Alarm LED Test Press the Alarm LED softkey to access the option and then press any key except the Quit softkey to toggle the front panel Alarm LED on and off Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding Buzzer Test Press the Buzzer softkey to access the
35. press the Auto Detect VITC softkey in the VBI Menu This enables the Vertical Interval Time Code VITC to be automatically detected The option can be turned On or Off VBI Line n Option To access the VBI Line n option press the VBI Line n softkey in the VBI Menu the line number shown changes according to the line option selected This enables extraction of VBI data from the selected line and specifies the type of VBI data that the line contains NOTE To autodetect VITC the lines within the VBI line option must be set to VITC Page 4 48 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 43 VBI Line n Options Option Description Frame Rate 29 97 Hz Off VBI data is not extracted from the line Vertical Interval Time Code VITC data extracted from the line Video Index Closed Caption The setting cannot be selected on this screen but is set by setting the Closed Caption option to On It indicates that closed captioning data is extracted from the line Setting Line 21 back to Off or VITC resets the Closed Caption option back to Off Neilsen AMOL 1 Neilsen AMOL 1 data is extracted from the line Neilsen AMOL 11 Neilsen AMOL 11 data is extracted from the line Frame Rate 25 Hz Off VBI data is not extracted from the line Vertical Interval Time Code VIT
36. selected Two characters on the bottom left and right corners of the display indicate which arrow keys are active at any time These show either an arrow up down left or right if the key is active or a dot if the key has no action Navigating the Menus 1U To navigate the menus e DOWN Scrolls down to next option in current menu e UP Scrolls up to previous option in current menu e RIGHT Advances to next menu level in hierarchy or selects an item for editing e LEFT Reverts to previous menu level in hierarchy ENTER No action CANCEL No action Changing a Setting 1U Overview Once an item has been selected for editing with the RIGHT key the setting can be changed see For Multiple Choice Entry on page 4 11 or For Text or Numeric Entry on page 4 11 Press ENTER to confirm or CANCEL to discard a new setting Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 3 4 Operating the Equipment Locally For Multiple Choice Entry DOWN Scrolls down to next option UP Scrolls up to previous option RIGHT No action LEFT No action ENTER Accepts new setting CANCEL Leaves setting unchanged For Text or Numeric Entry The character list for text entry contains the following characters space ABCDEFGHI KLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghij kl mnopqrstuvwxyz 0123456789 _ amp lt gt For numeric entry only 0 9 are displayed e DOWN Scrolls down through character list
37. service id option 4 22 service info menu 4 21 service name option 4 21 change due to remultiplexing 3 12 service prov in option 4 99 service provider option 4 21 4 99 service type TSC 4 20 4 23 sering 6 3 l checks upon completion 6 4 session word option 4 101 setting bit rates and avoiding overflow 3 16 settings affecting other equipment rate buffer 6 10 setup menu 4 17 setup password option 4 29 setup audio menu 4 53 setup data menu 4 67 setup IRD menu 4 105 setup mux menu ATSC 4 92 setup mux menu DVB 4 91 setup output menu 4 71 setup video menu 4 32 shock and vibration B 18 short channel name ATSC 4 19 short name in option 4 99 short name out option 4 99 SI level option 4 19 4 21 signal connections 2 10 diagram 2 12 SMPTE 302M standard option 4 59 SMPTE 310 3 21 SNG key RAS 1 option 4 94 4 95 SNMP control option 4 30 SNMP master option 4 25 SNMP oid index option 4 68 4 69 SNMP trap IP option 4 25 softkey 4 9 4 13 functions associated with 4 15 software options 3 29 M2 ES02 16QAMDEMOD 16qam demodulator 3 30 M2 ES02 422 4 2 2 video encoding 3 30 M2 ESO2 8PSKDEMOD 8psk demodulator 3 30 M2 ESO2 AC3 dolby digital AC3 3 30 M2 ESO2 ACON auto concatenation 3 30 M2 ESO2 LSYM low symbol rate 3 30 M2 ESO2 M316QAM 16qam modulation 3 30 M2 ESO2 NR noise reduction 3 29 M2 ESO2 PU performance upgrade 3 29 M2 ESO2 RAS remote author
38. to scroll up and down to show more options in the menu A clear circle indicates that the option cannot be accessed and is for information only Press Quit to revert to previous menu 4 5 4 Display Screens The display screens shown in Section 4 5 3 How to Use the Functions Associated with Softkeys are identical to those seen on the Encoder front panel display screen The remainder of the display screens in this chapter are representations and may differ slightly 4 5 5 Menu Formats All menus generally conform to the following format Some of the menus provide access to sub menus A clear circle indicates no further access and is for information only A black circle indicates further menus or options Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 15 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Input Monitor Audio Video Operations Menu Menu Video Input IF Output Profile Level Modulation Compression Mode IF Power Ident Text FEC Rate Audio A Bit rate 188 Input Level L Symbol Rate Input Level R IF Frequency Summary Audio B Screen Input Level L Input Level R Ops Cfgs More Quit Config Operations Menu Menu Load Active Config L From the Input Monitor Screen Store Active Config see the Operations Load
39. 000 18 497 000 39 623 000 60 749 000 81 875 000 19 503 000 40 629 000 61 755 000 82 881 000 20 509 000 41 635 000 62 761 000 83 887 000 21 515 000 42 641 000 63 767 000 22 521 000 43 647 000 64 773 000 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page F 7 ST TM E10076 3 Band Plans Table F 15 CCIR UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz in MHz 21 414 000 38 610 000 55 746 000 22 482 000 39 618 000 56 754 000 23 490 000 40 626 000 57 762 000 24 498 000 41 634 000 58 770 000 25 506 000 42 642 000 59 778 000 26 514 000 43 650 000 60 786 000 27 522 000 44 658 000 61 794 000 28 530 000 45 666 000 62 802 000 29 538 000 46 674 000 63 810 000 30 546 000 41 682 000 64 818 000 31 554 000 48 690 000 65 826 000 32 562 000 49 698 000 66 834 000 33 570 000 50 706 000 67 842 000 34 578 000 51 714 000 68 850 000 35 586 000 52 722 000 69 858 000 36 594 000 53 730 000 37 602 000 54 738 000 2 CCIR is now know as International Telecommunications Union Radiocommunications Study Groups Page F 8 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents ST TM E10076 3 Annex G Audio Modes G 1 Analogue AUG sacctcasstcebstsessade ss ltectsdl an ismieetebins G 3 List of Figures iaital Figure G 1 Analogue Audio Modes vues G 3 G 2 Digital AUIO nssenestensstenasnan
40. 1 This function can be used with the Encoder still in service 2 Ifan error reoccurs within approximately 30 seconds then it does not interrupt the front panel display This avoids swamping the front panel display with error messages should an intermittent error occur Refer to Annex H Error Messages for further details of error messages CAUTION Itdoes not mean that the Encoder is fully functional if the Error option does not produce any results Some processes cannot be tested on line Diagnostics Menu Introduction The Diagnostics Menu is selected from the Advanced Menu by pressing the Diagnostics softkey This menu see Figure 6 2 has a selection of diagnostic tests which allow the operator to test the individual component parts of the equipment Also option 8 the event log on the web browser interface see Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface shows the events and tests which have been performed since the Encoder was last switched on Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 6 5 ST TM E10076 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding Page 6 6 More Advanced Menu Diagnostics Front Panel Diagnostics Menu LCD Display Keyboard Fail Relay Alarm Relay Alarm LED Buzzer Quit Figure 6 2 Finding the Diagnostics Menu LCD Display Test Press the LCD Display softkey to access the option and then press any
41. 1 0 and later 4 Only shown if M2 ESO2 PU option enabled 8 Only shown if Input Source Select is set to Auto Config Switch 9 Available from Build version 3 1 0 and later Figure 4 10 Menu Hierarchy Setup Video Menu Page 4 32 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Input Source Select NOTE This option is available in Build version 3 1 0 and later To access the Input Source Select option press the Input Source Select softkey from the Video Source Menu This allows the enabling or disabling of automatic frame rate detection Table 4 24 Input Source Select Options Selected Option Description Manual The frame rate must be set via the Frame rate option Auto Frame Rate The frame rate is automatically detected Auto Config Switch The frame rate is automatically detected and the Encoder loads the appropriate config defined by Default 525 Config and Default 625 Config Set up the Video in this sequence ___ gt Setup Video Source Setup Video Encoder Setup Video Encoder Source Option Profile Level Option Compression Mode Encoding Encoding Serial Digital Video In Standard Low Delay Very Low Delay Mega Low Delay Seamless 1 6 4 2 0 MP ML 4 2 2 422P ML option COMP VIDEO Test Pattern Analogue Video E57xx Encoder Figure 4 11 Setting up the Video Input Frame Rate Op
42. 1 3 1 1 1 Who Should Use This Manual 1 3 112 Build VersiONsicistccrecinociunnandeun 1 3 1 1 3 What Equipment is Covered by This Mand le ressis 1 3 Equipment Models cece 1 3 Information Label ieee 1 5 Hardware COnfiguration ssssssssesseseseees 1 5 Build REVISION steerer 1 5 Role of the Encoder in a SyStOM cece 1 5 1 2 1 Typical System uo 1 5 1 2 2 DSNG SYStOMS ccc 1 6 OVEVIOW isis cnticd statin nianeud cur 1 6 ESTIA oriee a a 1 7 E5740 E 5760 niriana 1 7 1 2 3 DENG SYSTEMS sensos 1 7 Summary of F AtUICS eects eeseeeeteeeenteretey 1 8 1 3 1 Video ENcoding cssscsscsesssses 1 8 MPEG 2 Encoding errre 1 8 Video Encoding ModeS cesses 1 8 Video INPUTS irena 1 8 Video Input Types essences 1 8 Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection and Handling EDH sscsssssecsssessneressees 1 8 Video Encoding Functions cssscsssees 1 8 Motion Estimation eects 1 9 Variable Video Bitrate cesses 1 9 Coding ReSOIUtIONS 0 eecceeeseeseenterteees 1 9 Internal Frame Synchroniser sesso 1 10 Output on Video LOSS veces 1 10 1 3 2 Audio ENCOdiNG cccsesccsscssessssessneeesenees 1 10 ST TM E10076 3 1 4 Chapter 1 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Generalsin ann aaa 1 10 AUdIO INDUES iiieoo 1 11 Audio Channels c scsssssssssesssssessrsssssresessees 1 11 MPEG Encoding Modes essre 1 11 Dolby Digital AC 3 Encoding Modes 1 11 T St TONGS visit cssied ended aiid viditdideaiias 1 12 Audio Variable Bitr
43. 1 3 What Equipment is Covered by This Manual Equipment Models Each model of Encoder comprises an enclosure with a Base Board and Modulator fitted as standard The E5714 and E5740 are fitted with a Satellite Modulator the E5715 and E5750 are fitted with an OFDM Modulator Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 3 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder There are vacant slots for option modules one in the E5714 and E5715 three in the E5760 four in the E5740 five in the E5750 These slots can be occupied by any combinations of modules shown in Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades TANDBERG Figure 1 2 2U Encoder Front View No options need be fitted but any slot not occupied by an option module must have a blank module or blanking plate fitted see Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades The marketing codes part numbers and model numbers of the basic units are shown in Table 1 2 those of the option modules in Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades Table 1 2 Equipment Model Descriptions Model Part Marketing Description Number Number Code E5714 Encoder 10110 M2NOY E5714 1U MPEG 2 DSNG Encoder with QPSK modulator Has 4 2 0 4 2 2 video encoding mode and fully exhaustive motion estimation E5715 Encoder 10111 M2NOY E5715 1U MPEG 2 DENG Encoder with OFDM modulator Has 4 2 0 4 2 2 video encoding mode and fully exhaustive motion estimation E5740 Encoder 10076 M2NOY E5740 2U MPE
44. 3 Entire system must be genlocked to studio reference black and burst Set Encoder clock source to HSYNC Feed Dolby AC 3 coder from genlocked output of the audio A D A Lock Dolby AC 3 Encoder to AES EBU reference from Encoder Independent of Encoder clock source gt Independent of Encoder clock source Figure G 2 Digital Audio Modes Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page G 3 ST TM E10076 3 Audio Modes G 3 G 4 Page G 4 Embedded Audio on the SDI Figure G 3 shows the audio signal flow on the Base Board While six audio stereo pairs are available only two stereo pairs can be processed by the Base Board at any one time Audio can be embedded on a SDI video feed The specified groups are 1 2 3 4 Each group contains two stereo pairs hence each SDI can carry a maximum of 2 x 4 8 stereo pairs or 16 mono channels Each group has an associated Data Identifier DID The standard DIDs are typically e Group 1 Ox2FF e Group 2 Ox1FD e Group 3 Ox1FB e Group 4 0x2F9 Other DIDs are possible Refer to the SMPTE 272M specification for more details DID 1F4 is reserved for EDH error packets Detail of Encoder Operation The Encoder can de embed any two DID s at any one time thus giving a total of four embedded audio sources embedded audio 1 4 The default DID for embedded audio 1 2 is 2FFh Group 1 The default DID for embedded audio 3 4 is 1FDh Group 2 T
45. 4 104 Table 4 129 Audio Type of Audio Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 Data Type of Data Option NOTES 1 This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services Available from Build version 2 2 0 and later 2 The option could be Data RS 232 Data RS 422 etc The words in the brackets change according to the type of data that was previously selected The Data Type of Data option is selected from the 2 Service Menu by pressing the Data Type of Data softkey The option is used for entering or updating data PIDs Table 4 130 Data Type of Data Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 Teletext Option NOTE This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services Available from Build version 2 2 0 and later The Teletext option is selected from the 2 Service Menu by pressing the Teletext softkey The option is used for entering or updating Teletext PIDs Table 4 131 Teletext Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 14 4 14 1 4 14 2 4 14 3 Operating the Equipment Locally IRD Menu 3 1 and later Overview NOTE This option is available in Build version 3 1 0 and later The IRD Menu is selected from the Setup
46. 4 17 3 Active Configuration 4 120 4 17 4 User Configurations 0 0 ccs 4 120 4 17 5 Backup Configurations cess 4 121 4 17 6 Factory Default Configurations 4 121 4 17 7 Configuration Write Protection 4 121 4 17 8 Quick Configuration From the Summary SOLE Eiio 4 121 4 17 9 Load Active Config Option 0 eee 4 122 4 17 10Store Active Config Option eee 4 122 4 17 11Load Configs From Backup Option 4 122 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 17 12 Store Configs in Backup Option 4 122 Table 4 27 Background Colour Options 0 ussseseessen 4 34 4 17 13 Factory 525 Defaults Option 4 123 Table 4 28 Video Bandwidth Options essssssssssesesesesesesee 4 35 4 17 14 Factory 625 Defaults Option ss0 4 123 Table 4 29 OP Video Loss Options sssististstsiseen 4 35 Table 4 30 Noise Reduction Options 4 36 List of Figures Table 4 31 Profile Level Options sscctsnscvscersestsstssnesetee 4 37 Figure 4 1 1U Summary Screen ssessessessessensensnstnstsisen 4 9 Table 4 32 Compression Mode Options 0 0 4 37 Figure 4 2 1U Navigation Keys and Buttons n n 4 10 Table 4 33 Seamless Mode Bit rate Full Resolution Only 4 38 Figure 4 3 2U Input MOmitor sssessetseessnstnststiseineineinee 4 12 Table 4 34 Resolution Options sccsccscsscssvssesssssstastsetsee 4 41 Figure 4 4 2U Summary Screen ssssssrsssstnsts
47. 4 19 major channel 4 20 minor channel 4 20 PMT PID 4 20 program number 4 20 service type 4 20 4 23 short channel name 4 19 SI level 4 19 syntax 4 19 service info menu syntax DVB 4 21 logical chan desc 4 24 logical channel 4 24 network id 4 22 network name 4 21 PMT PID 4 23 service id 4 22 service name 4 21 service provider 4 21 SI level 4 21 syntax 4 21 transport stream id 4 23 system menu 4 17 configurations menu factory 525 defaults 4 122 load active config 4 121 load configs from backup 4 121 store active config 4 121 Index 10 store configs in backup 4 121 vertical blanking interval VBI menu 4 46 auto detect VITC option 4 48 cc format option 4 48 closed caption option 4 48 teletext all lines option 4 46 teletext data out option 4 46 teletext PID option 4 46 VBI in picture option 4 47 VBI line n option 4 48 VBI on PID option 4 46 VBI PID option 4 46 VPS line 16 option 4 47 WSS line 23 option 4 48 video encoder menu 3 2 pulldown option 4 44 afd option 4 41 aspect ration option 4 41 bandwidth option 4 45 bitrate option 4 38 compression mode option 4 37 concatenation option 4 44 copyright option 4 45 delay option 4 40 encoder type option 4 45 field frame option 4 43 GOP length option 4 43 GOP structure option 4 42 long GOPs option 4 43 original option 4 45 PID option 4 44 profile level option 4 37 reflex enable option
48. 4 45 resolution option 4 40 s w release option 4 45 VBR mode option 4 39 video menu 4 31 video source menu 4 31 background colour option 4 34 frame rate option 4 33 ident text option 4 34 input source option 4 33 input termination option 4 35 logo option 4 36 noise reduction option 4 35 op video loss option 4 35 text colour option 4 34 time code option 4 36 video bandwidth option 4 35 video input option 4 31 video locked option 4 34 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3
49. 4 93 cloning a file 5 11 closed caption 4 49 closed caption option 4 48 coding mode option 4 56 coding standard 4 54 coding standard option 4 54 compliance safety B 17 shock and vibration B 18 compression mode option 4 37 Index 2 concatenation option 4 44 config name option 4 26 configuration typical system 1 7 write protection 4 120 configurations 4 118 predefined 4 120 quick 4 120 connecting up 2 12 connectors alarm 2 16 analogue component video 2 13 audio additional input option module 2 14 3 7 input 2 14 3 7 data 2 17 DVB ASI 2 15 ethernet 2 15 remote control 2 16 B 13 remux option module 3 13 RS 232 and RS 422 data input option 3 10 RS 232 data 2 17 RS 422 data 2 18 SS and ASI optical outputs option module 3 22 video HYSNC IN 2 13 SDI error detection and handling EDH 1 8 2 13 serial 2 13 control and monitoring 1 15 copyright option 4 45 4 62 creating and downloading a logo 5 8 c tick mark B 19 current password change 4 29 current password option 4 29 customer services address viii D mode option 4 69 ata PID 4 69 RS 422 option 4 68 data type of data option 4 103 data channels 1 14 dc filter option 4 63 deemphasis option 4 63 defaults 525 factory defaults 4 122 delay option 4 40 4 68 4 69 delivery descriptor option 4 72 descriptor type option 4 72 destination IP address option 4 88 destination UDP port option 4 88 diagnostics
50. 5 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data XLR Upconverter Slot 2 Streams 3 4 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data QPSK OFDM SATMOD3 IF Slot 3 No Streams ASI ATM QPSK SATMOD3 Slot 4 Streams 2 6 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data Upconverter Slot S No Streams ATM OFDM Slot 6 No Streams ATM ASI IRD Mode 2 Version 3 UES 0x01020300 Oxffffffft Slot 1 No Streams Remux Slot 2 Streams 3 4 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data QPSK OFDM SATMOD3 IF Slot 3 No Streams ASI ATM QPSK SATMOD3 Slot 4 Streams 2 6 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data Upconverter Slot 5 No Stroams ATM OFOM Slot 6 No Streams ATM ASI IRD Mode 3 Version 2 UES 0x01030200 Oxfffffftt Slot 1 Streams 1 5 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data XLR Upconverter Slot 2 No Streams ASI ATM QPSK OFDM SATMOD3 IF Slot 3 No Streams ASI ATM QPSK SATMOD3 Slot 4 Streams 2 6 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Bata Upconverter Slot 5 Streams 3 4 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data QPSK OFDM Slot 6 No Streams ATM ASI IRD QPSK Mode 4 Version 1 UES 0x01040100 OxffFFFFFF Slot 1 No Streams Remux Slot 2 No Streams ASI ATM QPSK OFDM SATMODS IF Slot 3 No Streams ASI ATM QPSK SATMOD3 Slot 4 Streams 2 6 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data Upconverter Slot S Streams 3 4 Audio Enhanced Audio V2 Data Data QPSK OFDM Ejire PE Local intranet Figure 5 13 Backplane M
51. 50 50 50 Interlace 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Frames second 30 29 97 30 29 97 25 25 25 25 25 Lines second 15 750 15 750 15 625 15 625 15 625 15 625 Aspect ratio 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 Video band MHz 4 2 4 2 5 0 5 0 5 5 6 B 1 2 Audio Analogue and Digital Audio Table B 8 Analogue and Digital Audio Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Connector designation AUDIO IN Connector type 15 way D type male connector Input standard analogue Balanced analogue Clip level 12 dB 15 dB or 18 dB 15 dB available with PCB issue 4 and later Sampling rate 32 48 kHz selectable Input impedance 600 Q or 20 KQ selectable 20 KQ default Input standard digital AES EBU digital Termination 1109 Sampling rate 32 48 kHz selectable Input rate 32 44 1 48 kHz Output digital ref AES EBU digital Impedance 15 0 Sampling rate 48 kHz Coding Standards Coding standard 1 MPEG 1 Layer 2 ISO IEC 13818 Supported coding modes Single Mono Dual Mono Joint Stereo Stereo Supported coded data rate 32 kbit s 384 kbit s see Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 5 Coding standard 2 Dolby Digital AC 3 ATSC A 52 DVB TR 102 154 Supported coding modes 1 0 2 0 Supported coded data rate 56 k 640 kbit s see Chapter 1 Introduction Table 1 6 Coding standard 3 Dolby Digital AC 3 Pass through ATSC A 52 DVB TR 102 154 see Note 1 after Table Coding standard 4 Linear PCM Dolby E Pass through SMPTE 302M see Note 1 after Table Pa
52. 75 Q F type Female Connector designation RF 1 RF 2 Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground 16QAM Demodulator M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD Overview The module allows the Encoder to receive and demodulate satellite transmissions that comply to EN 300 421 DVB S and EN 301 210 DVB DSNG It must be used with an SD Decoder Module M2 EOM2 DEC which takes and decodes the transport stream produced by the demodulator The module has two L band inputs that operate over a frequency range of 950 MHz to 2150 MHz and 25 dBm to 65 dBm input power It can decode signals with symbol rates in the range 1 to 45 Msymbol s It is capable of demodulating 8PSK and 16QAM transmissions as well as QPSK transmissions but these are software options Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 10 2 Assembly Rear Panel L Band Inputs Two 75 Q F type female connectors provide L band inputs Table 3 20 L Band Input Connector Item Specification Connector Type 75 Q F type Female Connector designation L Band Input 1 L Band Input 2 Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground 3 11 IP Output Card M2 EOM2 IP 3 11 1 Overview The IP Output card provides a 10 100 BaseT Ethernet port out of which the transport stream generated by the Encoder can be output in UDP packets at up to 50 Mbit s The mapping of MPEG 2 transport stream packets into IP data frames is done ac
53. 8 MHz Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 8 MHz 10 MHz Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 10 MHz 12 MHz Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 12 MHz Modulation Type Option To access the Modulation Type option press the Modulation Type softkey inthe Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the type of modulation used to be specified Table 4 76 Modulation Type Options Selected Option Description QPSK Terrestrial transmitter uses QPSK modulation 16 QAM Terrestrial transmitter uses 16QAM modulation 64 QAM Terrestrial transmitter uses 64QAM modulation Hierarchy Option To access the Hierarchy option press the Hierarchy softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This screen enables the hierarchy of the terrestrial transmission to be specified Table 4 77 Hierarchy Options Selected Option Description Non Hierarchical Terrestrial transmission is not hierarchical Alpha 1 Terrestrial transmission is hierarchical and the value 1 Alpha 2 Terrestrial transmission is hierarchical and the value 2 Alpha 4 Terrestrial transmission is hierarchical and the value 4 FEC HP and FEC LP Options To access the FEC HP or the FEC LP option press the FEC HP or FEC LP softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu These screens enable the inner FEC schemes used by the terrestrial transmitter to be specified NOTE If the Hierarchy option is set to Non Hierarchical
54. ASI OUT connector using good quality O 75 Q coaxial cable for example BBC PSF 1 3 ws A 75 Q BNC connector provides the output from the Encoder Table 2 7 ASI OUT 1 2 and 3 Connectors Pin Signal Centre Signal Screen Ground 2 6 8 Control I nterfaces Connection Operation of the Encoder from a TANDBERG Television control system is via the Ethernet network running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP protocol Connect the ETHERNET connector to the controller for example MEM Local control is implemented through the front panel keypad and display See Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally for details of how to access the front panel menus Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 15 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment Ethernet 1 and 2 An 8 way RJ 45 connector provides a 10BaseT Ethernet interface for communications with the MEM for control and monitoring The Encoder has a single ina switched Ethernet channel Ethernet 1 is selected as default at power up If a carrier is not detected on Ethernet 1 then the input switches to Ethernet 2 This gives a redundant Ethernet control via two hubs Table 2 8 Ethernet Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Tx Out 4 5 Not connected 2 Tx Out 6 Rx In 3 Rx In 7 8 Not connected Alarm If required connect an external status monitoring 1 5 device to the ALARM connector A 9 way D type male conn
55. Adio IM CONNGCIDM jcsinctinnucceaeincasteet 2 15 2 8 1 Methods of Changing the Encoder IP able 2 7 ASI OUT 1 2 and 3 Connectors ees teeestteeees 2 15 NACL OSS ceccccccccccccccccccscccssccssseccsstsssssecssseesssves 2 22 Table 2 8 Ethernet Connector ssscccccccrrrcncccrcnnn 2 16 2 8 2 From the Front Panel Ments vss 2 22 Table 2 9 Alarm CONNGODEs sits stiches ailneeststnntanatictes 2 16 2 8 3 Via Telnet 2 22 able 2 10 Remote Control Connector RS 232 RS 485 2 17 ey a Eee Table 2 11 RS 232 Data Connector Base Board List of Figures ASYINCHIONOUS E E E sien 2 17 Figure 2 1 Fitting the Encoder into a Rack Table 2 12 RS 422 Data Connector Base Board Figure 2 2 Air Path Through the Enclosure 7 SYNCHRONOUS serstses aiaiel i j Figure 2 3 E5714 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and able 2 13 IF Out Connector Main CONNECTOR 2 10 Table 2 14 IF Output Connector Monitor Figure 2 4 E5715 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and Table 2 15 L band In Connector GONMOCUONS risainia n sania ai 2 11 Table 2 16 L band Out Main Connector si Figure 2 5 E5740 IF 2U Rear Panel Component P arts and Table 2 17 IF Out 1 CONNECHOr sssesisisrsssnssrnrrrrrrrrnrnnnnnnnnnrnrn CONNECHOTS wsssesssssenstsseetsestnsetseenstvnetsetinsnnennas 2 11 Table 2 18 IF Out 2 CONNECHOT sssrin Figure 2 6 E5740 L Band 2U Rear Panel Component P arts and Connetti sass sssreecetenci inn ahead 2 11 Figure 2 7 E5750 2U Rear Panel Componen
56. Annex F Band Plans for the frequencies selected associated with particular countries Frequency Option To access the Frequency option press the Frequency softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the carrier frequency of the transmitter to be specified NOTES 1 This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control 2 This option is status only unless Manual has been selected in the Band Plan option Table 4 74 Frequency Options Selected Option Description Min 0 0001 MHz Carrier frequency of transmitter Max 42949 6729 MHz Step Size 0 0001 MHz Bandwidth Option To access the Bandwidth option press the Bandwidth softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the channel spacing of the terrestrial transmitter to be specified 10 CCIR is now know as International Telecommunications Union Radiocommunications Study Groups 11 Organisation that co ordinated TV standards and programme interchange among the Eastern block countries of Europe Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 73 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally NOTE This option is status only unless Manual has been selected in the Band Plan option Table 4 75 Bandwidth Options Selected Option Description 6 MHz Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 6 MHz 7 MHz Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 7 MHz
57. Baud Rate softkey in the Remote Control Menu Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 25 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 7 5 Page 4 26 Table 4 13 SABus Baud Rate Options Selected Option Description Selected Option Description 1200 1200 Baud rate 9600 9600 Baud rate 2400 2400 Baud rate 19200 19200 Baud rate 4800 4800 Baud rate 38400 38400 Baud rate SABus Data Bits Option To access the SABus Data Bits option press the SABus Data Bits softkey in the Remote Control Menu Table 4 14 SABus Data Bits Options Selected Option Description 8 1 stop bit 7 2 stop bits General Menu Overview The General Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the General softkey This menu provides options for amending the general parameters of the Encoder See Figure 4 9 for the General Menu Structure Model Number Option The Model Number option is shown in the General Menu It cannot be changed Config Name Option To access the Config Name option press the Config Name softkey in the General Menu These are the names of stored Encoder set ups They can be recalled from the configs Menu see Section 4 17 Configs Menu Local Time Option To access the Local Time option press the Local Time softkey in the General Menu Local Date Option To access the Local Date option press the Local Date softkey in the General Menu NOTE Only the a
58. Channel option press the Major Channel softkey in the 2 Service Menu This enables the major channel to be specified Minor Channel Option NOTE This option is only shown in ATSC mode To access the Minor Channel option press the Minor Channel softkey in the 2 Service Menu This enables the minor channel to be specified Logical Channel Option To access the Logical Channel option press the Logical Channel softkey inthe 1 Service Menu This enables a number to be given to the Logical Channel CA Input Option NOTE This option is only shown if there are incoming services This option indicates the type of CA present on the input It is set for status only and cannot be changed BISS Key Code Option NOTE This option is not available from Build version 2 2 To access the BISS Key Code option press the BISS Key Code softkey in the 1 Service Menu This enables the scrambling key used in BISS scrambling mode to be set The same scrambling code must be used at the receive end to unscramble the transmission Enter up to 12 digits If less then seven digits are entered they are prefixed with Os zero to give a seven digit code Enc Session Word Option Refer to Enc Session Word Option on page 4 96 for details Session Word Option Refer to Session Word Option on page 4 96 for details Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 101 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally
59. Clip Option To access the Right Sys Clip option press the Right Sys Clip softkey in the IRD Audio Menu This sets the audio clip level of the right channel between 6 dBm and 18 dBm Status Only Options for the IRD Audio Menu The following options are for status only and cannot be changed e Audio Status e Audio PID e Audio Sample Rate e Audio Type Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 14 8 IRD CA Menu Overview If the IRD is operating in tracking mode then the IRD CA menu has no options because the CA is automatically configured to match the settings of the host Encoder DSNG Key Option To access the DSNG Key option press the DSNG Key softkey in the IRD CA Menu This sets the TANDBERG RAS DSNG key which is a seven digit number BISS Mode Option To access the BISS Mode option press the BISS Mode softkey in the IRD CA Menu Table 4 155 BISS Mode Options Selected Option Description Off BISS descrambling is off BISS Mode 1 BISS descrambling using the entered session word is on BISS E BISS descrambling using the entered encrypted session word together with the Encoder s injected BISS ID Session Word Option This option is only visible if the BISS mode has been set to BISS Mode 1 To access the Session Word option press the Session Word softkey in the IRD CA Menu This sets the 12 digit BISS session word to be used by the
60. Control Option To access the Fan Control option press the Fan Control softkey in the General Menu Refer to Annex B Technical Specification Table B 19 for more information about the temperatures at which fans activate and deactivate Table 4 19 Fan Control Options Selected Option Description Auto Temp control The fans are activated automatically when a defined temperature is reached On The fans are activated all the time Page 4 28 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 7 6 Operating the Equipment Locally Advanced Menu Overview The Advanced Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the Advanced softkey This menu provides options for the advanced parameters of the Encoder See Figure 4 9 for the Advanced Menu structure Setup Password Option There is no password originally required to edit parameters so if one is needed then it must be set To access the Setup Password option press the Setup Password softkey in the Advanced Menu The password can be either on or off Current Password Option To access the Current Password option press the Current Password softkey in the Advanced Menu This allows the current password to be changed NOTE For forgotten passwords contact Customer Services Display Errors Option To access the Display Errors option press the Display Errors softkey in the Advanced Menu This displays or hides relevant error me
61. Each service has a PMT which lists the component parts elementary streams of video audio etc for the various services being transmitted A picture frame produced using forward prediction It contains predictions from either previous frames or previous P frames The P frame is used as a reference for future P or B frames ppm Parts per million PPV Pay Per View A system of payment for viewing services based on a usage event basis rather than on on going subscription Subscribers must purchase viewing rights for each PPV event that they wish to view PPV events may be purchased as IPPV or OPPV Program PC A sequence of instructions for a computer TV A concept having a precise definition within ISO 13818 1 MPEG 2 For a transport stream the timebase is defined by the PCR The use of the PCR for timing information creates a virtual channel within the stream Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page A 7 Glossary Programme PrPs PROM PS PSI PSIP PSK PSR PSU PTS QAM QPSK QSIF Quantise RAM RAS RF ROM RS RLC SCPC Spectral Scrambling Scrambling SDI SDT SELV STB STT SFN Page A 8 A linking of one or more events under the control of a broadcaster For example football match news film show In the MPEG 2 concept the collection of elementary streams comprising the programme have a common start and end time A series of programmes are referred to as
62. Equipment Locally To access the BISS Key Entry option press the BISS Key Entry softkey in the Mux Menu This enables the scrambling key used in BISS Key Entry scrambling mode to be set see the Scramble Option The same scrambling code must be used at the receive end to unscramble the transmission For Mode 1 enter a 12 digit code using the keypad then press the Enter softkey to enter the scrambling code Session Word Option To access the Session Word option press the Session Word softkey in the Mux Menu A Session Word is the 48 bit code used to generate the 64 bit Control Word that is used to encrypt and decrypt the transport stream The sender and receiver s of the transmission share the Session Word so that only the intended parties receive the transmission The same Session Word must be used at the receive end If the Session Words are the same then the IRDs are able to decrypt the broadcast If the Session Words are different the broadcast is not received NOTE Take precautions to avoid general knowledge of the Session Word The Session Word relates to the different types of BISS as follows e BISS Mode 1 All components are scrambled by a fixed control word derived from a clear Session Word e BISS E All components are scrambled by a fixed control word derived from an Encrypted Session Word Enc Session Word Option To access the Enc Session Word option press the Enc Session Word softkey in the Mux M
63. Figure 2 3 E5714 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors Page 2 10 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment IF Out1 IF Out 2 rr a Base Board oa Je ia ama Alarm RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 Ethernet ASI Outputs SDIIn H Sync Composite Audio In and Data Data RS 485 Video Audio Control Reference Out ORO Option Slot 2 QE D H A A a JA LE 0 0 Figure 2 4 E5715 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors RS 232 Audio In and RS 422 RS 232 RS 485 ASI Composite Audio Alarm Data Data Control Ethernet Outputs SDIln H Sync Video Reference Out It Option Slot 4 Option Slot 5 Option Slot 1 IF OutMain IF Out Monitor TANDBERG Television Technical Earth use only Figure 2 5 E5740 IF 2U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors RS 232 Audio In and RS 422 RS 232 RS 485 ASI Composite Audio Alarm Data Data Control Ethernet Outputs SDIIn H Sync Video Reference Out RS 422 DATA RS 232 DATA REMOTE CONTROL 1 ETHERNET 2 ASI OUT ASI Base Board 1 0 B E oer 2I YY Ye Oe Option Slot 4 Option Slot 5 Option Slot 6 Je ha i i an AUX CONTROL U ia Ilo Option Slots 4 6
64. IRD For security the entered session word cannot be read back Enc Session Word Option This option is only visible if the BISS mode has been set to BISS E To access the Enc Session Word option press the Enc Session Word softkey in the IRD CA Menu This sets the 16 digit encrypted BISS session word to be used by the IRD For security the entered encrypted session word cannot be read back Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 115 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 14 9 IRD VBI Menu VITS Enable Option To access the VITS Enable option press the VITS Enable softkey in the IRD VBI Menu Table 4 156 VITS Enable Options Selected Option Description Disabled VITS test signal insertion disabled CCIR CCIR ITU R VITS inserted on lines 17 18 329 330 625 Lines FCC UK 525 Line FCC VITS inserted on lines 17 280 625 Line UK standard VITS inserted on lines 19 20 332 333 CCVC Enable Option To access the CCVC Enable option press the CCVC Enable softkey in the IRD VBI Menu This can either enable or disable the reinsertion of Closed Caption or VCHIP data in to the VBI VITC Enable Option To access the VITC Enable option press the VITC Enable softkey in the IRD VBI Menu This can either enable or disable the insertion of the VITC signal GCR Enable Option To access the GCR Enable option press the GCR Enable softkey in the IRD VBI
65. ITU R BT 601 Part A ANSI SMPTE 259M Television 10 Bit 4 2 2 Component and 4 fsc Composite Digital Signals Serial Digital Interface Encoder only supports Component Level C 270 Mbit s 525 625 component 250 m maximum PSF 1 3 800 mV pk pk nominal 10 Better than 15 dB 10 MHz 270 MHz 75 Q powered down impedance 75 Q Table B 2 H SYNC Specification Item Safety status Connector designation Connector type Input standard Input level Cable length Return loss Input impedance ST TM E10076 3 Specification SELV H SYNC 75 Q BNC female socket 625 line PAL 525 line PAL M or 525 line NTSC chrominance not required 1 V pk pk nominal 5 250 m maximum Better than 30 dB up to 6 MHz 75 Q powered down impedance 75 Q Page B 3 Technical Specification Analogue Video Specification Table B 3 Analogue Video Specification Item Analogue input Connector designation Connector type Input level Return loss Input impedance NOTE The inputs are isolated from the chassis to prevent 50 Hz 60 Hz hum Specification 625 line composite PAL B D G H I 525 line composite NTSC M PAL M as specified in ITU R report 624 4 Characteristics of Television Systems NTSC with and without set up of 7 5 IRE COMP VIDEO 75 Q BNC socket 1 V pk pk nominal 5 Better than 30 dB up to 6 MHz when impedance is set to 75 Q 75 Q High Z switchable powered down impedance 75 Q En
66. Menu This can either enable or disable the insertion of the Ghost Cancellation Reference GCR signal on line 19 for 525 line signals or line 318 for 625 line signals NOTE The GCR signal only appears on the SDI output NOT the analogue output Status Only Options for the IRD VBI Menu The following options are for status only and cannot be changed e CCVC Status present or not present on the input signal e VBI Status present or not present on the input signal e Input Lines what if any VBI is present on each input line e Output Lines what if any VBI is present on each line output Page 4 116 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 14 10 IRD Data Menu Async Stream Option To access the Async Stream option press the Async Stream softkey in the IRD Data Menu This is used to select the asynchronous data stream to be decoded from those present in the selected service Async Baudrate This gives the baud rate of the selected asynchronous data stream Sync Stream Option To access the Sync Stream option press the Sync Stream softkey in the IRD Data Menu This is used to select the synchronous data stream to be decoded from those present in the selected service Sync Bitrate This gives the bit rate of the selected synchronous data stream Subtitle Stream Option To access the Subtitle Stream option press the Subtitle
67. Message Action to Take LCD Not Found Temp Sensor No Pulse Temp Sensor Bad CRC Temp Sensor Bad Data Temp Sensor Busy Temp Sensor Comms PSU Sensor Real Time Clock Power Encoder off then back on again If the fault persists call a Service Engineer Ethernet Comms FPGA Boot Fail Over Temperature Check ventilation slots are clear and unobstructed see Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment for details of ventilation requirements Check ambient air temperature is within specified range see Annex B Technical Specification If fault is still present call Service Engineer Under Temperature Check ambient air temperature is within specified range see Annex B Technical Specification If fault is still present call Service Engineer Over Voltage 5V l Power supply unit requires adjustment call Service Engineer Under Voltage 5V Invalid Option Modules Test Error Power Encoder off then check that the option modules are firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing the module from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Video Module Audio A Module Audio B Module Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists cal
68. Option 1cecece 4 70 Software Release Option ccccee 4 70 Output M NU 2 cc hein uiieecisnieitive eae 4 70 4 11 1 OVOIVIOW eecceececeeeseeeeeseeeeteesttneeeeeeeees 4 70 4 11 2 Output Format Option ccceeeee 4 72 4 11 3 Delivery Descriptor Menu 4 72 4 11 4 Descriptor Type Option 0 cceceeeee 4 72 4 11 5 Descriptor Type Terrestrial 8 4 72 Band Plan Option cscceeeeeeeeeseeees 4 72 Channel Option c cececeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 4 73 Frequency Option ccccceeeseeeeeeeees 4 73 Bandwidth Option cscceeesseeeeees 4 73 Modulation Type Option ceceeee 4 74 Hierarchy Option c cesses 4 74 FEC HP and FEC LP Options 4 74 Guard Interval Option ccceeeeeeee 4 75 Carriers Options cceccccecseeseseeseeeeteeees 4 75 Other Frequency Option ceeee 4 75 4 11 6 Descriptor Type Cable 0 ccecee 4 76 Frequency Option cccceceeereeeeeneees 4 76 Modulation Type Option cecceeee 4 76 FEC Outer Option eee 4 76 FEC Inner Option sees 4 76 Symbol Rate Option ccceceeeeesseeeeeeee 4 77 4 11 7 Descriptor Type Satellite eee 4 77 Frequency Option cccccceeeeeeeeeseseees 4 77 Modulation Type Option ceccee 4 77 FEC Inner Option ccc 4 77 Symb RIE epa 4 77 Orbital Position Option cccececee 4 78 West East Option ccccsc
69. PMT PID Option NOTE This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services To access the PMT PID option press the PMT PID softkey in the 2 Service Menu This shows the Program Map Table Packet Identifier Table 4 124 PMT PID Options Selected Option Description Min 32 Program Map Table Packet Max 8190 1FFEh Identifier PMT PID Step Size 1 PCR PID Option NOTE This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services To access the PCR PID option press the PCR PID softkey in the 2 Service Menu This shows the Program Clock Reference Packet Identifier Table 4 125 PCR PID Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 Video Option NOTE This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services To access the Video option press the Video softkey in the 2 Service Menu This shows the Video PID Table 4 126 Video Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 Page 4 102 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally ECM CA PID Option NOTE This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services Available from Build version 2 2 0 and later To access the ECM CA PID option press the ECM CA PID softkey in the 2 Service Men
70. Packet Length option is set to 188 bytes then only the Bit rate 188 option is displayed If the Packet Length option is set to 204 bytes then both the Bit rate 188 and Bit rate 204 options are displayed To access the either of the bit rates press the Bit rate 188 or the Bit rate 204 softkey in the Mux Menu Both the Bit rate 188 and the Bit rate 204 can be in the range of 0 Mbit s to 50 Mbit s Table 4 113 Bit rate 188 and Bit rate 204 Options Selected Option Description 188 204 Multiplexer output bit rate when in baseband output Min 0 0000 Mbit s format and ASI output mode Max without Remux 1 10 0000 Mbit s Changing the bit rate affects the automatic video bit Max with Remux 50 0000 Mbit is rate and video resolution calculations Step Size 0 0001 Mbit s If the specified bit rate is outside the valid input range a confirmation screen is displayed which shows the maximum minimum value allowed 4 12 7 Clock NOTE This option indicates the origin of the clock Prior to Build Version 3 0 0 it was set to Local Oscillator and could not be changed After Build Version 3 0 0 it must be set to a video or external source before attempting to change the clock value or it will default to Local Oscillator To access the Clock option press the Clock softkey in the Mux Menu Table 4 114 Clock Options Selected Option Description Local Oscillator The system clock is derived from the local oscillator HSYNC External The system c
71. Seamless2 Seamless3 Seamless4 Seamless5 Seamless 6 Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s Mbit s 4 2 0 0 8 10 1 5 10 2 15 0 4 10 1 12 1 3 10 4 2 2 1 5 13 3 27 5 33 0 7 10 2 1 2 5 2 5 20 Rate Buffer delay 2 58 1 2s 1s 3 35 135s 1s Seamless 1 mode can use video bit rates from 0 8 Mbit s to 10 Mbit s with the actual limits depending on video standard and resolution This would be used for 4 2 0 DTH statistical multiplexing applications The Encoder delay is approximately 2 5 seconds Seamless 2 mode emulates System 3000 6U and 6U Encoders Video bit rate can be between 1 5 Mbit s and 10 Mbit s Actual minimum and maximum rates depend on video standard and resolution Seamless 3 mode operates between 5 Mbit s and 33 Mbit s with the actual limits depending on video standard and resolution It would usually be used in 4 2 2 statistical multiplexing applications The Encoder delay is approximately 1 1 seconds Seamless 4 mode has a very low Bmin Actual minimum and maximum depend on the video standard and resolution This mode would typically be used for 4 2 0 DTH statistical multiplexing applications Seamless 5 mode minimum and maximum depend on the video standard and resolution Seamless 6 mode is typically used with 4 2 2 statistical multiplexing and a low Bmn Actual minimum and maximum depend on the video standard and resolution NOTE In Seamless Modes 4 5 and 6 coding performance is compromised a little to achi
72. Section 4 12 13 RAS Options Enabled e BISS scrambling see basic mux output Section 4 12 14 BISS Options Enabled Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 89 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 12 3 4 12 4 4 12 5 Page 4 90 Mux Output With Remux Card To obtain an output when a Remux card is fitted set the options in the following menus e Host Bit rate Option on page 4 97 e Remux Module menu see Section 4 13 3 Remux Module Menu e Host and Incoming Services Section 4 13 4 1 Service 2 Service Menu Packet Length Option NOTE If the Satellite Modulator is set to On in the Output Menu then the Packet Length option is for status only and cannot be changed To access the Packet Length option press the Packet Length softkey in the Mux Menu Table 4 111 Packet Length Options Selected Option Description 188 bytes Uses 188 byte packet format 204 bytes Uses 204 byte packet format On Air Option NOTE If the Satellite Modulator is set to On in the Output Menu then the On Air option is for status only and cannot be changed To access the On Air option press the On Air softkey in the Mux Menu This option can be On or Off determining whether the output of the Encoder is sent to the Multiplexer Table 4 112 On Air Options Selected Option Description On Multiplexer output is switched on Off Multiplexer output is switched off Inst
73. Stream softkey in the IRD Data Menu This is used to select the subtitle stream to be decoded from those present in the selected service Subtitles Language Option To access the Subtitles Language option press the Subtitles Language softkey in the IRD Data Menu This is used to select the subtitles default language When a service is selected the IRD defaults to decoding the subtitles stream with the default language if one is present Subtitles Type Option To access the Subtitles Type option press the Subtitles Type softkey in the IRD Data Menu This is used to select the subtitles default type When a service is selected the IRD will default to decoding the subtitles stream with the default language and of the default type if one is present Subtitles Enable Option To access the Subtitles Enable option press the Subtitles Enable softkey in the IRD Data Menu This can be set to enable or disable the reinsertion of subtitles in to the VBI Table 4 157 Subtitles Enable Options Selected Option Description True Enable the reinsertion of subtitles in to the VBI False Disable the reinsertion of subtitles in to the VBI Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 117 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Teletext Stream Option To access the Teletext Stream option press the Teletext Stream softkey in the IRD Data Menu This is used to select the Teletext strea
74. TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Multicast I P Address Option This option is not used Time To Live Option To access the Time To Live option press the Time To Live softkey in the IP Streamer Menu This is the Time to Live setting as specified in RFC 791 The Time to Live setting is decremented by one for each Router hop the IP frame does When 0 zero is reached the packet is discarded by the network A value greater than one is recommended Type of Service Option To access the Type of Service option press the Type of Service softkey in the IP Streamer Menu This parameter is the byte value of the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header as specified in RFC 791 It is used for Class of service prioritisation It depends on the Router honouring this field This is normally set to one 4 12 Mux Menu 4 12 1 Overview The Mux Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Mux softkey This menu permits the selection of Multiplexer output parameters Remux if enabled RAS scrambling options if enabled and BISS scrambling options if enabled See Figure 4 18 for details when Syntax DVB See Figure 4 19 for details when Syntax ATSC 4 12 2 Mux Output no Remux Card To obtain various outputs when no Remux card is fitted e Basic mux output no scrambling and no Remux see Section 4 12 4 Packet Length Option to Section 4 12 12 BISS Firmware e RAS scrambling see basic mux output
75. TO ISOLATE THE EQUIPMENT PROPERLY MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD CAUTIONS 1 This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply where the Encoder is to be mounted consult a qualified electrical engineer for the vehicle the vehicle manufacturer or their agents 2 The Encoder can be connected to a positive or negative earth system but you must ensure that correct polarity to the DC input connections are maintained Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment The internal dc power supply module used in this equipment is designed for use on dc supplies ranging from 12 to 36 volts dc see Annex B Technical Specification for a full power supply specification The dc connections within the Encoder are floating both are isolated from the Encoder case and earth connection Refer to the previous caution regarding voltage polarity The recommended types of dc power sources are as follows e Battery with suitable fuse protection e Linear PSU capable of 12 A with a peak of 30A e Switched mode PSU capable of 12 A with a peak of 30A NOTES 1 The voltages specified are those required at the Encoder DC INPUT terminals when the unit is powered on therefore any cable voltage drop must be taken into account at the time of installation 2 In situations where the Encoder is
76. To access the Sat Input option press the Sat Input softkey in the IRD Demod Menu Table 4 137 Sat Input Options Selected Option Description RF 1 Use Demod L Band Input 1 RF 2 Use Demod L Band Input 2 IF Use Demod IF input M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD only Modulation Option To access the Modulation option press the Modulation softkey in the IRD Demod Menu If the IRD is in tracking mode this value is tied to that set for the satellite modulator and cannot be altered Table 4 138 Modulation Options Selected Option Description BPSK M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD and M2 ESO2 LSYM required QPSK 8PSK M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD and M2 ESO2 8PSKDEMOD required 16QAM M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD and M2 ESO2 16QAMDEMOD required LNB Option To access the LNB option press the LNB softkey in the IRD Demod Menu Table 4 139 LNB Options Selected Option Description Active There is an LNB present Direct RF The Demod is being fed direct RF Page 4 108 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally LNB Lo Freq Option To access the LNB Lo Freq option press the LNB Lo Freq softkey in the IRD Demod Menu This value should be set to the LNB s lower local oscillator frequency If the LNB has only one local oscillator then both the LNB Lo and LNB Hi Freq options should be set to that value LNB Hi Freq Option To access the LNB Hi Freq option press the LNB Hi Freq softkey
77. XLR Menus 3 0 and later Input Format Option To access the Input Format option press the Input Format softkey in the Audio XLR Menu Table 4 62 Input Format Options Selected Option Description Analogue Analogue balanced Digital AES EBU balanced Input Termination Option To access the Input Termination option press the Input Termination softkey in the Audio XLR Menu Table 4 63 Input Termination Options When Analogue Input Selected Selected Option Description 20 KQ 20 kQ termination 600 Q 600 Q termination Input Clip Level Option To access the Input Clip Level option press the Input Clip Level softkey in the Audio XLR Menu Table 4 64 Input Clip Level Options When Analogue Input Selected Selected Option Description 15 dB 15 dB full scale range 18 dB 18 dB full scale range Output Source Option To access the Output Source option press the Output Source softkey in the Audio XLR Menu Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 65 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 10 4 10 1 Page 4 66 Table 4 65 Output Source Options Selected Option Description SDI Embedded 1 4 Any of the SDI embedded audio feeds XLR Input Monitor Output the audio which is input to the card Off No output Output Format Option To access the Output Format option press the Output Format softkey in the Audio XLR Menu Table 4
78. an Overflow Error is indicated on the equipment then the incoming contributing bit rate exceeds the outgoing bit rate To avoid corruption reduce the incoming bit rate by either removing services turn the service Off or remove the ASI input or reduce the bit rate of the incoming service Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 17 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 7 3 7 1 3 7 2 3 7 3 3 7 4 Page 3 18 XLR Expander Card Option M2 EOM2 XLR Overview NOTE The M2 EOM2 XLR XLR Expander Card Option is supported by Build version 3 0 and later The XLR Expander Card Option permits Encoders to input and output a stereo audio pair via XLR connectors The option occupies two vertical option slots 1 and 4 due to the size of the XLRs Because of this it is available on the 2U version only The Audio menu associated with this option is described in Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Audio I nputs Receiver The input accepts both analogue and digital AES EBU left channel only When the unit is powered down the inputs default to digital The input impedance of the digital channel is 110 Q while the analogue input operates at either 600 Q or 20 KQ The analogue receiver works at clip levels of 18 dB or 15 dB Analogue inputs are sampled at 48 kHz The signal from the audio receiving inputs is routed to the backplane as a single AES EBU formatted digital sign
79. and 319 336 for 625 lines Teletext Extraction The Encoder supports internal Teletext data extraction Teletext drop from the VBI of a video input and formats this data into a transport packet as specified in the DVB specification EN300 472 The Encoder can extract up to 18 lines of Teletext from each field of the video frame Line filters can be invoked to selectively disable any individual lines in this range The filters are provided to allow the user to ensure that non Teletext lines e g ITS lines are not erroneously extracted The extracted Teletext lines are formatted into PES packets according to the DVB specification The Teletext PES packets are time stamped to allow correct alignment of subtitling captions with decoded video The following Teletext services are extractable e Sytem B WST Teletext e Video Programming Teletext VPT PDC Packet 8 30 format 2 e Inverted Teletext Data Channels The basic Encoder supports two data channels an asynchronous RS 232 and a synchronous RS 442 These are provided as data pipes only they are not time stamped Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder 1 3 5 Outputs Three ASI C copper outputs supplying a DVB and ATSC MPEG 2 transport stream are supplied as standard 1 3 6 IF Modulation E5714 The internal satellite modulator within the E5714 supports QPSK modulation in accordance wit
80. and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder E5714 The satellite modulator within the E5714 supports QPSK modulation in accordance with EN 300 421 DVB S It provides a main and monitoring IF Output The IF frequency can be tuned between 50 MHz and 90 MHz E5740 E5760 The satellite modulator fitted within the E5740 is capable of QPSK modulation in accordance with EN 300 421 DVB S and is also capable of 8PSK and 16QAM modulation in accordance with EN 301 210 DVB DSNG It is available in two variants One provides an IF output tuneable in the range 50 MHz to 180 MHz The other provides an L band output tuneable in the range 950 MHz to 1750 MHz 1 2 3 DENG Systems 70 MHz IF i I E5715 E5750 i Rec Mon ial Figure 1 6 Typical DENG System Configuration The OFDM modulator fitted in the E5715 and E5750 takes the Encoder s output transport stream and uses Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing COFDM to spread the data over 1705 carriers 2k mode or 6817 carriers 8k mode This means that relatively low data rates can be used on each carrier frequency and any multipath effects ghosting which occur affects only a small amount of data The carriers are closely spaced so that their sidebands overlap but due to the orthogonal relationship between carrier frequencies they do not interfere with each other This makes the system spectrally efficient Noise multipath effects c
81. and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Preliminary Checks Mechanical I nspection When taking delivery of an Encoder check the equipment items delivered against the enclosed delivery note Inspect the equipment for damage in transit If in doubt contact Customer Services see Preliminary Pages NOTE Do not remove the covers of this equipment as doing so may invalidate any warranties cause a safety hazard and or affect the EMC performance It may also invalidate any safety tests Check with Customer Services beforehand Moving the Equipment Safely Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand bracket or table The product may fall causing serious injury and serious damage to the product Use only with a cart stand bracket or table recommended by TANDBERG Television An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn Do not move or carry the equipment whilst it is still connected to the supply or other leads is live or is in operation Installing the Equipment Fixing Method The Encoder can b
82. are supported including Linear PCM Additional audio channels can be accommodated by purchasing the option module M2 EOM2 AUDLIN Unit functionality can be further extended with option modules see Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades 1 2 2 DSNG Systems Overview CTT hs TTT Up link equipment including Up converter and High P ower Amplifier Down link equipment including Low Noise Block and Down converter y VIDEO VIDEO ANALOGUE 7 VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO Modulator SYNC DATA ASYNC DATA hy ASYNC DATA gt SYNC DATA Alteia Satellite Receiver DSNG Encoder Figure 1 5 Typical DSNG Encoder Configuration 2 8PSK is only available when software option M2 ESO2 SM38PSK is purchased 3 16QAM is only available when software option M2 ESO2 SM316QAM is purchased 4 Dolby Digital AC 3 is only available when software option M2 ESO2 AC3 is purchased 5 CA relates to RAS and BISS RAS and BISS are only available when software options M2 ESO2 RAS and M2 EDCOM2 BISS are purchased A E57xx Encoder may be fitted with both RAS and BISS options but only one scrambling format can be used at any one time BISS is available from Build version 2 1 0 but BISS is not supported before Build version 2 2 0 6 4 2 2 is only available when software option M2 ESO2 422 is purchased 7 Noise reduction is only available when software option M2 ESO2 NR is purchased Page 1 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG
83. battery powered and remote from a charging source two 12 volt batteries wired in series are recommended to avoid the voltage dropping to a level where the Encoder switches off 3 Ensure that the non earthed side connection of the dc supply is protected by a suitably rated 30 A external fuse CAUTION The Encoder requires a minimum of 12 volts to power up and has a low voltage shutdown facility that operates at approximately 11 volts This is part of the power unit s design Failure to observe the equipment voltage requirements may result in power cycling of the Encoder if the battery is unable to maintain its terminal voltage Damage may result if this condition is allowed to continue 2 5 2 DC Power Cable and Earthing General The Encoder is supplied with a two metre three way cable terminated with a three way shrouded socket at one end and prepared tails at the other Although the Encoder consumes less than 20 A the use of 20 A rated cable is recommended in order to minimise voltage drop from the dc supply The socket has one large and four small key ways The large key way is positioned at the bottom of the connector Offer the cable connector to the front panel connector as follows 1 Check that the connector collar is in one of its click positions 2 With the large key way at the bottom and pin 2 at the top push the line connector home 3 Push the knurled collar forward against the collar s internal spring an
84. be replayed at the same loudness or at a known difference from the original This menu assumes a working knowledge of Dolby Digital encoding processes on the part of the user Table 4 58 Mixing Level Options Selected Option Description 0 dB to 31 dB Mixing levels between 0 dB to 31 dB Room Type Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 and the Production Info parameter is set to On To access the Room Type option press the Room Type softkey in the Audio A Menu This parameter indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final audio mixing session Table 4 59 Room Type Options Selected Option Description Not Indicated Small Flat Mon Type and calibration of the mixing room used Large X Curve Mon for the final audio mixing session Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 61 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Copyright Option NOTE This option is shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 or MPEG Layer 2 To access the Copyright option press the Copyright softkey in the Audio A Menu This indicates whether the information in the bit stream is shown to be protected by copyright This option can be turned On protected or Off not protected Original Option NOTE This option is shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 or MPEG Layer 2 To access the Original op
85. carried on the left connector Table 3 9 Audio In L AES EBU Connector XLR IN L AES EBU Audio In L Audio In R AES EBU PUSH 3 3 Pin Analogue Digital 1 Screen Screen 2 Channel AES EBU 3 Channel AES EBU Nominal input 600 Q or 20 KQ 110 Q impedance Table 3 10 Audio In R Connector XLR IN R Pin Analogue Digital 1 Screen 2 Channel Not available 3 Channel Nominal input 600 Qor20kQ impedance Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page 3 19 Options and Upgrades Page 3 20 NOTES 1 When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Q termination 2 The digital audio input does not support SPDIF Audio Out Connector Audio Out L Audio Out R Two XLR male connectors provide a stereo AES EBU pair Each connector carries a single channel of an analogue stereo pair Digital audio is carried on the left connector Table 3 11 Audio Out L AES EBU Connector XLR OUT L AES EBU Pin Analogue Digital 1 Screen Screen 2 Channel AES EBU 3 Channel AES EBU Nominal output 10 Q 110 Q impedance Table 3 12 Audio Out R Connector XLR OUTR Pin Analogue Digital 1 Screen 2 Channel Not available 3 Channel Nominal output 10 Q impedance CAUTION For maximum performance always use double screened audio cables such as Canford Audio D
86. cesseeeeeeeeeee B 10 B 3 3 L Band Outputs E5740 LBAND B 11 B 3 4 OFDM Modulator Outputs E5750 B 12 B 3 5 ASI Out 1 ASI Out 2 ASI Out 3 Outputs B 12 B 4 Control and Monitoring cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeees B 13 B 4 14 Remote Control Ethernet 1 and 2 B 13 B 4 2 Local Controliiasiuccsssanniincauseuscivas B 13 BAS Alainen B 13 B 4 4 Remote Control ccccecseceeceseeeeeeeee B 13 B 4 5 RS 232 Data Asynchronous B 13 B 4 6 RS 422 Data cece B 14 B 5 Power Supply sirisser B 15 B 5 1 AC Power Input ccececceseesesseseeeseeeees B 15 ST TM E10076 3 Annex B Technical Specification B 5 2 DC Power Input ccceceeeeeeeee B 16 B 6 Physical Details 0 eececesseseseseeteeeneeeeetenteneeees B 16 B 7 Environmental ConditionS ccscceceeeeee B 17 B 8 COMPliance ceeeeecececeseeeeesessceeeeeeesnseesceeeesetenees B 17 B81 Sao aiei B 17 B8 EMO circs anea B 18 B 8 3 Shock and Vibration cccceeeeeeees B 18 B 8 4 CE Marking iessen B 19 B 8 5 C Tick Malkas B 19 BO Cable TypeS icin cseciva uietoie einen te B 19 B 10 Option Modules cecccessesseeeeseseeseeseseeteetenees B 20 B 10 1 M2 EOM2 AUDLIN Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option Module c08 B 20 B 10 2 M2 EOM2 DAT RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input Option cceceseseeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeees B 20 Asynchronous Data Input B 20 Synchronous Data Input
87. converted to L band by the LNB LED Light Emitting Diode LNB Low Noise Block Down Converter The component of a subscriber satellite transmission receiving dish which amplifies the incoming signal and down converts it to a suitable frequency to input to the IRD typically 950 MHz 1600 MHz LO Local Oscillator LSB Least significant bit Luminance The television signal representing brightness or the amount of light at any point in a picture The Y in YCrCs Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page A 5 Glossary LVDS Macroblock Mbit s MCC MCPC MEM MMDS Motion Compensation Motion Estimation Motion Vector MP ML MP HL MPEG MPEG 2 MSB Msymbol s Multiplex MUSICAM Mux Network NICAM NIT nm NTSC Page A 6 Low Voltage Differential Signal LVDS is a generic multi purpose Interface standard for high speed low power data transmission It was standardised in ANSI TIA EIA 644 1995 Standard aka RS 644 A 16x16 pixel area of the TV picture Most processing within the MPEG domain takes place with macro blocks These are converted to four 8x8 blocks using either frame DCT or field DCT Four 8 x 8 blocks of luminance data and two 4 2 0 chrominance format four 4 2 2 or eight 4 4 4 corresponding 8 x 8 blocks of chrominance data coming from a 16 x 16 section of the luminance component of the picture Macroblock can be used to refer to the sample data and to the coded
88. devoted to Setup Menus and Associated Options The following conventions are used in this manual a page number entry in bold indicates a reference to a heading a page number entry in italic is a reference to a table or figure otherwise the page number indicates a reference to an entry on that page General Index 1 em demodulator option 3 26 front view 1 4 1U display functions 4 10 1U navigation keys and buttons 4 10 2 2U front view 1 4 2U display functions 4 14 2U softkeys and buttons 4 14 3 3 2 pulldown option 4 44 accuracy of frequency sources l 1 action on PID error option 4 30 active configuration 4 119 active errors option 4 117 additional audio input module 3 6 connectors 2 14 3 7 address IP 2 21 advanced menu 4 29 afd information 4 42 afd option 4 41 alarm 2 16 aspect ratio option 4 41 associated manuals iv audio additional audio input module 3 6 balanced analogue 1 6 bit rate 1 12 break out cable 1 11 2 14 dolby digital 1 10 3 30 dolby digital bit rates 1 13 dolby e pass through 1 10 encoding modes 1 11 audio description service 1 11 dolby digital 1 11 dual mono 1 11 joint stereo 1 11 single mono 1 11 Stereo 1 11 inputs 1 11 2 14 linear pcm 1 10 lip sync 4 29 MPEG 1 1 12 mpeg 2 1 10 pre compressed 1 10 Source 4 54 test tone 1 12 audio MPEG 2 option 4 103 audio a and b menu 4 52 audio bit rate option 4 55 audio delay option 4 57
89. events Analogue Colour difference signals Refer to CrCe for an explanation Programmable Read Only Memory A device which may be written once with data for permanent storage and then read whenever required Special types of PROM permit the erasure of all data by Ultraviolet light EPROM or by application of an electronic signal EEPROM Program Stream A combination of one or more PESs with a common timebase Program Specific Information Consists of normative data which is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport streams and the successful regeneration of programs See also Sl Program System Information Protocol The ATSC equivalent of SI for DVB Phase Shift Keying A method of modulating digital signals particularly suited to satellite transmission Professional Satellite Receiver See also IRD Power Supply Unit Presentation Time Stamp ATSC Quadrature Amplitude Modulation A method of modulating digital signals which uses combined techniques of phase modulation and amplitude modulation It is particularly suited to cable networks Quadrature Phase Shift Keying A form of phase shift keying modulation using four states Quarter Screen Image Format A process of converting analogue waveforms to digital information 8 bit quantisation as set out in ITU R Rec 601 uses 256 levels in the range 0 255 to determine the analogue waveform value at any given point The value is then converted to a digital number for pro
90. from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Data Related Errors Table H 5 Data Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Comms Error Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board and any data modules are Config Update firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing them from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Processor Stopped Engineer Duplicate PID nvalid PID ux Bit Rate too low Check the Encoder configuration Data Overflow Data Underflow ux FIFO Full Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Error Messages H 8 Video Encoder Related Errors Table H 6 Video Encoder Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Comms Error Config Update VCM Stopped Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Bad Parameters Duplicate P ID Invalid PID VBI Bit rate too low VBI Hor Res too low Mux Bit rate too low Check the Encoder configuration No interrupt DSP Overrun Boot Fail Bad Frame Rate Rate Buffer OF UF DSP Health Bad Filter Coeffs R
91. have chosen to download a file from this location osd zip from 172 16 197 175 What would you like to do with this file C Open this file from its current location IV Always ask before opening this type of file Cancel More Info Figure E 2 File Download Dialogue Box Clicking on option Open this file from its current location and Clicking OK will open the zip file see Figure E 3 Clicking on option Save this file to disk will allow the user to install the files on their local drive and then open the zip file as in Figure E 3 Page E 4 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo 1 WinZip osd zip File Actions Options Help Cae VIuEGaeasy New Open Favorites Add Extract View CheckOut Wizard Modified Size Ratio Packed Path Creator exe 3 5 02 12 24 PM 65 024 57 27 765 Osd exe 3 5 02 12 24 PM 39 424 55 17 559 Selected 0 files 0 bytes Total 2 files 102KB re YZ Figure E 3 Files for OSD Creator and Loader E 4 Creating a Logo Using OSD Creator Osd Creator creator exe is an application for creating logo files osd format for use with the Osd Loader application osd exe to download them to the Encoder It accepts Windows Bitmap bmp format files as input It includes the facility to introduce a mix component into the image so that when the image is superimposed onto video
92. in the IRD Demod Menu This value should be set to the LNB s higher local oscillator frequency LNB Switch Freq Option To access the LNB Switch Freq option press the LNB Switch Freq softkey in the IRD Demod Menu If the LNB has two local oscillators this value sets the frequency above which the higher local oscillator will be used The switching between the local oscillators is by a 22 kHz tone LNB Supply To access the LNB option press the LNB softkey in the IRD Demod Menu Table 4 140 LNB Supply Options Selected Option Description Disabled LNB Supply Off Enabled LNB Supply On Boost LNB Supply approximately 1 V higher than enabled Search Range Option NOTE The search range is not applicable if the Sat Input is set to IF To access the Search Range option press the Search Range softkey in the IRD Demod Menu Table 4 141 Search Range Options Valid Input Range Description Min 0 1 kHz Max 5 0 kHz BER Threshold Option To access the BER Threshold option press the BER Threshold softkey in the IRD Demod Menu This sets the BER level that if exceeded generates a BER Alarm Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 109 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 14 5 4 14 6 Page 4 110 Status Only Options for the I RD Demod Menu The following options are for status only and cannot be changed e LNB Fault Status e Demod Statu
93. manual as Encoder s unless there is a specific difference where they will be referred to by the model number WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED ONLY TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT CAUTION Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non approved replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties This manual does not include any maintenance information or procedures which would require the removal of covers 1 1 2 Build Version This manual has been written to cover the functionality in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Build Version E5714 E5740 E5715 E5750 Build Version 2 1 0 3 1 0 and later The Build version indicates the status of the Encoder and refers to an overall number which encompasses all the various software firmware versions of video audio etc in the basic Encoder The current Build version can be found in the Build Menu see Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Figure 4 9 This number should be quoted in all correspondence with TANDBERG Television This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent Build versions where the functionality of the equipment has not changed When a new issue of the Build version changes the functionality a new issue of this manual is provided 1
94. menu 4 46 vertical interval time code VITC 4 49 vibration and shock B 18 video analogue video input module specification B 4 bitrate 1 9 coding resolution and bit rate 1 10 composite analogue 1 8 encoding 1 8 Indexes encoding functions 1 8 fault finding 6 9 index 4 49 input types 1 8 inputs 1 8 composite PAL NTSC 1 8 serial digital 1 8 error detection and handling EDH 2 13 test pattern 1 8 serial SDI 1 6 1 8 source 4 11 4 13 ideo bandwidth option 4 35 ideo encoder menu 4 36 ideo input option 4 31 ideo locked option 4 34 ideo menu 4 31 ideo option 4 102 ideo parameters 4 31 ideo programming system VPS 4 49 ideo source 4 31 VPS line 16 option 4 47 lt lt lt lt lt 525 55 Ww warnings meaning of vi web browser cloning a file 5 11 how to set up internet explorer 5 3 option 1 build info 5 6 option 10 fault reporting 5 11 option 2 tools 5 7 option 3 customer support 5 9 option 4 front panel TANDBERG TV only 5 9 option 5 backplane 5 9 option 6 licenced features 5 10 option 7 SNMP MIBS 5 10 option 8 encoder errors 5 11 option 9 event log 5 11 options 5 6 west east option 4 78 what to do if overflow occurs 3 17 wide screen signalling WSS 4 49 4 51 wire colour code 2 7 2 10 WSS line 23 option 4 48 X xlr expander card option 3 18 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Index 7 ST TM E10
95. offset from carrier lt 83 100 Hz lt 85 1 kHz lt 95 10 kHz lt 110 100 kHz Modulation on off Carrier on off Page B 9 Technical Specification Table B 13 IF Monitor Output Specification 1U E5714 Item Safety status Connector designation Connector type Output impedance Return loss Output power Specification SELV IF OUT MONITOR This connector is normally dedicated to output BNC female 75 Q the IF monitoring feed to the Receiver 75 Q gt 20 dB 49 75 lt f lt 90 25 MHz 20 dB 2 dB referenced to main IF output IF OUT MAIN IF Outputs E5740 1F Table B 14 IF OUT MAIN Specification E5740 IF Item Safety status Connector type Connector designation Output impedance Output power Power level stability Return loss Modulation format FEC rate Symbol rate Spectrum roll off factor Spectrum sense Transmission modes Carrier frequency Carrier frequency error Carrier ON OFF ratio Carrier suppression Phase noise Spurious outputs modulated carrier Spurious outputs unmodulated carrier Noise floor No C Main monitor output isolation both directions Specification SELV BNC female 75 Q IF OUT MAIN 75 Q 20 dBm to 5 dBm in 0 1 dB steps 0 5 dB gt 20 dB 50 180 MHz QPSK as per EN 300 421 DVB S 8PSK and 16QAM as per EN 301 210 DVB DSNG customer options 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 and 7 8 with QPSK 2 3 5 6 and 8 9 with 8PSK 3 4
96. option which immediately causes a buzzer to sound Press any key except the Quit softkey to turn the buzzer off Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu 6 5 Fault finding 6 5 1 Fault finding Philosophy It is the objective of this chapter to provide sufficient information to enable the operator to rectify apparent faults or else to identify the suspect module where possible Some basic procedures are provide to follow in the event of a suspected Encoder failure It is assumed that fault finding has already been performed at a system level and that other equipment units have been eliminated as the possible cause of the failure see relevant System Manual WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED ONLY TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT CAUTION Do not remove the covers of this equipment Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non approved replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties This manual does not include any maintenance information or procedures which would require the removal of covers If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition call a Service Engineer or contact Customer Services using the information given in the preliminary pages of this manual 6 5 2 Preliminary Checks
97. reception of the information in clear form Serial Digital Interface Service Description Table Provides information in the SI stream about the services in the system for example the name of the service the service provider etc Safety Extra Low Voltage EN 60950 Set Top Box A box that sits on top of a television set and is the interface between the home television and the cable TV company New technologies evolving for set top boxes are video on demand video games educational services database searches and home shopping The cable equivalent of the IRD System Time Table ATSC Single Frequency Network The SFN technique allows large geographic areas to be served with a common transmission multiplex All transmitters in the network are synchronously modulated with the same signal and they all radiate on the same frequency Due to the multi path capability of the multi carrier transmission system COFDM signals from several transmitters arriving at a receiving antenna may contribute constructively to the total wanted signal The SFN technique is not only frequency efficient but also power efficient because fades in the field strength of one transmitter may be filled by another transmitter Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 SI Single Packet Burst Mode Smart Card SMATV SMPTE SMS SNG SNMP Spatial Redundancy SPI Statistical Redundancy TAXI TCP IP TD
98. release of the data card It is for status only and cannot be changed Output Menu Overview The Output Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Output softkey This menu permits the selection of the output parameters See Figure 4 17 for the menu structure Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Setup Menu Output Menu Output Format OFDM Modulator Output Format Satellite Modulator Output Format Delivery Descriptor Delivery Descriptor OFDM Modulator Descriptor Type Menu Menu options depend on Descriptor Type Selected Output Bandwidth Modulation Mode Guard Interval FEC Rate Terrestrial Cable Satellite anome on Band Plan Frequency Frequency Contre Freauenc Channel Modulation Type Modulation Type Frequency FEC Outer FEC Inner Bandwidth FEC Inner Symbol Rate Modulation Type Symbol Rate Orbital Position Hierarchy West East FEC HP Polarisation FEC LP Guard Interval Output Format Carriers L_ IP Streamer Other Frequency IP Streamer Menu Satellite Modulator Menu t Own IP Address Network Mask t Router IP Address Destination IP Address Destination UDP Port pean atau IF Output ial aa L Band Output H IF Output L Time To Live L Band Power IF Power Frequency
99. remaps the element that was on that PID When the Remultiplexer is operating in Dumb Mode if the user tries to remap an element onto a PID that is already being used it will not allow the change to take place NOTE When operating in Dumb Mode the Encoder may power up with unresolved PID clashes which the user must resolve Host Mux Video Encoder Audio Encoder ASI Driver i ASI Output Modulator QPSK i IF Output Jexajdijnwey Figure 3 6 Remultiplexer Block Diagram Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 15 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 6 5 3 6 6 3 6 7 Page 3 16 Using the Remultiplexer Set the output bit rate to the required value in the Setup Mux Menu Connect transport streams that are to be combined remultiplexed with the host Encoder s services to the ASI inputs on the rear of the unit NOTE Itis possible to remultiplex any DVB or ATSC compliant transport stream but at the time of publication only transport streams generated by TANDBERG Television equipment are guaranteed to work when fed to the Remultiplexing module The equipment will automatically detect the services on these inputs The list of detected services is displayed in the Setup Mux Menu Each service can be individually switched Off On or On with scrambling If the service is set to Off then there is no trace of the service in the
100. software version 3 1 and later Table B 37 ASI Output SD Decoder Item Safety Status Connector Type Connector Designation Output Impedance Data Coding Channel Rate Specification Specification SELV BNC Female ASI Out Located on the adjacent demod option card 75 Q 8B 10B 270 Mbit s DVB A1010 rev 1 Byte mode only Table B 38 Composite Video Output SD Decoder Item Safety Status Connector Type Connector Designation Output Impedance Video Standards Composite Video Level Specification SELV BNC Female Composite 75 Q PAL N B G or I or NTSC M with or without pedestal 1V pk pk in 75 Q nominal Table B 39 Digital Video Output SD Decoder Item Safety Status Connector Type Connector Designation Output Impedance Video Standards Composite Video Level Page B 24 Specification SELV BNC Female SDI 75Q ITU R BT 656 digital output at 270 MHz 800mV 10 mV pk pk in 75 Q nominal Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification Table B 40 Audio Output SD Decoder Item Safety Status Connector Type Analogue Output Nominal Output Impedance Clip Level Sampling Rate Digital Output Output Format Output Impedance Sampling Rate Specification SELV 15 way D Type Female 502 6 dBm to 18 dBm Same as digital source AES EBU in IEC958 Analogue Consumer Compressed
101. some areas appear to be transparent The application also includes the facility to downsample the image to the desired size The application runs under Windows 95 or Windows NT NOTE The OSD Creator program only has limited features for the manipulation of images Itis wise to carry out any complex image editing using dedicated graphics software prior to importing the omp image file into the OSD Creator E 5 Using OSD Creator E 5 1 Overview To create a logo osd file 1 Load a Bitmap bmp file 2 Add transparency in the desired areas 3 Downsample to the desired size 4 Save as an osd file Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page E 5 ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo An example of a logo is shown in Figure E 4 Zoom han Left Mouse View ein Transparency Button Colour Brush Size Transparency Value ate Osd Creator tty aw Window Help 3 2 m 2s waaa LButton Mix FButton Mix edi ush Changes Affect Palette Right Mouse m E O Button Transparency Value TANDBERG Television Sharing your vision Blue Component Green Of Pixel Component Of Pixel CF 413x212 237 Cols R254 G254 B254 T255 Image Properties Red Transparency Component Component Of Pixel Of Pixel Figure E 4 OSD Creator Screen Showing Example Logo E 5 2 Loading a bmp File Select File Open from the menu and choose a file with a bmp extension The image is d
102. source Only possible for MPEG and Dolby Digital AC 3 The bit rate will automatically change to 96 kbit s Analogue Analogue audio input on AUDIO IN connector Digital Digital audio input 1 on AUDIO IN connector SDI Embedded 1 Digital audio de embedded from digital video input using DID Ox2FF SDI Embedded 2 Digital audio de embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF These are default DIDs SDI Embedded 3 Digital audio de embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD SDI Embedded 4 Digital audio de embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD Coding Standard Option To access the Coding Standard option press the Coding Standard softkey in the Audio A Menu Table 4 45 Coding Standard Options Selected Option MPEG Layer 2 AC 3 Pass Thru Dolby E Pass Thru Dolby Digital AC 3 Linear PCM Description MPEG Layer 2 audio coding standard Pre encoded in Dolby Encoder AC 3 audio coding standard See Annex G Audio Modes for information when using this mode Dolby E audio coding standard pre encoded in Dolby Encoder See Annex G Audio Modes for information when using this mode Dolby Digital AC 3 audio coding standard Linear PCM audio coding standard See Annex G Audio Modes for information when using this mode Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Audio Bit rate Option NOT
103. sssssssssrsssseeeesssseenevsssseeneassseeneussseeneasssees 6 5 6 9 1 Gemeral sereen 6 12 6 4 1 Error MeSSages sssini 6 5 6 9 2 Lithium Batteries sss 6 12 6 4 2 Diagnostics MENU iraani 6 5 List of Figures INTODUCHON eisein canair 6 5 ba i Figure 6 1 Finding the Errors M Nu sssssssesssssesssssnesssesseesseesseens 6 5 LCD Display TEStoassssnnusannannnaanns 6 6 Figure 6 2 Finding the Diagnostics Menu vss 6 6 Keyboard TOSt soreness 6 6 Figure 6 3 Orientation of Fuse Carrier usussesesesssessesseesseen 6 9 Fail Reldy Testinin 6 6 Alarm Relay Testes ciciiiansnneinnnste 6 6 List of Tables Bil spe LED TREE rastcs hee carte ansocecsenten 6 6 Table 6 1 Video Fault finding Ee E E ETET 6 9 BPE TAGE na 6 7 Table 6 2 Rate Buffer S STUNG sts at TR 6 10 Table 6 3 Power LED Unlit Fault finding oes 6 11 6 5 Faultfindin gaisoen 6 7 Table 6 4 Fans Not Working Overheating ccssssssssessesee 6 12 6 5 1 Fault finding Philosophy serere 6 7 6 5 2 Preliminary Checks escenes 6 7 6 5 3 User Accessible Fuse Replacement 6 8 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 6 1 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding BLANK Page 6 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 6 1 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 2 6 2 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding Introduction This chapter provides the schedules and instructions where applicable for routine inspection cle
104. the instructions given in this manual contact Customer Services Switch off the equipment if it becomes unusable or to protect it from further damage User Accessible Fuse Replacement A fuse is held in an integral fuse carrier at the ac power inlet at the rear panel NOTE Refer to Annex B Section B 5 Power Supply for more information about the fuse details To replace the ac power fuse WARNING BEFORE REPLACING THE REAR PANEL FUSE DISCONNECT THE UNIT FROM THE SUPPLY FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY EXPOSE HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES UNPLUG THE UNIT FROM THE LOCAL SUPPLY SOCKET 1 Ensure that power is turned off and the power cable is disconnected from the ac power inlet 2 Ease out the fuse carrier by placing a small flat bladed screwdriver in the notch at the top of the carrier CAUTION When replacing the power input fuse always ensure that a fuse of the correct type and rating is fitted Failure to do so results in inadequate protection 3 Replace the fuse in the carrier 4 Insert the fuse carrier back in the ac power inlet Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding If required use a small flat bladed screwdriver in the notch at the top of the carrier to ease it out AC Power Inlet use Carrier ee Figure 6 3 Orientation of Fuse Carrier If the replacement fuse also blows do not continue Disconnect the
105. to VBI Line 22 VBI Line 272 to VBI Line 285 Teletext All lines Teletext PID Teletext Tag VBI on PID VBI PID VBI Component Tag VBI in Picture VPS Line 16 WSS Line 23 Auto Detect VITC VBI Line 7 to VBI Line 24 VBI Line 319 to VBI Line 336 Profile Level Compression Mode Bit Rate Resolution Aspect Ratio AFD t GOP Structure t GOP Length Long GOPs 9 3 2 Pulldown Field Frame Concatenation L PID Component Tag Reflex Enable Video Source Menu Menu options depend on Video Source selected Digital any test pattern Ident any PAL source any NTSC source Video Input Video Input nput Source Select Input Source Select Frame Rate dent Text Video Locked Video Bandwidth Ident Text OP Video Loss Video Bandwidth nput Termination OP Video Loss Noise Reduction Noise Reduction Default 525 Config Default 525 Config Default 625 Config Default 625 Config j Text Colour Text Colour Background Colour Background Colour Logo Logo Time Code 1VBI in Picture is only available when the Profile Level is set to 422P ML 2 Only shown if M2 ESO2 VBR option enabled 3 3 2 Pulldown is only available for 525 line 29 97 Hz inputs Q Only shown if M2 ESO2 NR option enabled 3 Only shown if the logo has previously been downloaded into the Encoder 6 Available from Build version 2
106. unique key is required for each Encoder and Receiver This is known as the Encrypted Session Word Each Encoder and Receiver is assigned a unique BISS Injected ID which should not be made generally known and which cannot be read from the unit For a particular transmission a BISS Session Word is chosen and then encrypted using each unit s BISS Injected ID to produce an Encrypted Session Word for each unit This means that if an unauthorised person obtains an Encrypted Session Word it is useless unless they also know the BISS Injected ID for the unit that the Encrypted Session Word was intended Scramble Option To access the Scramble option press the Scramble softkey in the Mux Menu This enables security scrambling of the Encoder transmission to be switched on or off NOTE If the scrambling is switched between BISS Mode 1 and BISS E the session word or the encrypted session word must be re entered Table 4 117 Scramble Options BISS Selected Option Description BISS Mode 1 Encoder output is scrambled Scrambling key used is entered using the Session Word option BISS E Encoder output is scrambled Scrambling key used is entered using the Enc Session Word option Off Encoder output is not scrambled BISS Key Entry Option NOTE This option is not available in Build version 2 2 0 and later Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 95 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the
107. using the softkeys then press the Enter softkey to accept it To be DVB compliant PIDs below 32 are reserved Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are available for use In the event of a clash one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder s internal checking algorithm Delay Option The Delay option is selected from the Data A RS232 Menu by pressing the Delay softkey The option cannot be changed SNMP oid index Option The SNMP oid index option is selected from the Data A RS232 Menu by pressing the SNMP oid index softkey All option modules have the same SNMP oid with the exception of one byte which identifies which slot the module is in An MEM expects the data module to be in slot two or three in the previous version of the Encoder Therefore slots one and two in this Encoder have been allocated to correspond directly to slots two and three in the previous Encoder In this Encoder the data module can be allocated to slot one making it inaccessible to an MEM This variable allows the on board data module to be apparently moved around to a slot in which it may be referenced by the MEM Table 4 69 SNMP oid index Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Oid index Max 7 Data B RS422 Menu Encoding Option To access the Encoding option press the Encoding softkey in the Data B RS422 Menu This enables the RS 422 synchronous data channel to be switched On or Off 8 oid object identifier Page 4 68
108. within a rack are at the same Technical earth potential To do this connect a wire between the Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack 2 Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between equipment WARNING IF THE TERMINAL SCREW HAS TO BE REPLACED USE THE FOLLOWING 1U ENCODER M4 X 10 mm LONG POZIDRIV PANHEAD 2U ENCODER M5 X 12mm LONG POZIDRIV PANHEAD USING A LONGER SCREW MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD Connecting the Encoder to the AC Power Supply WARNINGS 1 DO NOT OVERLOAD WALL OUTLETS AND EXTENSION CORDS AS THIS CAN RESULT INA RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK 2 AS NO MAINS SWITCH IS FITTED TO THIS UNIT ENSURE THE LOCAL AC POWER SUPPLY IS SWITCHED OFF BEFORE CONNECTING THE SUPPLY CORD 3 THE ENCODER IS NOT FITTED WITH AN ON OFF SWITCH ENSURE THAT THE SOCKET OUTLET IS INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT SO THAT IT IS EASILY ACCESSIBLE FAILURE TO ISOLATE THE EQUIPMENT PROPERLY MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD To connect the unit to the local ac power supply 1 Ensure the local ac supply is switched OFF 2 Ensure the correct fuse type and rating has been fitted to both the equipment and the ac power cable 3 Connect the ac power lead to the Encoder mains input connector and then to the local mains supply DC Operating Voltage and Earthing DC Power Supply WARNING THE ENCODER IS NOT FITTED WITH AN ON OFF SWITCH PROVIDE AN ACCESSIBLE EXTERNAL MEANS OF DISCONNECTION FAILURE
109. within the text of this manual Registered Trademarks AC 3 Dolby Digital and Pro Logic are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Musicam is a registered trademark of Thomson and T l diffusion de France TDF Europe and is a registered trademark of CCS now Musicam USA Incorporated USA Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation XILINX is a registered trademark of Xilinx Inc Trademarks Pozidriv is a trademark of European Industrial Services Reflex is a trademark of TANDBERG Television Windows NT is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation STREAMS is a trademark of TANDBERG Television NDS is a trademark of NDS Limited Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page v ST TM E10076 3 Preliminary Pages Warnings Cautions and Notes Heed Warnings All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or damage where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is operated Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should be followed Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference WARNINGS WARNINGS GIVE INFORMATION WHICH IF STRICTLY OBSERVED WILL PR
110. 0 C 4 F to 158 F 0 to 90 non condensing This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the requirements of the following EN 60950 IEC 60950 European International Safety of information technology equipment including business equipment Safety of information technology equipment including business equipment In addition the equipment has been designed to meet the following UL 1950 USA Safety of information technology equipment including business equipment 1 The version of the standards shown is that applicable at the time of manufacture Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page B 17 Technical Specification The equipment has been designed and tested to meet the following B 8 2 EMC EN 55022 European and AS NZS 3548 Australia and New Zealand EN 61000 3 2 European EN 61000 3 3 European EN 55024 1998 European FCC USA B 8 3 Shock and Vibration Emission Standard Limits and methods of measurement of radio frequency interference characteristics of information technology equipment Class A Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Part 3 Limits Section 2 Limits for harmonic current emissions equipment input current lt 16 A per phase Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Part 3 Limits Section 3 Limitation of voltage fluctuations and flicker in low voltage supply systems for equipment with rated current lt 16 A I
111. 0 v v s 384 v v v Dolby Digital AC 3 Dolby Digital AC 3 audio encoding incorporates digital normalisation preprocessing filtering dynamic range compression and the addition of bit stream information Dolby Pro Logic audio can be carried as stereo audio through the Encoder as long as a Suitably high bit rate is selected Page 1 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Table 1 6 Dolby Digital Audio Encoding Bit rates Bit rate Single Channel Dual Channel kbit s Mono 1 0 Stereo 2 0 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 384 448 512 576 640 S SIsIsIsIsIsIsIsIsIsIsIsIsIsIs SISISISISISISISISISISIS IS 1 3 3 Vertical Blanking Interval VBI Line Processing Modes Introduction The Encoder has three modes for processing VBI lines NOTE A maximum of eight VBI lines per field may be extracted This limit does not apply to Teletext VBI in Picture By selecting the VBI in Picture extended active picture format available in the MPEG 4 2 2 specification the Encoder compresses and transmits the VBI data as part of the active picture This mode requires up to 3 Mbit s of extra bit rate depending on the amount and complexity of the VBI present NOTES 1 VBI in Picture transmits the VBI waveform as part of the picture and as such will be subject to some distortion Most analogue VBI types are robust against this typ
112. 00 55 725 000 5 179 000 22 527 000 39 629 000 56 731 000 6 185 000 23 533 000 40 635 000 57 737 000 7 191 000 24 539 000 41 641 000 58 743 000 8 195 000 25 545 000 42 647 000 59 749 000 9 201 000 26 551 000 43 653 000 60 755 000 10 207 000 27 557 000 44 659 000 61 761 000 11 213 000 28 563 000 45 665 000 62 767 000 12 219 000 29 569 000 46 671 000 63 773 000 13 473 000 30 575 000 41 677 000 14 419 000 31 581 000 48 683 000 15 485 000 32 587 000 49 689 000 16 491 000 33 593 000 50 695 000 17 497 000 34 599 000 51 701 000 Table F 14 USA UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz in MHz in MHz A02 57 000 23 527 000 44 653 000 65 779 000 A03 63 000 24 533 000 45 659 000 66 785 000 A04 69 000 25 539 000 46 665 000 67 791 000 A05 79 000 26 545 000 47 671 000 68 797 000 A 06 85 000 27 551 000 48 677 000 69 803 000 A07 177 000 28 557 000 49 683 000 70 809 000 A08 183 000 29 563 000 50 689 000 71 815 000 A09 189 000 30 569 000 51 695 000 72 821 000 A10 195 000 31 575 000 52 701 000 73 827 000 All 201 000 32 581 000 53 707 000 74 833 000 A12 207 000 33 587 000 54 713 000 75 839 000 A13 213 000 34 593 000 55 719 000 76 845 000 14 473 000 35 599 000 56 725 000 TI 851 000 15 479 000 36 605 000 57 731 000 78 857 000 16 485 000 37 611 000 58 737 000 79 863 000 17 491 000 38 617 000 59 743 000 80 869
113. 076 3 Indexes Setup Menus and Associated Options I ndex 1 l service menu audio MPEG 2 option 4 103 BISS key code option 4 101 CA input option 4 100 data type of data option 4 103 ECM CA PID option 4 102 enc session word option 4 101 logical channel option 4 100 major channel option 4 100 minor channel option 4 100 name in option 4 99 name out option 4 99 output option 4 98 PCR PID option 4 101 PMT PID option 4 101 program number out option 4 100 service id out option 4 99 service prov in option 4 99 service provider option 4 99 session word option 4 101 short name in option 4 99 short name out option 4 99 source BNC option 4 98 teletext option 4 103 VBI PID option 4 102 video option 4 102 A advanced menu action on PID error option 4 30 current password option 4 29 display contrast option 4 30 display errors option 4 29 no services option 4 30 reset encoder option 4 30 reset on download option 4 30 setup password option 4 29 SNMP control option 4 30 system control option 4 29 audio languages menu 4 65 audio menu 4 52 audio bit rate option 4 55 audio delay option 4 57 audio PID option 4 64 auto lip sync option 4 56 bit stream mode option 4 59 channel option 4 59 clip level option 4 58 coding mode option 4 56 coding standard option 4 54 copyright option 4 62 dc filter option 4 63 deemphasis option 4 63 dialogue level option 4 60 dolby srnd mode
114. 20 3 12 Software Options vcccssssssssessssssssessssssesssssseeeesn 3 27 as en Ania ences peer rere i AUAA MAESUZINR isisisi aa Table 3 14 SDI Video Out Connector 3 12 2 M2 ESO2 P U sssssssssstssstssttssenstesseeesensninsnans 3 27 Table 3 15 Composite Video Connector 3 12 3 M2 ESOZNBR asssrssrsssesnstnseisernnetnsties 3 28 Table 3 16 Audio Output Connector 3 12 4 M2 ESO2 422 ccsssosesssseeeessnssseenunsssen 3 28 Table 3 17 RS232 RS 422 Data Output Connector 3 23 3 12 5 M2 ESO2IRAS wescssssessessssssssnsesearenssensens 3 28 Table 3 18 IF In ConneCt0liaisissssstasnannaainanaimnaense 3 12 6 M2 ESO2 ACON oot 3 28 Table 3 19 RF In COMM CHOF sssssssesssssssssssssssssssssnsssssessesessssssssen 3 12 7 MZESOZ2A G3 anii ioneiegani menema 3 28 Table 3 20 L Band Input Connector 3 12 8 M2 ESO2Z SM38PSK varn 3 28 Table 3 21 ASI In Connector ssn 3 12 9 M2 ESO2 SM316QAM nn 3 28 Table 3 22 ASI Out Connector 3 12 10M2 ESO2 8P SKDEMOD usssssssesesseeeseee 3 28 Table 3 23 RJ 45 CONNECHOF ss snensininenennennsn 3 12 LIM2 ESO2 L6QAMDEMOD Vises 3 28 ZIZI M2 ESO2LSYM asioista 3 28 List of Figures Figure 3 1 Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option M2 EOM2 AUDLIN usccssesssessssssssessesssessesssessssssnesees 3 7 Figure 3 2 RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input Option M2 EOM2 DAT sisi iaiiviscinlniviiininad dannanadan 3 9 Figure 3 3 Remux Option M2 EOM2 REMUX sss 3 12 Figure 3 4 Block Diagram One Stage of Remultiplexing 3 14 Fig
115. 24 frames per second film rate to the 29 97 frames per second NTSC rate This enables the Encoder to increase the video compression by only including a flag in the transport stream to represent a repeated field when detected rather than compressing the repeated fields Concatenation Option NOTES 1 Auto Concatenation is only available when software option M2 ESO2 ACON is purchased 2 Concatenation is only available if the video source is SDI Use this option if the signal has been coded then decoded and is about to be coded again It reduces picture degradation associated with multiple generation compression encoding Setting this option may give better results as it tries to line up the frames Only available to video via the SDI input See Application Note ST AN 1110 Near Loss less MPEG Concatenation Without Helper Signals Page 4 44 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally PID Option The PID option is selected from the Video Encoder Menu by pressing the PID softkey The option is used for entering or updating video PIDs as required Enter a PID then press the Enter softkey to accept it To be DVB compliant PIDs below 32 are reserved Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are available for use In the event of a clash one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder s internal checking algorithm Reflex Enable Option The Reflex Enable option is sel
116. 3 23 39 2 Assembly susrsrcusinunisn nata 3 24 Rear Panel eseseersrsien 3 24 IF inini aie a 3 24 RF INi 3 24 Options and Upgrades 3 10 16QAM Demodulator M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD 3 24 List of Tables 3 10 1 OV IVIOW sessen 3 24 Table 3 1 Hardware Option Module Positions seses 3 3 3 10 2 ASSEMDIY eirinn 3 25 Table 3 2 Software Options ss sssssssssissrisstisssrrssrissrisstrssnerisnrisnrsa 3 4 Real Panel ation Gca enon etter aan e 3 25 Table 3 3 Minimum Bit rates With and Without Performance L Band AUT serci 3 25 M Upgrade Oe ater en epee ier eee gt able 3 4 Audio IN CONNECHOT sscccccrncncnnnsnsinnnn 3 8 3 11 IP Output Card MZ EOMZ IP Jsa 3 25 Table 3 5 RS 232 Data Connector Option Module SULA OVEN EW sactaseassssissetinsssintsctadsevvsetannnitnverseve 3 25 ASYNCHRONOUS sosssssssseresseesseerssnerssenssnesssenseesees 3 10 3 11 2 NSSEMMDM aa cchcrasudbeenietitcentiussdrtrinn 3 26 Table 3 6 RS 422 Data Connector Option Module Rear Panel 3 26 SYNCHTONOUS sscssssincrsenscesarsensente C Table 3 7 DVB ASI In Connector ASTIN sssrsstssessstessteessttsstattttssatssttsettseaneenet 3 26 Table 3 8 DVB ASI Out Connector crrrrrrrcrcrrnnn 3 13 RS 232 COMO ressesssssserseersernstiserseen 3 26 Table 3 9 Audio In L AES EBU Connector sss 3 19 ASI QUbsesennnnemonememnunenn 3 27 Table 3 10 Audio In R CONNECHOT sessen 3 19 Ethernet OU QUE iactiaii caster isenvesssseiccesen 3 27 Table 3 11 Audio Out L AES EBU Connector sssini 3
117. 4 29 then a password will be asked for to access and change a parameter 4 7 System Menu 4 7 1 Introduction The System Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the System softkey see Figure 4 9 for menu structure This menu permits the selection of system information Any option with a clear circle next to it cannot be accessed and changed It is for status information only Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 17 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Setup Menu System Menu Service Info Remote Control General Advanced K Mbd Services 5 EES Build General Remote Quit Menu Control Menu L_ Model Number _ IP Address Config Name LL Build Local Time L Network Mask Menu L Local Date Gateway Address UTC Offset SNMP Master _ Temperature Screen Saver L Keypress Beep SNMP Trap IP Power Dip Recovery SABus Address Upgrade Encoder Serial Protocol Software Release SABus Baud Rate L Fan Control L SABus Data Bits Menu Mbd Services These menus are mainly for TANDBERG Television use for testing purposes The Mdb Services and Default Service menus are only available if in the Advanced Menu the number of Services is set to more than one Default Service Default Service
118. 4 29 for use of this facility 7 To ensure correct lip sync when working with linear or pre encoded audio the option card M2 EOM2 AUDLIN should be used Page 4 56 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Lip Sync Offset Option NOTE This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to On To access the Lip Sync Offset option press the Lip Sync Offset softkey in the Audio A Menu Table 4 48 Lip Sync Offset Options Valid Input Range Description Min 0 Lip Sync Offset in milliseconds Max 50 Audio Delay Option NOTE This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to Off To access the Audio Delay option press the Audio Delay softkey in the Audio A Menu Table 4 49 Audio Delay Options Valid Input Range Description Min 111 Audio Delay in milliseconds Max 3540 External Delay Option To access the External Delay option press the External Delay softkey in the Audio A Menu This parameter is used to compensate for external delays NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby E Pass Thru or AC 3 Pass Thru Table 4 50 External Delay Options Valid Input Range Description Min Oms Max 450 ms Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 57 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Clip Level Option To access the Clip L
119. 45 525 Line Composite Options Selected Option Description 525 NTSC M The composite output standard for a 525 line input is NTSC M 525 NTSC M No Pedestal The composite output standard for a 525 line input is NTSC M with no pedestal 525 PAL M The composite output standard for a 525 line input is PAL M 625 Line Composite Option To access the 625 Line Composite option press the 625 Line Composite softkey in the IRD Video Menu Table 4 146 625 Line Composite Options Selected Option Description 625 PAL The composite output standard for a 625 line input is PAL 625 PAL B G The composite output standard for a 625 line input is PAL B G 625 SECAM The composite output standard for a 625 line input is SECAM PAL N The composite output standard for a 625 line input is PAL N Rate Buffer Mode Option To access the Rate Buffer Mode option press the Rate Buffer Mode softkey in the IRD Video Menu Table 4 147 Rate Buffer Mode Options Selected Option Description Normal This is the normal setting Small This should only be used when decoding System 3000 Encoder generated transport streams Video Default Output Option To access the Video Default Output option press the Video Default Output softkey in the IRD Video Menu This defines the default video line standard when there is no video service to be decoded Table 4 148 Video Default Output Options Selected Option Description 625 Line 525 Line Instruction Manu
120. 5 OVOIVIOW esceccceceesecesseeteeestsesseeeetetsneeeacess 4 95 Scramble Option c cccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 95 BISS Key Entry Option eee 4 95 Session Word Option cceceeeeee 4 96 Enc Session Word Option cccee 4 96 BISS E Injected Id Option eee 4 96 4 13 REMUK sioiidacnisnaeacniaiidia alive 4 97 4 13 1 Introduction 0 0 0 ceceeseceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 4 97 4 13 2 Addition to Mux Menu When Remux Pied EE E E T E E T 4 97 Host Bit rate Option cscs 4 97 4 13 3 Remux Module Menu cceeceeceee 4 97 Remux Mode Option c eescseeeeee 4 97 Packet Length Option 4 98 Bit rate Option cecceceeeeeeesteetseseeeees 4 98 Status Only Options for the Remux Module Menu ccsceccecceseseeesetenseeeees 4 98 4 13 4 1 Service 2 Service Menu 4 98 Output Option 0 0 0 cececeeeeesseeeeeeteeseeeees 4 98 Source BNC Option cesses 4 99 Short Name In Option ccceceececeees 4 99 Short Name Out Option cece 4 99 Name In Option cccscstesieentenneees 4 99 Name Out Option 0 0 0 cceeeeeeeeeeees 4 100 Service Prov In Option eee 4 100 Service Provider Option 0ccee 4 100 Service Id Out Option cceeeeee 4 100 Program Number Out Option 4 100 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 14 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder
121. 500 64 781 500 11 219 500 45 648 500 65 788 500 12 226 500 46 655 500 66 795 500 27 523 500 47 662 500 67 802 500 28 529 500 48 669 500 68 809 500 29 536 500 49 676 500 69 816 500 30 543 500 50 683 500 31 550 500 51 690 500 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page F 3 ST TM E10076 3 Band Plans Table F 2 Europe VHF UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz E2 50 500 E8 198 500 E3 57 500 E9 205 500 E4 64 500 E 10 212 500 E5 177 500 Ell 219 500 E6 184 500 E12 226 500 E7 191 500 Table F 3 EuropeCATV UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz S4 128 500 S13 247 500 55 135 500 S14 254 500 S6 142 500 S15 261 500 S7 149 500 S16 268 500 S8 156 500 S17 275 500 9 163 500 S18 282 500 S10 170 500 S19 289 500 11 233 500 S 20 296 500 S12 240 500 Table F 4 Italy UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz A 56 000 F 194 500 B 64 500 G 203 500 C 84 500 H 212 500 D 177 500 H 219 500 E 186 000 H2 226 500 Table F 5 Morocco UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz M4 165 500 M8 197 500 M5 173 500 M9 205 500 M6 181 500 M 10 213 500 M7 189 500 Page F 4 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Band Plans Table F 6 New Zealand
122. 66 Output Format Options Selected Option Description Analogue Analogue output balanced 10 Q impedance Digital AES EBU balanced Output FSR Option To access the Output FSR Full Scale Range option press the Output FSR softkey in the Audio XLR Menu Table 4 67 Output FSR Options When Analogue Input Selected Selected Option Description 15 dB Analogue maximum output 15 dB 18 dB Analogue maximum output 18 dB Firmware Release Option This option indicates the firmware release of the Audio XLR Card It is for status only and cannot be changed Hardware Release Option This option indicates the Hardware release of the Audio XLR Card It is for status only and cannot be changed Data Menu Introduction The Data Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Data softkey This menu permits the selection of RS 232 asynchronous data and RS 422 synchronous data channel parameters If M2 EOM2 DAT is fitted there are additional menus for RS 422 data and for RS 232 asynchronous data See Figure 4 16 for the menu structure Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Setup Menu Data Menu Data A RS232 Data B RS422 Data X A RS232 Data X B RS422 only shown if only shown if M2 EOM2 DAT M2 EOM2 DAT option fitted opt
123. 78 FEC HP and FEC LP OptionS sesssseeeussesen 4 75 Table 4 26 Text Colour Options cascsssaseessnsetseseteteeiee 4 34 Table 4 79 Guard Interval Options eee 4 75 Page 4 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 80 Carriers Options cseecseceeseeseseestetetssteeeetenees 4 75 Table 4 120 Output Options cece cece tsteseeesstseeeseetenees Table 4 81 Other Frequency Options cceeseceseeeteeees 4 76 Table 4 121 Source BNC Options cceeeteeseseeteeneeeees Table 4 82 Modulation Type OptionS cccsceeseeeeeteeees 4 76 Table 4 122 Service Id Out Options Table 4 83 FEC Outer Options cccesesectesneeeteseeeeeeeees 4 76 Table 4 123 Program Number Out Options s seee 4 100 Table 4 84 FEC Inner Options cseceeeesseseeteseetssteseetesnees 4 77 Table 4 124 PMT PID Options cseescsesseessesesestsneeeteens 4 102 Table 4 85 Symbol Rate OptionS cscseesesteeeseeeeeeees 4 77 Table 4 125 PCR PID Options 0 ccseeesesseseeseeesneneeentens 4 102 Table 4 86 Modulation Type OptionS ccccceeseeeeeteeees 4 77 Table 4 126 Video Options c cccceceeseeseseestesteeseeteneeeeseneees 4 102 Table 4 87 Orbital Position OptionS 0 ccccscseetesteeeteeees 4 78 Table 4 127 ECM CA PID Options cce
124. Always investigate the failure symptoms fully prior to taking remedial action Fault diagnosis for the equipment operator is limited to the following tasks since the operator should NOT remove the covers of the equipment 1 Check the front panel Power LED If this is not lit a Replace the fuse in the power connector at the rear panel see Section 6 5 3 User Accessible Fuse Replacement NOTE Only replace the fuse once If it blows again contact Customer Services b Replace external equipment power source and cables by substitution to check their performance Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 6 7 ST TM E10076 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding 6 5 3 Page 6 8 2 Confirm that the equipment hardware configuration is suitable for the purpose and has been correctly installed and connected see Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment 3 Confirm that inappropriate operator action is not causing the problem and that the equipment software set up is capable of performing the task being asked of it If the validity of the configuration set up or operation is in doubt check it see Chapter 4 Operating the Encoder Locally 4 Check that the fans are unobstructed and working correctly When the failure condition has been fully investigated and the symptoms are known proceed with fault finding according to the observed symptoms If the fault persists and cannot be rectified using
125. Bit Rate 204 is only available when the Packet Length is set to 204 2This name changes to be the same as the Service Name There could be more menus depending upon the number of inputs to the Remux card 3 Only available when BISS Mode 1 is selected as the Scrambling mode Available in Build version 2 2 and later 4 Only available when BISS E is selected as the Scrambling mode Available in Build version 2 2 and later 5 This option is not available from Build version 2 2 G Only available when the Remux card is fitted and enabled L Output Short Name Out Name Out t Program Number Out Major Channel t Minor Channel Enc Session Wordt Session Word PMT PID PCR PID Video Audio type of audio Figure 4 19 Menu Hierarchy Setup Mux Menu ATSC Page 4 92 3 Program 2 1 2 Default Menu Service when there is an Menu incoming service When ATSC has When ATSC has been enabled been enabled Incoming Service Host Encoder Output Name Out Program Number Out Enc Session Wordt Session Word Packet Length On Air Bit rate 188 Bit rate 204 Host Bit rate Clock PCR PID Remux Module Remux Mode Packet Length Bit rate 188 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 12 6 Bit rate 188 and Bit rate 204 Option NOTE If the
126. C data extracted from the line Video Index Aspect ratio will be affected see 525 line with AFD set to On lines 14 and 277 will be set to Video Index Table 4 37 Teletext System B World System Teletext Teletext System B data extracted from the line Inverted Teletext Inverted Teletext is extracted from the line Wide Screen Signalling The setting cannot be selected on this screen but is set by setting the WSS Line 23 option to On It indicates that WSS data is extracted from the line Setting Line 23 back to Off VITC or Teletext System B resets the WSS Line 23 option back to Off Closed Caption Closed Caption data is extracted from the line Video Programming System The setting cannot be selected on this screen but is set by setting the VPS Line 16 option to On It indicates that VPS data is extracted from the line Setting Line 16 back to Off VITC or Teletext System B resets the VPS Line 16 option back to Off When operating in ATSC mode and Closed Captions the language of the descriptors is set by the Encoder When switching the Encoder from DVB to ATSC mode the PIDs are remapped The remapping would be specified by the program paradigm Switching back to DVB would invoke the original PI Ds Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page 4 49 Operating the Equipment Locally FIELD 1 FIELD 2 2 2 9 Same options as line 10 10 VI
127. CM Dolby Digital AC3 only shown if Source Source Source Source M2 ESO2 AC3 option Coding Standard Coding Standard Coding Standard Coding Standard emtanted Auto Lip Sync Audio Bit rate H Source Lip Sync Offset Coding Standard Audio Delay Auto Lip Sync Audio Bit rate Coding Mode L External Delay Audio Delay Coding Mode Auto Lip Sync 6 Language Lip Sync Offset Auto Lip Sync Lip Sync Offset Audio Bit rate SMPTE 302M Standard External Delay Lip Sync Offset Audio Delay Coding Mode Embedded 1 2 DID Audio Delay Clip Level Auto Lip Sync Embedded 3 4 DID Bit Stream Mode Clip Level Impedance Lip Sync Offset Audio PID Embedded 1 2 DID Impedance Language Left Audio Delay5 PCR on Audio PID Embedded 3 4 DID Language Left Language Right Sampling Rate Audio PID Language Right SMPTE 302M Standard Clip Level L PCR on Audio PID Deemphasis Channel Impedance Hardware Release Copyright Embedded 1 2 DID Language L Software Release Original Embedded 3 4 DID L_ Bit Stream Mode Embedded 1 2 DID Audio PID Dialogue Level Embedded 3 4 DID PCR on Audio PID Dolby Srnd Mode Audio PID Hardware Release Production Info Audio PCR on Audio PID Software Release L_ Mixing Level Languages Hardware Release L_ Room Type Menu Software Release Copyright Original Dynamic Range RF Protection meee 2 Audio XLR Deemphasis Engli
128. Configs from Backup Ops Menu Store Configs in Backup Factory 525 Defaults Advanced Factory 625 Defaults Menu Write Protect Configs Quit Setup Errors Diagnostics Ops Configs Quit Errors Setup Menu Menu Active Errors System See Figure 4 9 Error Masks j Video See Figure 4 10 L Quit Audio See Figure 4 15 Data See Figure 4 16 Output See Figure 4 17 t Mux See Figure 4 18 L IRD See Figure x x L Quit Front Panel Config Operations Diagnostics Menu Menu Menu L From the Summary Screen L From the Input Monitor Screen LCD Display see the Config Menu see the Operations Keyboard Ops Menu Fail Relay Alarm Relay Alarm LED Buzzer Quit Figure 4 8 Menu Hierarchy Summary Screen and Advanced Menus Page 4 16 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 5 6 Summary Screen and Advanced Menus See Figure 4 8 for the top level menu hierarchy Press the More softkey in the Summary Screen to access the Advanced Menu The Advanced Menu provides options for configuring and testing the Encoder 4 6 Setup Menu The Setup Menu can be selected from the Advanced Menu by pressing the Setup softkey see Figure 4 8 for menu structure The menu provides access to configuration and operating features and predefined configurations If the password option has been set in the System Advanced Menu see page
129. Contents ACT Introduction as cateieecictecdascrccceatenddadaincesierdlvecedeaieanctad C 3 List of Tables i i Table C 1 525 625 Line Default Settings ccccsssseceeees C 3 C 2 525 625 Line Default Settings cceeeceeees C 3 Table C 2 Default Configuration SettingS aana 63 C 3 General Default Settings cccscccccssecsssecsecsseesees C 3 Table C 3 Predefined User Configurations sss C 7 C 4 Predefined User Configurations cscs C 7 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page C 1 ST TM E10076 3 Predefined User Configurations BLANK Page C 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Predefined User Configurations C 1 Introduction There are sixteen predefined user configurations These are a quick and easy way to configure the Encoder without having to enter individual parameters C 2 525 625 Line Default Settings Table C 1 525 625 Line Default Settings Lines Frame Rate GOP Length 525 29 97 Hz 15 625 25 Hz 12 C 3 General Default Settings The Encoder parameters and default settings are as shown in Table C 2 Table C 2 Default Configuration Settings Module Parameter Default Value System UTC Offset 0 Config Name Config Name Screen Saver Off Screen Saver Delay 300 s Key Beeper On Power Dip Recovery Off Fan Control Auto Temp Controlled Service Name Default Service Service Provider Service Provider Netwo
130. DM S W Release 4 87 4 11 11 Output Format IP Streamer 3 1 and TALON tise cetct tarteceaatuies en aeai 4 88 Own IP Address Option c ccceccee 4 88 Network Mask Option c ceceseeeeees 4 88 Page 4 4 Router IP Address Option s cse 4 88 Destination IP Address Option 4 88 Destination UDP Port Option 4 88 TS Pkts UDP Frm Option 0 eceeeee 4 88 Multicast IP Address Option 005 4 89 Time To Live Option cccceceeeeeeees 4 89 Type of Service Option cccceeeee 4 89 4 12 MUX MON cecesceccseeceseseeeeteseseeeseeeeeeetsneeeaeeteees 4 89 4 12 1 OVOIVIOW c cccecceseceseeeseceeteseseeeeetsetenseeeees 4 89 4 12 2 Mux Output no Remux Card 4 89 4 12 3 Mux Output With Remux Card 4 90 4 12 4 Packet Length Option ccs 4 90 4 12 5 On Air Option uo cecceceeeeeseeesteteeneteeees 4 90 4 12 6 Bit rate 188 and Bit rate 204 Option 4 93 LIZ Clk 4 93 4 12 8 PCR PID Option 0 0 00 ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 93 4 12 9 FPGA Firmware 4 94 4 12 10RAS Firmware cccecceseeseseeseseeteensteeeees 4 94 4 12 11 BISS Hardware ecccccseeeeeeeseeeeeees 4 94 4 12 12 BISS Firmware ccececcecesseeeeseeeeeeeeees 4 94 4 12 13RAS Options Enabled ccccecee 4 94 Scramble Option c cccccceeceeeeeseeeees 4 94 SNG Key RAS1 Option 0 ceeceeee 4 94 4 12 14BISS Options Enabled ceccee 4 9
131. DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 34 Resolution Options Selected Option Description In Auto pixel 625 Line Modes 525 Line Modes value in brackets 4 Auto 720x576 Auto 720x480 varies with bit rate that 720 x576 720 x480 is set 704 x576 704x480 Relates to the number of pixels anuwye OO RAR gon CFoss the screen and the Se _____ ne 040X480 number of lines down the screen 544 x576 544x480 pixels x lines 480 x576 480x480 352x576 352x480 352x288 SIF 352x240 SIF Aspect Ratio Option To access the Aspect Ratio option press the Aspect Ratio softkey in the video Encoder Menu This option does not affect the image processing Table 4 35 Aspect Ratio Options Selected Option Description 1 0 Video image is encoded at 1 1 aspect ratio Not currently used 4 3 Video image is encoded at 4 3 aspect ratio Default 16 9 Video image is encoded at 16 9 aspect ratio 2 21 1 Video image is encoded at 2 21 1 aspect ratio Not currently used AFD Option Active Format Descriptor AFD uses three bits of video index to define the video format This information is encoded into user data and can then be used by a Decoder for wide screen switching To access the AFD option press the AFD softkey in the video Encoder Menu Table 4 36 AFD Options Selected Option Description off No AFD data output On Output AFD value zero if input is lost On No Action on Error If the i
132. Data I nput A 9 way D type female connector provides an RS 232 asynchronous serial communications data input interface Table B 30 RS 232 Asynchronous Data Input Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Type ITU T V 24 V 28 RS 232D asynchronous serial data Connector designation ASYNC Connector type 9 way D type female Supported baud rates 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 baud Control mechanism XON XOFF Time stamp Not supported Synchronous Data I nput A 15 way D type female connector provides an RS 422 synchronous serial communications data input interface Table B 31 RS 422 Synchronous Data Input Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Type ITU T V 11 RS 422 synchronous serial data and external clock Connector designation SYNC Connector type 15 way D type female Clock frequencies n x 64 kbit s from 64 kbit s to 2048 kbit s selectable or nx 56 kbit s from 56 kbit s to 1792 kbit s selectable Time stamp Not supported Operation modes Bit pipe Transport packet alignment and byte alignment relative to the incoming bit stream are arbitrary Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 B 10 3 M2 EOM2 REMUX Remux Option Module Connectors NOTE Technical Specification The M2 EOM2 REMUX Remux Option Module is supported by Encoder software version 2 2 0 and later Table B 32 DVB ASI In 1 2 and 3 Connector Item Specifi
133. Descriptor Type option press the Descriptor Type softkey inthe Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the descriptor type to be specified Table 4 71 Descriptor Type Options Selected Option Description Comments Satellite Descriptor type set to Satellite The type of delivery descriptor selected affects the remaining Terrestrial Descriptor type set to Terrestrial eS eee options shown on the Delivery None Descriptor Menu Cable Descriptor type set to Cable Descriptor Type Terrestrial Band Plan Option To access the Band Plan option press the Band Plan softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu Once a country has been selected then the required channel should be selected in the Channel option Each channel number corresponds to a particular frequency see Annex F Band Plans Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 72 Band Plan Options Selected Option Selected Option Australia Ireland Europe VHF South Africa Europe CATV French Overseas PIA Italy France Morocco Japan New Zealand USA China CCIR OIRT Manual Channel Option To access the Channel option press the Channel softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu Each channel number corresponds to a particular frequency see Annex F Band Plans Table 4 73 Channel Options Valid Input Range Description Depends upon the country See
134. ENT If an error occurs in the DSNG Voyager Encoder Encoder then a message indicating the type of error is shown on the front panel display Any of the errors can be masked or suppressed There are three states Alarm Fail or Off See Chapter 4 Section 4 14 3 Error Masks Menu for details of the masking process The possible error messages are listed in the following tables An alarm condition is a condition which is unusual but which may occur during normal operation such as loss of video input A failure condition indicates a hardware or software failure a condition that should never occur during the normal operating life of the equipment Both types of error light the front panel Alarm LED and the alarm relay interface on the Alarm connector see Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment will be set according to the type of error an alarm condition triggers the alarm relay only and a failure condition triggers both the fail and alarm relays Dealing with Error Messages The action to take when an error message is reported is given in the following tables If the fault cannot be resolved using the information provided make a note of the error message s displayed and call a Service Engineer see Customer Service Information in the Preliminary Pages Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Error Messages H 3 General Errors Table H 1 General Error Messages Page H 4 Error
135. ES 1 This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is AC 3 Pass Thru MPEG Layer 2 or Dolby Digital AC 3 2 When AC 3 Pass Thru is selected Audio Bit rate is status only To access the Audio Bit rate option press the Audio Bit rate softkey in the Audio A Menu Table 4 46 Audio Bit rate Options Available MPEG Layer 2 Coding Dolby Digital Settings ODA ouqN Pa 32 kbit s 48 kbit s 56 kbit s 64 kbit s 80 kbit s 96 kbit s 112 kbit s 128 kbit s 160 kbit s 192 kbit s 224 kbit s 256 kbit s 320 kbit s 384 kbit s 448 kbit s 512 kbit s 576 kbit s 640 kbit s x sis sjsj SI SESE STS S S SISIS xix s RENNES NESSES NN ENT we x x xisi s S SES SI STS STS SR S Le w e x sisi SESE SIESTA SIS LS oe msmo rf PS ATA SA ALA AI AT ST SI SIA A sIisisisisisisisisisisisisisis s x x I nput Level L Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is MPEG Layer 2 Linear PCM or Dolby Digital AC 3 This option indicates the input level of the left audio channel It is for status only and cannot be changed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 55 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Input Level R Option NOTE This option is not shown when the Coding Standard is MPEG Layer 2 mono or Dolby Digital AC 3 1 0 This option indicates the input level of the
136. EVENT PERSONAL INJ URY OR DEATH OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL PROPERTY OR THE ENVIRONMENT THEY ARE BOXED AND SHADED FOR EMPHASIS AS IN THIS EXAMPLE AND ARE PLACED IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE POINT AT WHICH THE READER REQUIRES THEM CAUTIONS Cautions give information which if strictly followed will prevent damage to equipment or other goods They are boxed for emphasis as in this example and are placed immediately preceding the point at which the reader requires them NOTES Notes provide supplementary information They are highlighted for emphasis as in this example and are placed immediately after the relevant text EMC Compliance This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in Annex B Technical Specification To maintain this certification only use the leads supplied or if in doubt contact Customer Services Page vi Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Preliminary Pages Contact Information TANDBERG Television Customer Services Support Services Our primary objective is to provide first class customer care that is tailored to your specific business and operational requirements All levels are supported by one or more service performance reviews to ensure the perfect partnership between TANDBERG Television and your business Warranty All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a com
137. FT cable Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 8 SD Decoder Option M2 EOM2 DEC 3 8 1 Overview NOTES 1 The M2 EOM2 DEC SD Decoder Option is supported by Build version 3 1 and later 2 This option module only fits into option slot 6 in the E5740 and must always be accompanied by a demodulator option module in slot 5 This option module is a complete MPEG 2 standard definition decoder capable of decoding 422P ML and MP ML It can provide analogue or digital video and audio outputs as well as synchronous and asynchronous data outputs In conjunction with a demodulator option module it provides a complete satellite monitoring receiver within the E5740 Encoder 3 8 2 Assembly Rear Panel ASI Out A 75 Q female BNC connector provides an ASI output of the transport stream being decoded by the SD Decoder AA 1 Table 3 13 ASI Out Connector Item Specification Connector Type 75 Q BNC Female Connector designation ASI Out Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground SDI Video Out O A 75 Q female BNC connector provides an SDI video 10 output that conforms to ITU R BT 656 Table 3 14 SDI Video Out Connector Item Specification Connector Type 75 Q BNC Female Connector designation SDI Out Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 21 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades Page 3 22
138. G 2 DSNG Encoder with IF output satellite modulator Has 4 2 0 4 2 2 video encoding mode and fully exhaustive motion estimation E5740 Encoder 10122 M2NOY E5740 12 to 36 V dc powered 2U MPEG 2 DSNG Encoder with IF IF 12 36V output satellite modulator Has 4 2 0 4 2 2 video encoding mode and fully exhaustive motion estimation E5740 Encoder 10130 M2NOY E5740 2U MPEG 2 DSNG Encoder with L band output satellite LBAND modulator Has 4 2 0 4 2 2 video encoding mode and fully exhaustive motion estimation E5740 Encoder 10131 M2NOY E5740 12 to 36 V dc powered 2U MPEG 2 DSNG Encoder with LBAND 12 36V L band output satellite modulator Has 4 2 0 4 2 2 video encoding mode and fully exhaustive motion estimation E5750 Encoder 10078 M2NOY E5750 2U MPEG 2 DENG Encoder with OFDM modulator Has 4 2 0 4 2 2 video encoding mode and fully exhaustive motion estimation 1 4 2 2 is only available when software option M2 ESO2 422 is purchased Page 1 4 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Information Label There are two information labels which identify the configuration of the unit Figure 1 3 and Figure 1 4 are typical examples Encoder l Serial Number i Hardware Configuration A unique number for unit identification Serial No NNN A reference which identifies each E10076_XX _XX _XX_XX XX XX piece of hardware in the equipment Marke
139. H status flags available in the menus all inactive UES Unknown Error Status flags active Mux F W V15 Base Card H W Mod Strike 11 and below EDH works but unreliably EDH support only partially implemented in software EDH works partially converts edh errors to eda does not reportall errors Gennum chip modifies EDH data in incoming SDI stream IfEDH is not present in incoming stream Gennum chip inserts it therefore the Encoder thinks EDH was there all along Error detection in this case is unreliable as the CRCs and checksums are calculated AFTER the errors have occurred IfEDH is present in incoming stream the most likely scenario the Gennum chip detects CRC and checksum errors edh turns those errors into edas and recalculates CRCs In this case the Encoder reports the wrong type of errors which would make fault finding very confusing for an operator trying to find a faultin the SDI chain Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Base Card H W Mod Strike 12 and above EDH works but unreliably EDH support only partially implemented in software EDH works as per specifications Page K 3 EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders BLANK Page K 4 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Indexes This section is split into two parts The first is the General I ndex and the second is
140. HIS EQUIPMENT THROUGH OPENINGS AS THEY MAY TOUCH DANGEROUS VOLTAGE POINTS OR SHORT OUT PARTS THAT COULD RESULT IN A FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK NEVER SPILL LIQUID OF ANY KIND ON THE PRODUCT CAUTIONS Openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating and these openings must not be blocked or covered This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation such as a rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the instructions have been adhered to Do not install equipment so that the air intake of one aligns with the outlet on another Provide baffles and adequate spacing The fans contained within this unit are not fitted with a dust insect filter Pay particular attention to the environment in which it is to be used Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 5 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment The unit is designed for stationary or fixed use only Ensure it is firmly and safely located and has an adequate through flow of air Allow at least 50 mm free air space at each side of the equipment Units in racks can be stacked without ventilation panels between Racks containing stacked equipment may need to be forced air cooled to reduce the operating ambient temperature For stacking constraints contact Customer Services T
141. If two logo regions share a horizontal line they may interfere with each other so this should be avoided see Section E 7 5 i e logos may be placed adjacent vertically but not horizontally Logos cannot be overlapped One logo can be downloaded into Flash memory and will still be present after the Encoder has been powered OFF All other logos are stored in volatile memory and will be lost when the Encoder is powered OFF To create and download logos to the Encoder two Windows applications are required Osd Creator and Osd Loader Once a logo has been downloaded to Flash it can be enabled disabled from the front panel menu Setup Video Video source Stored OSD Logos downloaded to volatile memory can only be controlled by the OSD Loader application running from a PC Logos are defined at pixel resolution and include a red green blue and transparency component Logos can be positioned anywhere in the active video and can be any size from 1x1 pixel to the full size of the active picture 720x576 or 720x480 pixels Logos are limited to a maximum of 256 colours including different levels of transparency The logo is overlaid onto the active picture prior to horizontal and vertical down sampling noise reduction and video bandwidth filtering if these are used E 3 OSD Programs Built Into the Encoder Two Windows applications are required for creating and downloading logos to the Encoder namely Osd Creator and Osd Loader These programs
142. Indicators sss 1 16 Figure 1 8 Stand by SWItCh cscscssessessesssessssssssssesnesnseseessesses 1 17 Figure 1 9 2U Encoder Front Panel Indicators s s 1 17 Figure 1 10 5714 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and CONNECHONS assis sssssssesssassesssiarastranst inition teanecnsaraies 1 18 Figure 1 11 5715 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and CONNEC sannana Son naeh 1 18 Figure 1 12 E5740 2U Rear Panel Component Parts and CONG CIONS tusiina 1 18 Figure 1 13 E5750 2U Rear Panel Component Parts and CONNECTS sasssssssassssisssstesinanasiiinstiites asses arait 1 19 Page 1 2 List of Tables Tabled 2 Build Version iiuna 1 3 Table 1 2 Equipment Model Descriptions s es 1 4 Table 1 3 Video Bitrate Range v sssssesssesssssssesnesessesssesses 1 9 Table 1 4 Video Coding Resolutions cesesses ese 1 10 Table 1 5 MPEG 1 Audio Encoding Bitrates sns 1 12 Table 1 6 Dolby Digital Audio Encoding Bit rates s s 1 13 Table 1 7 Front Panel Indicators scsssesessesssessssssssseesneesees 1 16 Table 1 8 Boards in the Basic ENCOder ssssessesseessessseesneeses 1 19 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder 1 1 Scope of this Manual 1 1 1 Who Should Use This Manual This manual is written for operators users of the 1U and 2U Voyager Encoders to assist in the installation operation and day to day care These Encoders are referred to throughout this
143. Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 6 9 ST TM E10076 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding 6 5 5 6 5 6 6 6 6 7 Audio Fault finding If having problems when using the Dolby E Pass through coding mode then refer to Annex G Audio Modes for information about using this mode Mux Fault finding If there is no output from the ASI connectors check the following 1 The bit rate if it is too low then the video etc is automatically switched off 2 The packet length should be 188 or 204 bytes depending upon configuration Rate Buffer Setting The E5710 E5720 Encoders when running in 4 2 2 mode have two software selectable rate buffer modes small and medium When transmitting 4 2 2 mode into systems using the earlier System 3000 PRO IRD M2 PSR 3 422BAS then the rate buffer mode of the Encoder must be set to small However when operating into an Alteia the rate buffer mode of the Encoder must be set to medium default size When operating in mixed environments both the Alteia and the Encoder must be changed to small buffer mode NOTE Contact Customer Services for advice about changing the settings see Preliminary P ages Table 6 2 Rate Buffer Settings E5710 E5720 Setting Alteia Setting PRO IRD SMALL Alteia only MEDIUM MEDIUM Alteia and PRO IRD SMALL SMALL Field Frame Pictures Some Receivers are unable to decode field pictures Select Fr
144. M TDT Temporal Redundancy Time stamp TOT Transport Stream Transport Stream Packet Header TS TSDT TSP TVCT U Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Glossary Service Information Digital information describing the delivery system content and scheduling timing of broadcast data streams DVB SI data provides information to enable the IRD to automatically demultiplex and decode the various streams of programmes within the multiplex Specified in ISO IEC 13818 1 DVB A burst of ASI bytes either 188 or 204 depending on packet length is contiguously grouped into an MPEG 2 Transport Stream packet Stuffing data is added between the packets to increase the data rate to 270 Mbit s See DVB Document A010 rev 1 Section B3 3 ASI Layer 2 Transport Protocol A plastic card with a built in microprocessor and memory used for identification financial transactions or other authorising data transfer When inserted into a reader data is transferred to and from the host machine or a central computer It is more secure than a magnetic stripe card and it can be disabled if the wrong password is entered too many times As a financial transaction card it can be loaded with digital money and used in the same way as cash until the balance reaches zero The file protocol is specific to its intended application Satellite Mast Antenna Television A distribution system which provides sound an
145. M M2 EOM2 DAT Data Card for 12369 12368 2 1 4 5 3 additional Data M2 EOM2 REMUX Remux Option 12449 10655 2 1 1 supported by Module Encoder software version 2 2 and later 2 EOM2 XLR XLR Expander 12556 12557 Notavailable 1and4 1 Card uses double Slot 2 EOM2 DEC SD Decoder Card 11753 11385 6 1 2 EOM2 QPSK QPSK Demod Card 11852 5 1 DEMOD 2 EOM2 SAT 16QAM Demod 12640 5 1 DEMOD Card 2 EOM2 IP IP Output Card 12794 12822 1 3 5 6 1 NOTE Empty option slots must be fitted with a blanking plate 1 BISS is implemented according to Tech 3290 March 2000 and BISS E is implemented according to Tech 3292 April 2001 BISS E is available from Build version 2 2 0 and later Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page 3 3 Options and Upgrades 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 Page 3 4 Table 3 2 Software Options Marketing Code Name Used Used in 1U in 2U 2 ESO2 NR Noise Reduction Jv y 2 ES02 PU Performance Upgrade Bit rate lt 1 5 Mbit s Jv Jv 2 ESO2NBR VBR Licence Jv Jv 2 ES02 422 4 2 2 Jv Jv 2 ESO2 RAS RAS Remote Authorisation System Jv Jv 2 ESO2 ACON Auto Concatenation Jv Jv 2 ESO2 AC3 Dolby Digital AC 3 Jv Jv 2 ESO2 SM38PSK 8PSK Modulation Jv 2 ESO2 SM316QAM 16QAM Modulation Jv 2 ESO2 8PSKDEMOD 8PSK Demodulation only applicable if M2 EOM2 SAT v DEMOD is fitted 2 ESO2 16QAM 16QAM Demodulation only applicable if v DEMOD M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD is fitted 2 ES
146. MP controller will be allowed access to the Encoder It can be set to 000 000 000 000 to allow any controller access Last SNMP Master Option The Last SNMP Master option is found in the Remote Control Menu This gives the last SNMP Master s IP address It cannot be changed Last SNMP Poll Option The Last SNMP Poll option is found in the Remote Control Menu It cannot be changed SNMP Trap IP Option To access the SNMP Trap IP option press the SNMP Trap IP softkey in the Remote Control Menu If this option is set trap messages will be sent to the specified IP address If this is 000 000 000 000 then trap messages will be sent to the last SNMP master SABus Address Option To access the SABus Address option press the SABus Address softkey in the Remote Control Menu The SABus protocol is multi drop and has an address byte for differentiating between the devices on the SABus the address option Table 4 11 SABus Address Options Selected Option Description Min 49 SAbus address Max 127 Step Size 1 Serial Protocol Option To access the Serial Protocol option press the Serial Protocol softkey in the Remote Control Menu This option enables the type of serial protocol to be set Table 4 12 Serial Protocol Options Selected Option Description RS485 The type of serial protocol used RS232 The type of serial protocol used SABus Baud Rate Option To access the SABus Baud Rate option press the SABus
147. Menu by pressing the IRD softkey The menu controls the internal receiver decoder IRD if it is fitted The IRD consists of the SD Decoder option M2 EOM2 DEC and either of the following demodulator options M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD or M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD IRD Mode Option To access the IRD Mode option press the IRD Mode softkey in the IRD Menu Table 4 132 IRD Mode Options Selected Option Description Independent The IRD operates completely independently from the Encoder Tracking The IRD tracks as far as is possible the modulator settings minimising the amount of set up required to monitor the local modulator output IRD TS Source Option To access the IRD TS Source option press the IRD TS Source softkey in the IRD Menu Table 4 133 IRD TS Source Options Selected Option Description IRD Demod The IRD will decode the transport stream from the demodulator Internal TS The IRD will decode the host Encoder s internal transport stream Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 105 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally IRD Demod Menu I Frequency Available from Build Version 3 1 0 and later Symbol Rate FEC Rate m Polarisation RD Mode Sat Input RD TS Source Modulation m LNB RD Demod If Fitted L LNB Lo Freq Service List LNB Hi F
148. Min 32 Program Map Table Packet Max 8190 1FFEh Identifier PMT PID Step Size 1 Dolby AC 3 Descriptor Option 3 0 and later To access the Dolby AC 3 Descriptor option press the Dolby AC 3 Descriptor softkey in the Service Info Menu This allows a user to specify only the DVB only the ATSC or both the ATSC and DVB descriptors for use with audio streams It is necessary because the ATSC descriptor existed prior to the DVB descriptor and some Decoders e g early Alteias used the AC 3 descriptor for identifying Dolby Digital AC 3 streams Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them NOTE This is only applicable to DVB Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 23 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 7 4 Page 4 24 Table 4 10 Audio AC 3 Descriptor Options Selected Option Description DVB amp ATSC Both the ATSC and DVB descriptors are used with the audio streams DVB only Only the DVB descriptors are used with the audio streams ATSC only Only the ATSC descriptors are used with the audio streams Logical Chan Desc Option To access the Logical Chan Desc option press the Logical Chan Desc softkey in the Service Info Menu This enables the Logical Channel Descriptor to be turned On or Off The information is included in the NIT for Australia mainly Logical Channel Option
149. NB SUPDIY inisiga 4 109 Search Range Option 4 109 BER Threshold Option cccceen 4 109 Status Only Options for the IRD Demod MON i iuiar a 4 110 4 14 5 Service List MENU ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 110 4 14 6 IRD Video Menu cccsesecseeceseseeeeees 4 110 Stop Mode Option cceceseeeeeeeeees 4 110 Aspect Ratio Option ccccsecseeeee 4 110 Video Output Source Option 4 110 525 Line Composite Option 00 4 111 625 Line Composite Option 00 4 111 Rate Buffer Mode Option c ece 4 111 Video Default Output Option 4 111 EDH Enable Option ccceeeeees 4 112 Embedded Audio Mode Option 4 112 Embed Data ID Option 0 ceeeeeee 4 112 Video PID cihisiattcasinnnieinientets 4 112 4 14 7 IRD Audio 1 and Audio 2 Menus 4 113 Audio Stream sececcecsecetseeteseeneeeeees 4 113 Audio Routing Option 4 113 Default Language Option 4 113 ST TM E10076 3 4 15 4 16 4 17 Operating the Equipment Locally Downmix Mode Option ccecceee 4 113 Mute State Option cc cceceeeeeeees 4 114 Audio Output Option cece 4 114 Left Sys Clip Option 00 0 cece 4 114 Right Sys Clip Option sees 4 114 Status Only Options for the IRD Audio MGR sccters teeancan ianitor tarena 4 114 4 14 8 IRD CA MENU c ccccsecsesteseseseseeesnees 4 115 OVOIVIOW eceecesecseseeecseeteeesesesseeeeteetsneeeaees 4 115 DSNG Ke
150. NMP Control softkey in the Advanced Menu Table 4 22 SNMP Control Options Selected Option Description No Reply Initialisation No SNMP reply during initialisation No Lockout Initialisation Reply as modules start to appear Display Contrast Option NOTE When this softkey is pressed the display changes immediately To access the Display Contrast option press the Display Contrast softkey in the Advanced Menu This option allows the contrast ratio of the LCD display to be set The contrast range is Very Light Light Medium Dark Very Dark As the key is pressed the display changes If the background is set to very dark or very light the text may not be visible In this instance view the display at an acute angle this should enable the text to be seen enough to change the contrast No Services Option 3 1 and later To access the No Services option press the No Services softkey in the Advanced Menu There can be up to four services Reset On Download Option To access the Reset On Download option press the Reset On Download softkey in the Advanced Menu the option can be Yes or No If Yes the Encoder automatically reboots following a download keeping the current configuration If No the Encoder keeps working normally Reset Encoder Option To access the Reset Encoder option press the Reset Encoder softkey in the Advanced Menu A confirmation message appears Reset Encoder Are you sure If Yes is sel
151. O2 LSYM Low Symbol Rate operation minimum reduced to 300 ksym s Jv Limitations on Number of Option Modules 2U Only Overview If the Remux option is not fitted then there can be a maximum of three option modules any combination of additional audio and data If the Remux option module is fitted there can be a maximum of two other option modules any combination of additional audio and data E5740 Option Slots Base Board Option Slot 4 Option Slot 5 Option Slot 6 Option Slot 1 Satellite Modulator E5750 Option Slots Base Board Option Slot 4 Option Slot 5 OFDM Modulator Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Limitations on Use of Option Modules Although both BISS M2 EDCOM2 BISS and RAS M2 ESO2 RAS may be present in the Encoder only one may be used at a time How to See Which Options are Fitted Enabled The Encoder has a number of hardware and software options see Table 3 1 and Table 3 2 To see which are fitted enabled refer to the Build Menu see Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Figure 4 9 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 3 2 3 3 Options and Upgrades Bit rate Limits With Reflex Licence and or Performance Upgrade A user with a REFLEX licence M2 ESO2 VBR but no Performance Upgrade M2 ESO2 PU will be able to get lower bit rates than 1 5 Mbit s This only occurs in Seamless modes
152. OTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the Bit Stream Mode option press the Bit Stream Mode softkey in the Audio A Menu This indicates the type of service the bit stream conveys Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 59 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 60 Table 4 55 Bit Stream Mode Options Selected Option Description Complete Main Music amp Effects Visually impaired Hearing impaired Dialogue Commentary Emergency Voice Over Karaoke In Dolby Digital when the coding mode is 1 0 this option appears as Voice Over otherwise as Karaoke Dialogue Level Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the Dialogue Level option press the Dialogue Level softkey in the Audio A Menu The value of the Dialogue Level affects the sound reproduction level and indicates how far the average dialogue level of the encoded program is below digital 100 Table 4 56 Dialogue Level Options Selected Option Description 1 dB to 31 dB Dialogue levels between 1 dB to 31 dB Dolby Srnd Mode Option NOTES 1 This option is shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 or Pass Thru However because the data is not read from the incoming stream Not Indicated will always be displayed 2 This parameter appears in the bit stream on
153. Off L Band Power Option To access the L Band Power option press the L Band Power softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 102 L Band Power Options Valid Input Range Description Min 20 0 dBm Max 5 0 dBm Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 83 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 84 Frequency Option To access the Frequency option press the Frequency softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 103 Frequency Options Valid Input Range Description Min 950 MHz Max 1750 MHz Modulation Option To access the Modulation option press the Modulation softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enable the modulation to be switched On or Off Mod Type Option Refer to Mod Type Option on page 4 79 for details Symbol Rate Option Refer to Symbol Rate Option on page 4 80 for details Exactly the same except that Table 4 93 should only contain 2U values because L Band output is only available in the 2U FEC Rate Option Refer to FEC Rate Option on page 4 80 for details Spectrum Invert Option Refer to Spectrum Invert Option on page 4 80 for details Roll Off Factor Option Refer to Roll Off Factor Option on page 4 80 for details Tx Bandwidth Factor Option Refer to Tx Bandwidth Factor Option on page for details Tx Bandwidth Option The Tx Bandwidth option value cannot be updated It should only be used as an approximate value as it depends o
154. On 188 bytes Ox1FFE 40 Mbit s 43 404255 Mbit s 40 Mbit s Dumb Off 0000000 Not Set Not Set Not Set Not Set Not Set Not Set 25 Hz Off Serial On Freeze Frame Auto 0x2FF Auto 0x1FD Calibrated Not Set Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Module VBI Video Encoder Audio MPEG 2 Parameter Ident Text Ident Text Foreground Colour Ident Text Background Colour Ident Text Translucence Teletext Enable shortcut Teletext PID Min No Teletext Packets field VBI Data on PID VBI Data PID Closed Caption Closed Caption Format VBI in Picture VPS line 16 shortcut WSS line 23 shortcut Auto VITC Detect Profile level Reflex Compression Mode Compression Mode Options Field Frame Encoding Resolution GOP Length GOP Structure Long GOP Copyright Flag Original Flag 3 2 Pulldown Aspect Ratio Bit rate VBR Mode PID NTSC Line Start Frame on Scene Cut Rate Buffer Mode AFD Video Bandwidth Horizontal Filter Closed Caption Parity E4 MX VCM card Auto Concatenation Coding Standard Source 6 dB Gain Silence Timeout Emphasis Language L Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Predefined User Configurations Default Value Ident Mode White Blue Semi translucent On 273 3 On 277 On TANDBERG Off On On Off MP ML Off Standard Fixed and Seaml
155. On Off 3 dB Off 179 ms 384 kbit s Stereo Off Off 48 kHz Year 2000 0 Off 250 ms 64 kbit s 0x121 0x123 0x125 or 0x127 Off 1 Off 200 ms 38400 0x120 0x122 0x124 or 0x126 Off 1 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Predefined User Configurations C 4 Predefined User Configurations The predefined user configurations have the same settings as Table C 2 except for those differences shown in Table C 3 Table C 3 Predefined User Configurations Configuration Number 1 10 Service Name Standard 6 MHz Standard 7 5 MHz Standard 9 MHz Standard 13 5 MHz Standard 18 MHz Very Low Delay 6 MHz Very Low Delay 7 5 MHz Very Low Delay 9 MHz Very Low Delay 13 5 MHz Very Low Delay 18 MHz Variable Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compres
156. Out 1 Specification E5750 Item Specification Safety Status SELV Connector Type BNC Female Connector Designation IF Out 1 Main Output Impedance 75Q Output Power 0 dBm IF Frequency 70 Miz Bandwidth 6 MHz 7 MHz or 8 MHz Modulation QPSK 16QAM or 64QAM Guard Interval 1 32 1 16 1 8 or 1 4 FEC Rate 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 or 7 8 Spectrum sense Normal Inverted Transmission Modes 2k mode or 8k mode Table B 19 OFDM IF Out 2 Specification E5750 Item Specification Safety Status SELV Connector Type BNC Female Connector Designation IF Out 2 Output Impedance 150 Output Power 10 dB relative to IF output 1 B 3 5 ASI Out 1 ASI Out 2 ASI Out 3 Outputs Table B 20 ASI Out Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Connector type BNC 75 Q Connector designation ASI OUT 1 ASI OUT 2 ASI OUT 3 Page B 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification B 4 Control and Monitoring B 4 1 Remote Control Ethernet 1 and 2 Table B 21 Ethernet Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Connector designation ETHERNET 1 and ETHERNET 2 Connector type 8 way RJ 45 socket 10BaseT ISO 882 3 B 4 2 Local Control Local control is by means of the front panel keypad and LCD display B 4 3 Alarm Table B 22 Alarm Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Connector designation ALARM Connector type 9 way D type male Alarm contacts Change over co
157. Protocol for Cloning a File NOTE The clone file is read only and must be deleted or renamed prior to downloading a second clone file on the computer Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 5 11 ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface BLANK Page 5 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents ST TM E10076 3 Chapter 6 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding BK WROTE N 6 3 6 5 4 Video Fault finding ccc 6 9 Fault SYMPtOMS uo eects 6 9 6 2 Preventive Maintenance aserre 6 3 Breaks in Transmission 6 9 6 2 1 Routine Inspection Cooling Fans 6 3 Noise REUCtON cceccccsccccccceccsccssccsesceresecseceeee 6 9 6 2 2 CleaN N n 6 3 6 5 5 Audio Faultfinding vss 6 10 a r insistence 6 3 6 5 6 Mux FaUletindliginciusicdadidinitimaniuis 6 10 RODRCEME POS gg 68 Rate BUEN nnn 510 Checks on Completion of Servicing 6 4 6 7 Field Frame Pictures weenie 6 10 6 3 Maintenance and Support Services oes 6 4 6 8 Power Supply Problems Green LED on Front 6 3 1 IMtrOMUCHION accesses 6 4 Panel Unit ssssssssssstnsnceessasscusessssssnsstonseneesenieeccaiees 6 11 6 3 2 WAANY oeii 6 4 GOL SYMP OMS sisisi 6 11 6 3 3 Levels of Continuing TANDBERG 6 8 2 Power LED Unit 6 11 Television Service SUppont ssssrrsssree 6 4 6 8 3 Fan s Not Working Overheating s s 6 11 6 4 Errors and Diagnostics Menus When to Use 6 9 Disposing of This Equipment cece 6 12 Them
158. S 485 NOTES 1 Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS 232 and RS 485 specification A is positive and B is negative 2 A null modem connection must be used when connecting DTE together 2 6 9 Data RS 232 Connector RS 232 data is available on the Base Board and the option module M2 EOM2 DAT Table 2 11 RS 232 Data Connector Base Board Asynchronous Remote DTE Male Encoder RS 232 DTE Female Signal Name Pin Signal Direction Pin Signal Name 1 1 Not connected Received Data 2 q 2 Received Data Transmit Data 3 3 Transmit Data 4 4 Not connected Signal Ground 5 5 Signal Ground 6 6 Not connected 7 7 Not connected 8 8 Not connected 9 9 Not connected 2 RS 232 data is not supported on the Base Board before Build version 2 0 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 17 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment NOTES 1 Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS 232 specification 2 Remote pin numbers only apply to a 9 way D type connector 3 25 way connectors have Received Data on pin 3 and Transmit Data on pin 2 see RS 232 specification 4 XON OFF flow contro may be used with this port RS 422 Connector 8 1 A 15 way D type female connector 9 r provides an RS 422 synchronous serial ARE eee i communications data input interface 15 9 Table 2 12 RS 422 Data Connector B
159. S MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE REMOVED PLUG IS INSERTED INTO A MAINS OUTLET POWER SUPPLY CORDS SHOULD BE ROUTED SO THAT THEY ARE NOT LIKELY TO BE WALKED ON OR PINCHED BY ITEMS PLACED UPON OR AGAINST THEM PAYING PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO CORDS AT PLUGS CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES AND THE POINT WHERE THEY EXIT FROM THE APPLIANCE The unit is supplied with three detachable mains supply cables fitted with moulded plugs suitable for the USA UK or Europe The wires in the mains cable are coloured in accordance with the wire colour code shown in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Supply Cable Wiring Colours UK EUROPE USA BS 1363 CEE 7 7 NEMA 5 15P Earth Green and yellow Green and yellow Green Neutral Blue Blue White Live Brown Brown Black Protective Earth Technical Earth WARNINGS THIS UNIT MUST BE CORRECTLY EARTHED THROUGH THE MOULDED PLUG SUPPLIED IF THE LOCAL MAINS SUPPLY DOES NOT HAVE AN EARTH CONDUCTOR DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICES FOR ADVICE BEFORE CONNECTING THE UNIT TO THE SUPPLY CHECK THE SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS IN ANNEX B Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 7 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment 2 5 2 5 1 Page 2 8 The unit has a Technical earth terminal marked with located at the rear panel Its use is recommended This is NOT a Protective earth for electric shock protection The terminal is provided to 1 Ensure all equipment chassis fixed
160. Satellite Modulator Menu This allows the spectrum inversion to be turned On or Off Roll Off Factor Option The Roll Off Factor option is to do with the bandwidth of the modulated output and how quickly the output level rolls off with frequency There are two values 25 and 35 Only 35 is allowed for QPSK but both 25 and 35 are available in 8PSK and 16QAM Page 4 80 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Tx Bandwidth Factor Option To access the Tx Bandwidth Factor option press the Tx Bandwidth Factor softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This option is used to calculate the Tx Bandwidth based upon the Symbol Rate Bandwidth Factor x Symbol Rate Table 4 95 Tx Bandwidth Factor Options Valid Input Range Description Min 1 Max 2 Step Size 0 01 Tx Bandwidth Option The Tx Bandwidth option value cannot be updated It should only be used as an approximate value as it depends on the performance of external equipment as well Bit rate 188 Option The Bit rate 188 option value cannot be updated Bit rate 204 Option The Bit rate 204 option value cannot be updated Preset Pwr Low Option To access the Preset Pwr Low option press the Preset Pwr Low softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 96 Preset Pwr Low Options Valid Input Range Description Min 20 0 dBm Max 0 0 dBm Step Size 0 1 dBm Preset Pwr N
161. TANDBERG ST TM E10076 3 _ Issue 3 Television ENGLISH UK INSTRUCTION MANUAL E5714 E5740 xxx DSNG E5715 E5750 DENG Voyager Encoder Build Version 2 1 0 to 3 1 0 and later M2 VOY E5714 M2 VOY E5740 xxx M2 VOY E5715 M2 VOY E5750 and Options evolution 5000 Preliminary Pages ENGLISH UK READ THIS FIRST If you do not understand the contents of this manual DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT Also translation into any EC official language of this manual can be made available at your cost SVENSKA LAS DETTA FORST Om Ni inte f rst r informationen i denna handbok ARBETA DA INTE MED DENNA UTRUSTNING En vers ttning till detta spr k av denna handbok kan ocks anskaffas pa Er bekostnad PORTUGUES LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA Se nao compreende o texto deste manual NAO UTILIZE O EQUIPAMENTO O utilizador poder tamb m obter uma tradu o do manual para o portugu s pr pria custa FRAN AIS AVANT TOUT LISEZ CE QUI SUIT Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel NE FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL En outre nous pouvons vous proposer vos frais une version fran aise de ce manuel DEUTSCH LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verst ndlich sein dann BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GER TE NICHT Eine bersetzung des Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen Berechnung lieferbar ESPA OL LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO
162. TC SMPTE Video Index Off Closed 273 10 Same options as line 10 Caption Nielsen AMOL 1 Nielsen AMOL 11 11 11 Same options as line 10 274 11 Same options as line 10 12 12 Same options as line 10 275 12 Same options as line 10 13 13 Same options as line 10 276 13 Same options as line 10 14 14 Same options as line 10 277 14 Same options as line 10 15 15 Same options as line 10 278 15 Same options as line 10 16 16 Same options as line 10 279 16 Same options as line 10 17 17 Same options as line 10 280 17 Same options as line 10 18 18 Same options as line 10 281 18 Same options as line 10 19 19 Same options as line 10 282 19 Same options as line 10 20 20 Same options as line 10 283 20 Same options as line 10 21 21 Same options as line 10 284 21 Same options as line 10 22 22 Same options as line 10 285 22 Same options as line 10 23 23 ACTIVE VIDEO Start of coded video 286 23 ACTIVE VIDEO Start of coded video 262 262 262 525 263 263 ACTIVE VIDEO Equalising pulses D T xo T c gt 5 2 v ro gt e Ke x 5 3 3 2 2 g 5 oO oO zZ zZ amp o a amp mEn onl NOTES 1 In 525 line systems fields start on the first full line after the end of the picture period Therefore field 1 is 262 lines long and field 2 is 263 lines long 2 An MPEG frame is 480 lines when formatting 525 line format pictures 3 For compatibility with some older Receivers the start of coded video may need to begin at line 22 Contact Custome
163. TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally IF Power Option To access the IF Power option press the IF Power softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 90 IF Power Options Valid Input Range Description Min 20 dBm Max 5 dBm IF Frequency Option To access the IF Frequency option press the IF Frequency softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This setting allows the centre frequency of the IF output to be changed Table 4 91 IF Frequency Options Valid Input Range Description 1U Min 50 MHz Max 90 MHz 2U Min 50 MHz Max 180 MHz Modulation Option To access the Modulation option press the Modulation softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enables the Modulation to be switched On or Off Mod Type Option To access the Mod ulation Type option press the Mod Type softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enables the type of modulation used by the Satellite Modulator to be specified Table 4 92 Modulation Type Options Selected Option Description BPSK Satellite modulator uses BPSK modulation QPSK Satellite Modulator uses QPSK modulation 8PSK Satellite Modulator uses 8PSK modulation 16QAM Satellite Modulator uses 16QAM modulation NOTE BPSK 8PSK and 16QAM are only available in the 2U Encoder The following software options must be purchased to enable the different modulation types M2 ESO2 LSYM for BPSK M2 ESO2 SM38PSK for 8PSK M2 ESO2 SM316QAM for 16QAM Instruct
164. WARNING IF THE ENCODER HAS BEEN SUBJ ECT TO A LIGHTNING STRIKE OR POWER SURGE WHICH HAS STOPPED IT WORKING DISCONNECT THE POWER IMMEDIATELY DO NOT REAPPLY POWER UNTIL IT HAS BEEN CHECKED FOR SAFETY IF IN DOUBT CONTACT TANDBERG TELEVISION CUSTOMER SERVICES Where appropriate ensure this product has an adequate level of lightning protection Alternatively during a lightning storm or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time unplug it from the supply outlet and disconnect the output equipment This prevents damage to the product due to lightning and power line surges 2 1 4 EMC Compliance Statements EN 55022 AS NZS 3548 This equipment is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures 1 The EMC information was correct at the time of manufacture The EMC tests were performed with the Technical earth attached Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 3 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 Page 2 4 FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses
165. XLR XLR Expander Card Option NOTE The M2 EOM2 XLR XLR Expander Card Option is supported by Encoder software version 3 0 and later Table B 36 Analogue and Digital Audio XLR Expander Card Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Item Inputs Safety status Connector designation inputs Connector type Input standard analogue Clip Level Sampling rate Input impedance Input standard digital Termination Sampling Rate Input rate Outputs Safety status Connector designation outputs Connector type Output standard analogue Clip Level Sampling rate Output impedance Output standard digital Output impedance Output rate Specification SELV AUDIO IN L AES EBU AUDIO IN R Three way XLR female Balance analogue 15 dB or 18 dB 48 kHz 600 Q or 20 kQ AES EBU Digital 10 Q Not applicable 32 44 1 48 kHz when using MPEG1 Level 2 or AC 3 see audio section for further details SELV AUDIO OUT L AES EBU AUDIO OUT R Three way XLR male Balance analogue 15 dB or 18 dB FSR Same as digital source rate 10 Q typically AES EBU Digital 10 Q Same as digital source When the unit is not powered the XLR IN L AES EBU audio input defaults to AES EBU with 110 Q termination Page B 23 Technical Specification B 10 5 M2 EOM2 DEC SD Decoder Card Option NOTE The M2 EOM2 DEC SD Decoder Card Option is supported by Encoder
166. a file from this location osd zip from 172 16 197 243 What would you like to do with this file Save this file to disk IV Always ask before opening this type of file Cancel More Info Figure 5 11 Tools OSD Toolkit Video Monitor The Video Monitor see Figure 5 12 displays the video input to the Encoder Tandberg Encoder Picture Monitor P EG Audio Picture Close Window 2002 Tandberg Television Figure 5 12 Tools Video Monitor Option 3 Customer Support has the contact information for Customer Services in various countries throughout the world Option 4 Front Panel is for TANDBERG Television internal use only Option 5 Backplane displays a screen similar to e Figure 5 13 when clicking Backplane Modes The various backplane modes are shown These indicate all the combinations of option modules allowed e Figure 5 14 when clicking Installed Modules The current configuration of installed modules is shown Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 5 9 ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface JJ Backplone Modes Microsolt Internet Explorer i Ge Cdt yew Favorites Joos teb l ee a AEN 2a n G g U 3 m a Favertes Hetory Adkdress herp 172 16 197_242 eqedineackpie ome u 2U Backplane Devices ispGOX160VA 0x10353043 ispLSt2192VE 0x00309043 Mode 1 Version 3 UES 0x01010300 Oxffffffff Slot 1 Streams 1
167. ack to the host thus no alarms are raised by the Encoder The RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input option module comes with an RS 422 synchronous data input and an RS 232 asynchronous data input These inputs have been designed for backward compatibility to existing System 3000 Encoders RS 232 data is input on a dedicated 9 way D type connector and RS 422 data is input on a dedicated 15 way D type connector RS 422 supports n x 64 kbit s up to 2 048 Mbit s or n x 56 kbit s up to 1 792 Mbit s data rates where n up to 32 maximum The RS 232 input can support data baud rates of 1 2 kbaud 19 2 kbaud 3 5 2 Assembly Rear Panel ASYNC SYNC s Ol jC O IO B DAAN Encoder Analogue Composite Video COMEMIDES ASI OUT 1 Output Transport Stream Serial Digital Interface t m sbI IN ASI OUT 2 Output Transport Stream Audio Input AUDIO IN ASI OUT 3 Output Transport Stream RS 232 and RS 422 Data Option RS 232 Asynchronous Data RS 422 Synchronous Data Figure 3 2 RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input Option M2 EOM2 DAT The RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input option module comprises Assembly 12369 and Card 12368 See Table 3 1 for the slots that it can be installed in Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 9 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades Page 3 10 Async Connector A 9 way D type female connector 5 1 provides an RS 232 asynchronous serial communications
168. age changes Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Restore Defaults To access the Restore Defaults option press the Restore Defaults softkey in the Error Masks Menu This sets alarm fail and error messages to the factory defaults Errors Menu Active Errors Error Masks Quit Error Masks Menu Refer to Annex H Error Messages for details of all the error messages Figure 4 21 Menu Hierarchy Error Masks Menu 4 16 Diagnostics Menu See Chapter 6 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding for information about the Diagnostics Menu 4 17 Configs Menu 4 17 1 Accessing the Menu The Configs Menu can be selected from the Summary Screen by pressing the Cfgs softkey or from the Advanced Menu by pressing the Configs softkey 4 17 2 Overview The Encoder has a set of 16 default configurations for both 525 and 625 line standards These configurations provide the basis for quick and easy configuration of the operating parameters for common set ups without having to enter all parameters individually The default configurations can be used as they are or loaded as the active configuration and edited as required Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 119 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 17 3 4 17 4 Page 4 120 The Encoder normally holds the following
169. aie tu iieaneds 3 9 Rear Panelni 3 9 ASYNC CONNECHOT isseire 3 10 SYNC CONNECCION iisivireietiieiinkga an 3 10 3 6 Remux Option M2 EOM2 REMUX ese 3 12 36 1 OVEM W eyini 3 12 3 6 2 ASSOMDIY cece 3 12 Rear Panel sc cticcciscacsteiocsrcan verlalntorten 3 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 3 7 3 8 3 9 Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades DVB ASIIN 1 2 and 3 Connectors 3 13 DVB ASI OUT 1 CONNECHOT cece 3 13 3 6 3 Stages of Remultiplexing oes 3 13 3 6 4 Function of Remultiplexer sssr 3 15 3 6 5 Using the Remultiplexer a cece 3 16 3 6 6 ATSC Remulltiplexing csccssessseen 3 16 3 6 7 Setting Bitrates and Avoiding Overflow 3 16 3 6 8 Whatto do if Overflow Occurs assess 3 17 XLR Expander Card Option M2 EOM2 XLR 3 18 Sell OVEN EW iirinn aiin 3 18 3 7 2 Audio Inputs Receiver eects 3 18 3 7 3 Audio Outputs Transmitter eee 3 18 ZTA ASSEM inina 3 18 Rear Panelideiirisniainiuiiainia 3 18 Audio In CONNECHOT esses 3 19 Audio Out COMNECHOF sess 3 20 SD Decoder Option M2 EOM2 DEC esns 3 21 38 1 OVEIVIEW asndviniiasindndini aortas 3 21 3 8 2 ASSOMDIY ccececeecteteseeteeneiees 3 21 Rear Panel asesir 3 21 ASI OUticiticd athiivisieditidinaeden indica 3 21 SDI Video Qut 3 21 Composite Video Output cece 3 22 Audio OULDUE eects 3 22 RS 232 RS 422 Data Output ssn 3 23 QPSK Demodulator M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD 3 23 3 9 1 ONGIVIOW sssrinin
170. ailable when software option M2 ESO2 422 is purchased Error detection and handling is not currently supported 10 Bit rates lower than 1 5 Mbit s are only available when the software option M2 ESO2 PU is purchased Page 1 8 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Fully exhaustive motion estimation An internal frame synchroniser see Internal Frame Synchroniser on Page 1 10 e Support for Active Format Descriptor AFD see Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 36 e Support for a variety of Group of Pictures GOP structures with a variable number of B frames Built in patented adaptive noise reduction circuitry A logo overlay facility whereby the Encoder is able to overlay broadcasters trademarks logos onto the active video Motion Estimation Fully Exhaustive motion estimation is used It takes a macro block of 16 pixels x 16 pixels and then performs an exhaustive search without subsampling Variable Video Bit rate The MPEG 2 compression algorithm uses adaptive field frame coding forward and backward predictive processing with motion estimation and compensation to reduce the bit rate to the range shown in Table 1 3 Table 1 3 Video Bitrate Range Video Encoding Mode 4 2 0 4 2 28 1 5 Mbit s 15 Mbit s 1 5 Mbit s 50 Mbit s NOTE Minimum bit rate is 0 25 Mbit s when software option M2 ESO2 PU is purchased C
171. al Audio Outputs Transmitter The XLR outputs deliver both analogue or digital AES EBU left channel only When delivering digital audio the output impedance is 110 Q The analogue output is low impedance The analogue transmitter works at 15 dB or 18 dB FSR The audio transmitter may select its source from any of the following e Four AES EBU de embedded feeds from the SDI feed e Two of the AES EBU feeds from the decoder e Loop back e Off The analogue signal is reconstructed based on the sampling rate of the AES EBU signal source Assembly Rear Panel ess we oa 3 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 NOTES Options and Upgrades 1 Pre encoded signals cannot be reconstructed on the analogue outputs 2 Pre encoded signals will raise an alarm on the digital output Balanced Analogue Right XLR Expander Card Option Analogue AES_EBU Left Balanced Analogue AES Analogue Right _EBU Left Balanced Balanced Tx Processor lt Figure 3 7 XLR Expander Card Option M2 EOM2 XLR To Encoder 4x AES_EBU Embedded Decoder x 2 off The XLR Expander Card option comprises Assembly S 12556 and Card S12557 See Table 3 1 for the slots that it can be installed in Audio In Connector Two XLR female connectors provide a stereo pair Each connector carries a single channel of an analogue stereo pair Digital audio is
172. al evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 111 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally EDH Enable Option To access the EDH Enable option press the EDH Enable softkey in the IRD Video Menu This allows the pass through of Error Detection Hierarchy EDH to be either enabled or disabled Table 4 149 EDH Enable Options Selected Option Description True Pass through of EDH is enabled False Pass through of EDH is disabled Embedded Audio Mode Option To access the Embedded Audio Mode option press the Embedded Audio Mode softkey in the IRD Video Menu Table 4 150 Embedded Audio Mode Options Selected Option Description No Audio No audio is embedded in the SDI output Audio 1 Only Audio Channel 1 is embedded in the SDI output Audio 2 Only Audio Channel 2 is embedded in the SDI output Audio 1 amp 2 Audio Channels 1 and 2 are embedded in the SDI output Embed Data ID Option To access the Embed Data ID option press the Embed Data ID softkey in the IRD Video Menu This sets the Data ID that is used for the embedded audio in the SDI output Table 4 151 Embed Data ID Options Selected Option Description Group 1 Audio 1 to 4 DID Ox2FF Group 2 Audio 5 to 8 DID 0x1FD Group 3 Audio 9 to 12 DID 0x1F8 Group 4 Audio 13 to 16 DID 0x2F9 Video PID The PID of the video service currently being decoded is displayed but cannot be changed Page 4 112 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57
173. am Number Option To access the Program Number option press the Program Number softkey in the Service Info Menu This enables the Program Number to be specified In ATSC this is used as the basis of the PMT PID same as Service ID in DVB The information is included in the Program Association Table PAT Program Map Table PMT and VCT NOTE This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control Table 4 4 Program Number Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Program Number Max 65535 Step Size 1 Service Type Option 3 0 and later To access the Service Type option press the Service Type softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the Service Type to be changed PMT PID Option The PMT PID option is found in the Service Info Menu It shows the Program Map Table Packet Identifier and cannot be changed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally DST Start Date Option 3 0 and later To access the DST Start Date Daylight Saving Time option press the DST Start Date softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the Daylight Saving Time Start Date to be changed DST End Date Option 3 0 and later To access the DST End Date Daylight Saving Time option press the DST End Date softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the Daylight Saving Time End Date t
174. ames in the Field Frame Option Does the fault clear If not contact Customer Services 1 4 2 2 is only available when software option M2 ESO2 422 is purchased Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 6 10 ST TM E10076 3 6 8 6 8 1 6 8 2 Step 6 8 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding Power Supply Problems Green LED on Front Panel Unlit Symptoms WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT AS OPENING OR REMOVING COVERS MAY EXPOSE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES OR OTHER HAZARDS REFER ALL SERVICING TO SERVICE PERSONNEL WHO HAVE BEEN AUTHORISED BY TANDBERG TELEVISION Use the following techniques to fault find the Encoder according to the observed symptom s when a power supply failure is suspected Power LED Unlit If the Encoder Power LED is unlit fault find the problem as detailed in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Power LED Unlit Fault finding Action Check the Stand by Switch Is the I at the top Check Power LED Is the Encoder still working Check Power Source Connect a known working piece of equipment to the power source outlet Does it work Check Power Cable and Fuse Unplug the power connector from the Encoder and try itin another piece of equipment Does it work Check PSU Module and Fuse Ensure the power connector is unplugged Remove the fuse from the rear panel connector and inspect it Has the fuse blown If Result of Act
175. aning and maintenance of the equipment which should be performed by an operator There are also some basic fault finding procedures to follow in the event of a suspected Encoder failure Preventive Maintenance Routine Inspection Cooling Fans The fans on the Encoder can be temperature controlled so may not be on if the ambient temperature is low Refer to Annex B Technical Specification Table B 27 for more information NOTE Failure to ensure a free flow of air around the unit may cause overheating This condition is detected by a temperature sensor on the Base Board which causes the alarm relay to be energised Cleaning Unplug the Encoder from the wall outlet before cleaning the exterior with a damp cloth Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners NOTE Only the exterior of the case should be cleaned Servicing Damage Requiring Service WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THIS PRODUCT AS OPENING OR REMOVING COVERS MAY EXPOSE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES OR OTHER HAZARDS REFER ALL SERVICING TO SERVICE PERSONNEL WHO HAVE BEEN AUTHORISED BY TANDBERG TELEVISION Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions 1 When the power supply cord or plug is damaged 2 If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the product 3 If the product has been exposed to rain or water 4 If the product does not operate normally by following the ope
176. annanannananin 6 3 Figure G 2 Digital Audio MOdES sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssee G 3 G 3 Embedded Audio on the SDliccccccccccccccccccesescecscseeseeee G 4 Figure G 3 Embedded Audio and Stereo Pairs vss G 5 G 4 Detail of Encoder Operation cece G 4 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page G 1 Audio Modes BLANK Page G 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Audio Modes G 1 Analogue Audio Figure G 1 shows the coding methods that may be used with the analogue audio input Linear PCM Code to Linear ee MUSICAM Analogue Audio gt pcy ee oid Oe Dolby AC 3 Internal Coding Independent of Encoder Clock Source Figure G 1 Analogue Audio Modes G 2 Digital Audio When a digital audio source is used consideration must be given to the choice of clock source used by the Encoder To ensure correct operation the Encoder and the audio may need to be genlocked Figure G 2 shows the clock source that is appropriate for a given audio coding mode The two main clock sources are internal and external derived from the H SYNC input Dolby E O Pre encoded Dolby AC 3 ii Linear PCM p MUSICAM Internal Coding Digital Audio n Dolby AC 3 Dolby E Oo Pre encoded Dolby AC 3 O or A Audio Port AES EBU LinearPCM O Linear PCM MUSICAM h h Internal ao ON Dolby AC
177. annel Table ATSC 44 45 mm rack height standard Page A 9 Glossary UART UHF Upconvert Uplink UPS UTC VCT VHF VITC VITS VPS WSS WST XILINX Y Luminance Page A 10 Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter A device providing a serial interface for transmitting and receiving data Ultra High Frequency A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum covering 300 MHz to 3000 MHz 3 GHz The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a higher frequency range The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the Earth to the satellite Uninterruptable Power Supply A method of supplying backup power when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes enough to power down the computer in an orderly manner This is particularly important where write back cache is used Write back cache is where modified data intended for the disk is temporarily stored in RAM and can be lost in the event of a power failure Sophisticated systems are tied to electrical generators that can provide power for days UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may provide voltage regulation Universal Time Co ordinate An internationally agreed basis for timekeeping introduced in 1972 and based on international atomic time corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time or GMT Virtual Channel Table ATSC Very Hi
178. are stored permanently in the Encoder where they can be downloaded via the Web Browser Interface Further information is available in Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface These applications must be unzipped and saved to a PC prior to use This requires WinZip to be installed on the PC Using the Web Browser interface see Figure E 1 select Option 2 Tools OSD Toolkit Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page E 3 ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo E Tandberg Encoder Microsoft Internet Explorer x Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Kal e gt 0 AAS amp J Mail Print Edit Back Forward Stop Refresh Home Search Favorites History Address http 172 16 197 175 top htm z Go ll Links TANDBERG TANDBERG Television Television a 3g Table of Contents 1 Build Info o 2 Version Numbers o Ef Release Notes 2 Tools Bandwidth Calculations a 3 OFDM Bitrate calculations a 2 RE calculations o 3 OSD Toolkit Video Monitor 3 Customer Support o 3 Customer Support 4 Front Panel Front Panel Interface 5 Backplane o Backplane Modes o installed Modules 6 Licenced Features eLicenced Features 7 SNMP MIBs o EY SNMP MIB files mib zip hal E Done mj E3 Local intranet Figure E 1 Web Browser Interface The dialogue box see Figure E 2 will be displayed File Download Ed You
179. ars on the front panel display Off Keypress Beep Option To access the Keypress Beep option press the Keypress Beep softkey in the General Menu Table 4 17 Keypress Beep Options Selected Option Description On A beep sounds every time that a key is pressed Off There is silence every time that a key is pressed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 27 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Power Dip Recovery Option To access the Power Dip Recovery option press the Power Dip Recovery softkey in the General Menu Table 4 18 Power Dip Recovery Options Selected Option Description On The outputs are restored following a power dip Off The outputs are not restored following a power dip Upgrade Encoder Option There are a number of features which are not enabled by default Refer to Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades Table 3 1 for details To enable these features access the Upgrade Encoder option and press the Upgrade Encoder softkey in the General Menu This shows the serial number of the box which is in the range of 0 to 65535 Send this number to TANDBERG Customer Services and they will return a software licence key to enter via the front panel to enable the features NOTE These software options must be purchased before the software licence key is sent Software Release Option The software release is shown in the General Menu It cannot be changed Fan
180. ase Board Synchronous Remote DTE Encoder RS 422 DCE Signal Name Signal Direction Pin Signal Name 1 Not connected Transmit Data A 2 Transmit Data A 3 Not connected 4 Not connected 5 Not connected 6 Not connected Transmit Clock A 7 Transmit Clock A Signal Ground 8 Signal Ground Transmit Data B 9 Transmit Data B 10 Not connected 11 Not connected 12 Not connected 13 Not connected Transmit Clock B 14 Transmit Clock B 15 Not connected NOTE Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS 422 specification A is positive and B is negative Page 2 18 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment 2 6 10 Satellite Modulator IF Output E5714 and E5740 IF IF Out Main 75 Q BNC socket provides an IF output Table 2 13 IF Out Connector Main Item Specification Connector type BNC 75 Q Female Type Analogue Connector designation IF OUT MAIN Pin outs Centre IF Output Screen Ground IF Out Monitor 75 Q BNC socket provides an IF output used for gt monitoring Table 2 14 IF Output Connector Monitor Item Specification Connector type BNC 75 Q Female Type Analogue Connector designations IF OUT MONITOR Pin outs Centre IF Output Screen Ground 2 6 11 Satellite Modulator L Band Output E5740 LBAND L Band In 50 Q SMA female connector provides an L band
181. at 4 65 input level left option 4 55 input level r right option 4 56 input monitor 4 12 2U 4 12 input monitor screen 2 21 input source 4 33 input source option 4 33 input termination option 4 35 4 65 field frame pictures option 6 10 inspection firmware release option 4 66 routine 6 3 fixing bracket installation 2 3 fitting 2 5 installing the equipment 2 4 foreign language IP address Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Index 3 ST TM E10076 3 Indexes changing from the front panel menus 2 22 methods of changing 2 21 IP address option 2 22 4 24 ip output card option 3 27 IRD mode option 4 104 IRD ts source option 4 104 K keyboard lock softkeys 4 13 keypan unctions 4 9 how to use 4 14 softkey assignments 4 14 keypress beep option 4 27 L anguage non ISO languages D 2 anguage abbreviations D 1 anguage left option 4 58 anguage option 4 58 anguage right option 4 58 anguage foreign manuals ii ast SNMP master option 4 25 ast SNMP poll option 4 25 band in connector 2 19 band out main connector 2 19 band out monitor connector 2 20 band output option 4 83 band power option 4 83 LEDs alarm 1 16 front panel 1 16 power 1 16 ightning protection 2 3 ip sync video audio delay control 4 29 ip sync offset option 4 57 ithium battery 6 12 oad active config option 4 121 oad configs from backup option 4 121 ocal co
182. ate eccerre 1 12 Dolby Digital AC 3 vss 1 12 1 3 3 Vertical Blanking Interval VBI Line Processing MOdGS c cecseeseeseenterieees 1 13 INTOOUCHON ani niet iadtiincnad ativan 1 13 VB Iin PiCtUrEs 1 13 VBI User Data cee 1 14 VBI IN P Dieii 1 14 Teletext Extraction eccecrrrerrr 1 14 1 3 4 Data Channels ssssecrsersnenss 1 14 135 QUU iui 1 15 1 3 6 IF Modulation oc csesesesesessessrssessnesesenees 1 15 ESA E E 1 15 ESZA O ieira e aS 1 15 5715 65750 nannan 1 15 1 3 7 Control and Monitoring esssserresens 1 15 1 3 8 Options and Upgrades cece 1 15 GUIDED TOUR iacnisoinnenirtiadeaanminiiendne 1 16 1 4 1 EneloSure sesscssesstesesesseseessessrssessrsrssenees 1 16 1 4 2 The User Interface cccscsssesssessersssees 1 16 1 4 3 Front Panel De SCrIPtion c ccseessessesesenees 1 16 Front Panel Display Navigation Keys Softkeys Keyboard eects 1 16 Power Supply Stand by Switch eee 1 17 1 4 4 Rear Panel Description c ccc 1 17 MiO dUCUOM ricessi 1 17 Introduction to the Basic Encoder IU CHASSIS uoua 1 18 2U CHASSIS osccccccccrcrnnnniiennns 1 18 1 4 5 Boards in the Basic Encoder 1 19 List of Figures Figure 1 1 1U Encoder Front View 1 4 Figure 1 2 2U Encoder Front VieW nsssscccrccccccncnenen 1 4 Figure 1 3 Information Label 1 Figure 1 4 Information Label 2 Figure 1 5 Typical DSNG Encoder Configuration 1 6 Figure 1 6 Typical DENG System Configuration s s 1 7 Figure 1 7 1U Encoder Front Panel
183. ate Build Version Comments 1 Dec 2000 2 1 0 2 2 0 E5714 E5740 initial release 2 Sept 2002 2 1 0 3 0 0 Update for 3 0 0 2 Dec 2002 2 1 0 3 1 0 Update for 3 1 0 New option modules added NOTE The Build Version in the table refers to an overall number which encompasses all the various software firmware versions of video audio etc in the Encoder The following manuals are also associated with this equipment e ST TS SNMP E10074 Simple Network Management Protocol e ST TS E10074 Remote Control Protocol e ST AN 1094 Video Noise Reduction and Compression e ST AN 1110 Near Loss less MPEG Concatenation Without Helper Signals e ST AN BW E10074 Variable Bandwidth Feature of E57xx Encoders Nomenclature The terms RS 232 and RS 422 have been superseded by EIA 232 and EIA 422 However because the original names are inscribed on the Encoder the original terms are used in the text of this manual Page iv Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Preliminary Pages Acknowledgements General All best endeavours have been made to acknowledge registered trademarks and trademarks used throughout this manual Any notified omissions will be rectified in the next issue of this manual Some trademarks may be registered in some countries but not in others Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and marked with their respective symbols However they are not marked
184. ating the Equipment Locally Press the Cfgs softkey for quick access to the Pa Config menu This menu provides options for loading and storing predefined configurations and updating and restoring backup configurations 4 17 9 Load Active Config Option To access the Load Active Config option press the Load Active Config softkey in the Config Menu Use the softkeys to select the required configuration to be loaded See Annex C Predefined User Configurations for details of predefined configurations 4 17 10 Store Active Config Option To access the Store Active Config option press the Store Active Config softkey in the Config Menu Use the softkeys to select the position where the configuration is to be stored NOTE There is no confirmation screen the configuration is overwritten immediately the softkey indicating the storage position is selected 4 17 11 Load Configs From Backup Option This option enables the 16 user configurations to be overwritten with the 16 backup configurations To update the backup configurations press the Load Configs from Backup softkey in the Config Menu NOTE The 16 backup configurations are loaded immediately the Load Configs from Backup softkey is pressed although the current Encoder configuration remains unchanged 4 17 12 Store Configs in Backup Option This enables the 16 user configurations to be stored in the backup and may be password protected Press the Store Configs in Bac
185. ayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control Table 4 7 Service Id Options Selected Option Description Min 0 Network identity number Max 65535 Step Size 1 Page 4 22 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Transport Stream Id Option To access the Transport Stream Id option press the Transport Stream Id softkey in the Service Info Menu This enables the Transport Stream Identity to be specified Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them The information is included in the PAT SDT and NIT NOTE This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control Table 4 8 Transport Stream Id Options Selected Option Description Min 0 Transport stream identity Max 65535 number Step Size 1 Service Type Option 3 0 and later To access the Service Type option press the Service Type softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the Service Type to be changed PMT PID Option To access the PMT PID option press the PMT PID softkey in the Service Info Menu This shows the Program Map Table Packet Identifier Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them Table 4 9 PMT PID Options Selected Option Description
186. be locked to an appropriate frequency reference by feeding a Black and Burst signal to the H SYNC input Alternatively the system clock can be locked to the video input In either case the system clock is frequency locked to the source sync pulses and hence the composite video sub carrier is as accurate as the frequency reference Where an accurate reference signal is not available the OCXO in this equipment must be used The OCXO is adjusted to better than 0 2 ppm during manufacture but due to natural ageing of the OCXO regular calibration is required to keep the OXCO within 0 2 ppm if composite video accuracy is to be maintained Calibration intervals depend on the requirements of the particular composite video specification in force Please contact TANDBERG Television Customer Services for advice Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page l 1 ST TM E10076 3 Accuracy of Frequency Sources BLANK Page l 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Annex J Use of Remux Card inASTC Contents J 1 Remux Card In ATSC With Internal PSIP wo J 3 J 2 Remux Card In ATSC With External P SIP s J 3 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page J 1 ST TM E10076 3 Use of Remux Card in ASTC BLANK Page J 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Use of Remux Card in ASTC
187. cation Safety status SELV Connector designation DVB ASI IN 1 DVB ASI IN 2 DVB ASI IN 3 Connector type BNC Connector impedance 75 Q4 Data coding 8B 10B Channel rate 270 Mbit s Specification DVB A010 rev 1 Asynchronous Serial Interface Table B 33 DVB ASI Out 1 Connector Disabled Item Specification Safety status SELV Connector designation DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector type BNC Connector impedance 75 Q4 Data coding 8B 10B Channel rate 270 Mbit s Specification DVB A010 rev 1 Asynchronous Serial Interface LEDs Table B 34 DVB ASI In 1 2 and 3 LED Indications Item Specification Red LED Input ASI lock On No lock on ASI 8B 10B coding Off Input ASI lock OK Green LED Packet size Off Not locked to MPEG packets Flash 1 3 mark space 188 byte packets Flash 3 1 mark space 204 byte packets 475 Q terminator must be fitted when this interface is not in use 5 Byte mode and single packet burst mode only Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page B 21 Technical Specification Table B 35 DVB ASI Out 1 LED Indications Item Specification Red LED On Output disabled Off Output enabled Green LED Off Output not in use Flash 1 3 mark space 188 byte packets output Flash 3 1 mark space 204 byte packets output Page B 22 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification B 10 4 M2 EOM2
188. ce Details how to access and use the Web Browser Interface for a range of diagnostic and other utilities Chapter 6 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding Details routine maintenance tasks to be performed by the operator and provides general servicing advice and fault finding information Provides information regarding warranty and maintenance available from Customer Services Gives relevant disposal information Annex A Glossary Annex B Technical Specification Annex C Predefined User Configurations Annex D Language Abbreviations Annex E Creating and Downloading a Logo Annex F Band Plans Annex G Audio Modes Annex H Error Messages Annex l Accuracy of Frequency Sources Annex J Use of Remux Card in ATSC Annex K EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders Indexes Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page iii ST TM E10076 3 Preliminary Pages About this Manual This manual provides instructions and information for the installation operation of the Encoder This manual should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life of the equipment It is not intended that this manual will be amended by the issue of individual pages Any revision will be by a complete reissue Further copies of this manual can be ordered from the address shown on page viii If passing the equipment to a third party also pass the relevant documentation Issues of this manual are listed below Issue D
189. ceccccececseseeseeeeseeees 4 84 Symbol Rate Option eee 4 84 FEC Rate Option cccceesesseeteeeeeees 4 84 Spectrum Invert Option cceeeceeee 4 84 Roll Off Factor Option cecceeeee 4 84 Tx Bandwidth Factor Option 4 84 Tx Bandwidth Option cccececeeeeees 4 84 Bit rate 188 Option cece 4 84 Bit rate 204 Option scene 4 84 Preset Pwr Low Option cccseeeeee 4 84 Preset Pwr Norm Option ccceeeee 4 85 Upconverter POWE c ecccceeeesseeeeees 4 85 Sat Deliv Freq Option c ccececeee 4 85 Sat Orb Pos Option ccceeeceeeeeeeees 4 85 Sat West East Option cececececeeees 4 85 Polarisation Option c ccccceeeeeeees 4 85 Status Only Options for the Satellite Modulator Menu c escsceccseesesteseseeeeteeees 4 85 4 11 10 Output Format OFDM Modulator 3 1 ANd later ss ass iaiaaeaia 4 85 Output OPON it useversiaivavasnnidanwal 4 85 Bandwidth Option cccceeeeeeeseeees 4 86 Modulation Mode Option ceccece 4 86 Guard Interval Option ccceeecee 4 86 FEC Rate Option ccccececeseeseeeees 4 86 Transmission Option ccsececeeceeees 4 87 Spectral Pol Option ccceeceeeeeeseeees 4 87 Centre Frequency Option cscs 4 87 IF Output Frequency esses 4 87 Bitrate 188 iscscccccacsascsciasseiscacsavscvassasessaves 4 87 Bit rate 204 oo ececccessecessesseessseeseetsseeeens 4 87 OF
190. cessing in the digital domain Random Access Memory A volatile storage device for digital data Data may be written to or read from the device as often as required When power is removed the data it contains is lost Remote Authorization System A TANDBERG TV proprietary public key encryption system used to prevent unauthorized viewing of a TV programme or programmes Radio Frequency Read Only Memory A non volatile storage device for digital data Data has been stored permanently in this device No further information may be stored written there and the data it holds cannot be erased Data may be read as often as required Reed Solomon coding An error detection and correction coding system 16 bytes of Reed Solomon Forward Error Correction code are appended to the packet before transmission bringing the packet length to 204 bytes The 16 bytes are used at the receiving end to correct any errors Up to eight corrupted bytes can be corrected Run Length Coding Minimisation of the length of a bit stream by replacing repeated characters with an instruction of the form repeat character x y times Single Channel Per Carrier A process in digital transmission used to combine a digital signal with a pseudo random sequence producing a randomised digital signal that conveys the original information in a form optimised for a broadcast channel Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent unauthorised
191. coder Settings for PAL NTSC Video Performance Figures The Encoder settings for the PAL NTSC video performance figures are shown in Table B 4 NOTE The PAL and NTSC video performance figures are measured when the Encoder is connected to a calibrated Receiver Table B 4 Encoder Settings for PAL NTSC Video Performance Figures Item Specification Noise reduction Off Video bit rate 8 Mbit s Resolution 720 x 576 GOP IBBP Profile 422P ML Packet length 188 Mux Bit rate 40 Mbit s PAL Video Performance Figures Table B 5 PAL System Video Performance Figures Pattern VITS Line 17 VITS Line 17 VITS Line 17 VITS Line 17 Item Input return loss Bar amplitude ref bp Jitter Luminance bar tilt 2T pulse K rating Specification 30 dB 700 mV 7 mV 5 ns pk pk 0 2 1 0 KF Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Pattern VITS Line 17 VITS line 17 VITS Line 17 VITS Line 17 100 Luma Ramp 5 step staircase modulated 5 step staircase modulated 5 step staircase no modulation Flat field Red 75 Multiburst VITS line 18 Item Pulse bar K rating P B ratio Chrom lum delay Chrom lum gain Luma noise weighted Filters tilt null unified weighting 5 MHz LPF Fsc trap 100 kHz HP Differential gain Differential phase Luma non linearity Chroma noise AM Chroma noise PM Filters HPF 10 kHz LPF 500 kHz Reference
192. configurations e One Active Configuration it runs the Encoder Sixteen User configurations in the User FLASH Sixteen Backup configurations in Backup FLASH Sixteen 525 factory default configurations Sixteen 625 factory default configurations Config editing takes place here Active Config User Editable Config x1 Load Active Config Store Active Config Load Factory Store Configs Password required here 525 Defaults in Backup Factory 525 Defaults x16 User FLASH Backup FLASH User Configs Backup Configs x16 x16 Factory 625 Defaults x16 A Load Factory Load Configs 625 Defaults t from Backup Any or all Configs can be Password Write protected Figure 4 22 Configuration Graphical Explanation Active Configuration This is the configuration that the Encoder is currently using It is loaded from one of the 16 user configuration locations Load Active Config It can be edited at any time and also stored back as one of the user configurations Store Active Config User Configurations Configurations loaded into the user FLASH become user configurations Any one of the user configurations can be loaded as an active configuration Load Active Config A modified active configuration can be copied back into one of the user FLASH locations Store Active Config where it can be password write protected A user configuration that is write protected cannot be overwritten The 16 user configurations can be sa
193. cording to the protocol stack shown in Figure 3 8 MPEG 2 Transport Stream Figure 3 8 IP Output Protocol Stack Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 25 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 11 2 Page 3 26 Between one and seven MPEG 2 transport stream packets can be put in each UDP packet The data link layer is Ethernet according to IEEE 802 3 802 3u auto sensing 10 100 Mbit s twisted pair via RJ 45 connector Assembly Rear Panel ASI In A 75 Qf le BNC t id ASI input O emale connector provides an inpu w NOTE This connector is not used Table 3 21 ASI In Connector Item Specification Connector Type 75 Q BNC Female Connector designation ASI IN Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground RS 232 Control A 3 5mm socket provides a debug interface NOTE This connector is for TANDBERG Television use only Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 3 12 3 12 1 3 12 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ASI Out A 75 female BNC connector provides an ASI output NOTE This connector is not used Table 3 22 ASI Out Connector Item Connector Type Connector designation Pin outs Ethernet Output An RJ 45 connector provides a 10 100 BaseT Centre Screen Ethernet port Table 3 23 RJ 45 Connector Item Connector Type Connector des
194. covers most of the abbreviations acronyms and terms as used in TANDBERG Television Limited Manuals All terms may not be included in this manual um Micrometre former name micron a unit of length equal to one millionth 108 of a metre 3 2 pulldown A technique used when converting film material which operates at 24 pictures per second to 525 line video operating at 30 pictures per second 4 2 0 Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate 4 2 2 Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on all lines at half the luminance rate 422P ML 422 Profile at Main Level A subset of the MPEG 2 standard which supports digital video storage DVD etc and transmissions up to 50 Mbit s over various mediums Used for Contribution and Distribution applications 5B6B 5 Binary Bits Encoded to 6 Binary Bits Block code AC 3 Audio Coding algorithm number 3 See Dolby Digital ACC Authorisation Control Computer ADPCM Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation An advanced PCM technique that reduces the bit rate by coding the difference values between successive samples rather than the absolute value of each sample ADT Audio Data And Teletext AFC Automatic Frequency Control AFS Automation File Server AGC Automatic Gain Control AMOL land Il Automatic Measure of Line ups and Il Used by automated equipment to measure programm
195. crambled Outputs are on and transport stream being Service mane scrambled with selected CA standard 188 or 204 byte transport Output transport stream bit rate at Video source selected packet output mode whichever packet length has been selected Figure 4 1 1U Summary Screen Navigating the Display Screens 1U Introduction The menu items on the display are selected and amended by one of the four navigation keys shown as left right up and down arrows and Enter and Cancel buttons see Figure 4 2 Most of the screens displayed in this manual are for the 2U Encoder and are accessed in a different way see Section 4 5 Navigating the Display Screens 2U but the menu options are the same for both the 1U and 2U Encoders The function of the navigation keys depends where you are in the menu structure See the following sections for details Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 9 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 3 2 4 3 3 Page 4 10 ENTER button CANCEL Navigation keys button Figure 4 2 1U Navigation Keys and Buttons NOTE The navigation keys are referred to as LEFT RIGHT UP and DOWN indicating the direction of the arrows From the Summary Screen select the Main Menu by pressing ENTER RIGHT UP or DOWN Return to the Summary Screen from the Main Menu by pressing LEFT The top line of the display shows the menu name and path currently
196. crambled using the fixed second RAS key assigned by TANDBERG TV and preprogrammed into the Encoder RAS EBU Key Encoder output is scrambled using the fixed RAS key assigned to the EBU and preprogrammed into the Encoder RAS1 SNG Key Encoder output is scrambled Scrambling key used is entered using the SNG Key RAS 1 option NOTE RAS Fixed Keys and the EBU Key are only programmed into the Encoder if requested when the units are ordered SNG Key RAS1 Option To access the SNG Key RAS1 option press the SNG Key RAS1 softkey in the Mux Menu This enables the scrambling key used in SNG Key scrambling mode to be set see the Scramble option The same scrambling code must be used at the receive end to unscramble the transmission 12 BISS is implemented according to EBU Tech 3292 May 2002 Page 4 94 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Enter up to seven digits using the keypad then press the Enter softkey to accept the scrambling code If less then seven digits are entered they are prefixed with 0 s zero to give a seven digit code 4 12 14 BISS Options Enabled Overview BISS Mode 1 uses a fixed scrambling key known as the Session Word to encrypt the transport stream The same Session Word must be entered in the Receivers and the Encoder to enable the transport stream to be decrypted BISS E adds an extra layer of security as a
197. crccccnrcrerecn E 8 E 5 5 Saving the osd File eceseeeeeeeneen E 8 E 6 Downloading a Logo Using OSD Loader E 9 E 7 Using the OSD Loader eee E 9 Ei Pel SOU eaa a E 9 E 7 2 Download an 0Sd File cccsssssessesesenees E 10 E 7 3 Show and Hide Regions serene E 12 E 7 4 Multiple REGIONS v ssscsscesesssessneeeseees E 12 E 7 5 Region Interference sssr E 12 E 8 Fault finding sssrinin E 13 List of Tables Table E 1 Resolution Modes seestessstessstessstessteesstessneessteessaess E 10 List of Figures Figure E 1 Web Browser IntefaCe sessseccnnnsssnnnrrrn E 4 Figure E 2 File Download Dialogue BOX E 4 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page E 1 Creating and Downloading a Logo BLANK Page E 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo E 1 Introduction The Encoder includes a logo overlay facility whereby an image can be overlaid onto the active video prior to encoding This enables broadcasters to trademark or brand their material with a logo To overlay the material with a logo the logo must first be downloaded into the equipment using the Ethernet TFTP protocol Once this has been done the logo can be enabled or disabled Contact TANDBERG Television for further details E 2 Summary of Features Up to 13 logos can be overlaid onto the active video The space each logo occupies is referred to as a region
198. cription Min 0 MHz Max 4294 967295 MHz I F Output Frequency The IF output frequency is fixed at 70 MHz Bit rate 188 The Bit rate 188 option value cannot be updated Bit rate 204 The Bit rate 204 option value cannot be updated OFDM S W Release The OFDM S W Release value cannot be updated It is the version of the software and firmware loaded on the OFDM modulator Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 87 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 11 11 Output Format IP Streamer 3 1 and later Page 4 88 Own IP Address Option To access the Own IP Address option press the Own IP Address softkey in the IP Streamer Menu This is the local IP address associated with the 100 Mbit s Ethernet video output interface Network Mask Option To access the Network Mask option press the Network Mask softkey in the IP Streamer Menu This is the network mask setting corresponding to the Own IP address Router IP Address Option To access the Router IP Address option press the Router IP Address softkey in the IP Streamer Menu If the Destination IP Address setting indicates an IP address not residing on the local net segment the video traffic is forwarded to this gateway Destination I P Address Option To access the Destination IP Address option press the Destination IP Address softkey in the IP Streamer Menu This is the IP address to which the v
199. cseceeeeeesteeees 4 78 Polarisation Option c ccccceseeeeees 4 78 4 11 8 Output Format Satellite Modulator IF QUIDUL DOTO 4 78 IF Output OptONsasscasiccdnieteiaie asec 4 78 IF Power Option cccceceseeseeeeteeeeeees 4 79 IF Frequency Option s s s 4 79 Modulation Option scccceeeeeeeees 4 79 Mod Type Option cceccccececseseeeeeseeees 4 79 Symbol Rate Option ccc 4 80 FEC Rate Option ccccececeeeesteereeees 4 80 Spectrum Invert Option cceeeeee 4 80 Roll Off Factor Option s es 4 80 Tx Bandwidth Factor Option 4 81 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 11 9 Tx Bandwidth Option cceeceeeeeees 4 81 Bit rate 188 Option cesses 4 81 Bit rate 204 Option scenester 4 81 Preset Pwr Low Option ceceeeeeee 4 81 Preset Pwr Norm Option ccceeeee 4 81 Sat Deliv Freq Option ccccceceee 4 82 Sat Orb Pos Option ccceeeeeeeseeeeees 4 82 Sat West East Option cccecececeeseees 4 82 Polarisation Option cc ceccseeeeeeeeees 4 83 Status Only Options for the Satellite Modulator Menu c eccccecseeseseseeseeesteeees 4 83 Output Format Satellite Modulator L Band Output 3 1 and later eee 4 83 L Band Output Option 0 0 0 eee 4 83 L Band Power Option cccscseeeeees 4 83 Frequency Option ccceeeeeeeeeeees 4 84 Modulation Option cccccseseeeeeees 4 84 Mod Type Option
200. ct click the Abort button and enter the IP address of the target Encoder This can be found on the Encoder front panel by selecting Setup System Remote Control To test the connection click the Remove All button you will be prompted for confirmation Remove all OSD Regions Yes No The communications box at the top of the screen should read Transfer Completed OK Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page E 9 Creating and Downloading a Logo ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo The Resolution Mode must be set to match the video resolution being used This adjusts the preview screen to the dimensions of the active video Table E 1 Resolution Modes Resolution Mode Video Standard 576 Standard Definition 625 line 480 Standard Definition 525 line 480p Not Supported 576p Not Supported 720p Not Supported 1080i Not Supported E 7 2 Download an osd File Choose an On screen Display file with the Choose File button You will be prompted for a file with an osd extension The image will be displayed in the OSD File box Position the image on the screen by dragging the white cursor box around the main placement window The position can also be adjusted by editing the co ordinates boxes A logo can be overlaid anywhere in the digital active picture When a logo is positioned in the main placement window the co ordinates are shown for the top left corner of the lo
201. ct frame rate EDH Full Field Error A full field CRC error was detected in the SDI data EDH Full Field Unknown Error EDH Full Field Error Already The status of the full field flags is not known as the SDI stream is received from a transmitter that does not support EDH A full field CRC error was detected in the SDI link upstream of the Encoder EDH Picture Error A active picture CRC error was detected in the SDI data EDH Picture Error Unknown Err Check the source of the SDI data and any equipment in the signal path between the source and the Encoder and all related cables and connectors If the source or any intervening The status of the active picture flags is not known as the SDI stream is received from a transmitter that does not support EDH EDH Picture Error Already devices do not support EDH then these messages do not indicate a fault with the Encoder Try to verify An active picture CRC error was detected in the SDI link upstream of the Encoder EDH Anc Data Error the link with another Receiver If the link is verified as OK then call Service Engineer A ancillary data CRC error was detected in the SDI data EDH Anc Data Unknown Error The status of the ancillary data flags is not known as the SDI stream is received from a transmitter that does not support EDH EDH Anc Data Error Already An ancillary data CRC error was detected in the SDI link
202. ct Customer Services for details M2 ESO2 SM316QAM This purchasable option allows the E5740 to provide 16QAM modulation Contact Customer Services for details 3 12 10 M2 ESO2 8PSKDEMOD This purchasable option allows an E5740 fitted with M2 EOM2 DEC SD decoder and M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD demodulator to receive 8PSK modulated signals Contact Customer Services for details 3 12 11 M2 ESO2 16QAMDEMOD This purchasable option allows an E5740 fitted with M2 EOM2 DEC SD decoder and M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD demodulator to receive 16QAM modulated signals Contact Customer Services for details 3 12 12 M2 ESO2 LSYM Page 3 28 This purchasable option allows an E5740 and an M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD if fitted to work at low symbol rates 300 ksym s minimum Contact Customer Services for details Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 47 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder IMtrOGUCTION oo eeeeseesteeseeteseeneeeeseeneeeeateneetsateteateneeees 4 9 Establishing Local Control 1U 4 9 Navigating the Display Screens 1U eee 4 9 A1 Introductie 4 9 4 3 2 Navigating the Menus 1U 4 10 4 3 3 Changing a Setting 1U oes 4 10 OVGIVIOW snaa a 4 10 For Multiple Choice Entry 4 11 For Text or Numeric Entry ossee 4 11 4 3 4 A udio V ideo Menu 1U 4 11 Establishing Local Control 2U 4 12 4 4 1 I
203. cture that is coded using motion compensated prediction from previous or P frames forward prediction and or future or P frames backward prediction B frames are not used in any prediction Binary Phase Shift Keying A data modulation technique A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow Bandwidth The transmission capacity of an electronic line such as among others a communications network computer bus or broadcast link It is expressed in bits per second bytes per second or in Hertz cycles per second When expressed in Hertz the frequency may be a greater number than the actual bits per second because the bandwidth is the difference between the lowest and highest frequencies transmitted High bandwidth allows fast transmission or high volume transmission Each byte is delivered separately in the ASI Transport Stream with stuffing data added between the Bytes to increase the data rate to 270 Mbit s See DVB Document A010 rev 1 Section B3 3 ASI Layer 2 Transport Protocol Conditional Access The technology used to control the access to viewing services to authorised subscribers through the transmission of encrypted signals and the programmable regulation of their decryption by a system such as viewing cards Conditional Access Table Part of the MPEG 2 Program Specific Information PSI data Mandatory for MPEG 2 compliance if CA is in use The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum which spans the freq
204. d rotate it to the right until it locates in the detents the connection is now complete Check that the dc power connections are of sufficient capacity for the current required by the Encoder Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 9 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment WARNING THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE SHOULD BE ROUTED SO THAT IT IS NOT LIKELY TO BE DAMAGED OR TRAPPED BY ITEMS PLACED UPON OR AGAINST IT PAYING PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE CABLE AT CONNECTION POINTS DC Power Connector Encoder The wires in the dc power cable are coloured in accordance with the wire colour code shown in Table 2 2 Table 2 2 DC Input Connector and Cable details Plug Socket Wire Colour Voltage Condition Jaeger C type 1 Pin 1 Green Y ellow or Green Earth Vehicle frame Pin 2 Brown or Red W Pin 3 Blue or Black V 2 6 Signal Connections For the Basic Unit 2 6 1 Introduction All signal connectors are located at the rear panel of the Encoder For a detailed interface specification see Annex B Technical Specification Always use the specified cables supplied for signal integrity and compliance with EMC requirements see Annex B Technical Specification IF OutMain IF Out Monitor fy Ce x y Base Board t 7 VEN Ke e Oy Technical Earth Alam RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 Ethernet ASI Outputs SDIIn H Sync Composite Audio In and Data Data RS 485 Video Audio Control Reference Out
205. d colour a contrast to the text otherwise the text will not be seen Table 4 27 Background Colour Options Available Options White Blue Magenta Yellow Green Pink Video Bandwidth Option NOTE This option is available in Build version 2 1 0 and later The Video Bandwidth Option controls the filtering of the video before it is compressed Reducing the bandwidth requires slightly less bits in the compressed bit stream Refer to ST AN BW E10074 for more information Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally To access the Video Bandwidth option press the Video Bandwidth softkey from the Video Source Menu Table 4 28 Video Bandwidth Options Selected Option Description Sharp Filter is at the maximum bandwidth possible for the resolution selected Medium Slightly reduced bandwidth Soft Reduced a little further Auto Slightly reduced bandwidth OP Video Loss Option This option gives the choice of what is displayed on the television screen in the event of losing video input To access the OP Video Loss option press the OP Video Loss softkey from the Video Source Menu Table 4 29 OP Video Loss Options Selected Option Description Freeze Frame The last video frame received is encoded if the video input is lost Black A black screen is encoded if the video input is lost Bars amp Red Bars and red test pattern is encoded if the video input is l
206. d program files have to be attached FTP is designed to handle binary files directly and does not add the overhead of encoding and decoding the data The ITU T standard which defines the physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Group of Pictures MPEG video compression works more effectively by processing a number of video frames as a block The TANDBERG Television Encoder normally uses a 12 frame GOP every twelfth frame is an frame Graphical User Interface The use of pictures rather than just words to represent the input and output of a program A program with a GUI runs under a windowing system and has a screen interface capable of displaying graphics in the form of icons drop down menus and a movable pointer The on screen information is usually controlled manipulated by a mouse or keyboard High Definition Television High Power Amplifier Used in the signal path to amplify the modulated and up converted broadcast signal for feeding to the uplink antenna Horizontal line SYNCs A device in a multipoint network at which branch nodes interconnect Integrated Conditional Access Module Embedded in the IRD and responsible for descrambling plus packet filtering and reception It also contains the physical interface to the subscriber s viewing card International Electrotechnical Committee Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 IF Interframe Co
207. d television signals to the households of a building or group of buildings typically used to refer to an apartment block Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers Subscriber Management System A system which handles the maintenance billing control and general supervision of subscribers to conditional access technology viewing services provided through cable and satellite broadcasting An SMS can be an automatic e g Syntellect system where subscribers order entitlements by entering information via a telephone Alternatively an SMS can be a manual system which requires subscribers to speak with an operator who then manually enters their entitlement requests Some systems support multiple SMSs Satellite News Gathering Simple Network Management Protocol Information repetition due to areas of similar luminance and or chrominance characteristics within a single frame Removed using DCT and Quantisation Intra Frame Coding Synchronous Parallel Interface Data tables are used to assign fewer bits to the most commonly occurring events thereby reducing the overall bit rate Removed using Run Length Coding and Variable Length Coding Transparent Asynchronous Tx Rx Interface A proprietary high speed data interface Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A set of communications protocols that may be used to connect different types of computers over networks Time Division Multiplex One common communications chan
208. data input interface Table 3 5 RS 232 Data Connector Option Module Asynchronous 9 6 Remote DTE Male Data Module RS 232 DCE Female Signal Name Pin Signal Direction Pin Signal Name Data Carrier Detected 1 _ 1 Data Carrier Detected Received Data 2 2 Received Data Transmit Data 3 oO 3 Transmit Data 4 4 Not connected Signal Ground 5 5 Signal Ground Data Set Ready DSR 6 6 Data Set Ready DSR 7 7 Not connected Clear to Send CTS 8 lt _____ 8 Clear to Send CTS 9 9 Not connected NOTES 1 Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS 232 specification 2 Remote pin numbers only apply to a 9 way D type connector 3 25 way connectors have Received Data on pin 3 and Transmit Data on pin 2 see RS 232 specification 4 XON OFF flow contro may be used with this port Sync Connector 8 1 A 15 way D type female connector r 2 provides an RS 422 synchronous serial am ie communications data input interface 15 9 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades Table 3 6 RS 422 Data Connector Option Module Synchronous Remote DTE Signal Name Signal Direction Data Module RS 422 DCE Pin Signal Name Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 1 Not connected Transmit Data A _ 2 Transmit Data A Data T
209. dded manually with a brush or by using a key file Adding Transparency Manually The background colour within Osd Creator can be changed with the black red green and blue buttons on the toolbar This changes the background colour of the editor window on which the logo is overlaid and not the logo itself which remains unaffected This facility is useful to show the transparency of different colours It is best to start with a background colour that contrasts sharply with the whole of the source image Using the options immediately below the toolbar the mouse pointer can be used as a brush to add transparency to an area The left mouse button will apply the transparency value set for the LButton Mix and the right mouse button will apply the transparency value set for the RbuttonMix At start up these are set so LButton Mix is 0 to make an area transparent and RButton Mix is 255 to make it opaque Different mix levels can be entered for intermediate levels of transparency Selecting a brush size from the drop down list determines the size of the area that is changed If the Changes Affect Palette box is checked changing the transparency of a pixel on the image also changes the palette entry on which the pixel is based and all the pixels that share that palette entry If the inactive area is mainly one colour check the Changes Affect Palette box and left click in the inactive area All pixels of that colour should become background c
210. define the colour and brightness of each picture element pixel on a TV line See Chrominance Cyclic Redundancy Check A mathematical algorithm that computes a numerical value based on the bits in a block of data This number is transmitted with the data and the receiver uses this information and the same algorithm to ensure the accurate delivery of data by comparing the results of algorithm and the number received If a mismatch occurs an error in transmission is presumed Cable Virtual Channel Table ATSC Decibels A ratio of one quantity to another using logarithmic scales to give results related to human aural or visual perception dB is a ratio whereas dBm for example is an absolute value quoted as a ratio to a fixed point of 0 dBm 0 dBm is 1 mW at 1 kHz terminated in 6000 0 dBmV is 1 mV terminated in 75Q Data Communications Equipment Typically a modem It establishes maintains and terminates a session on a network but in itself is not the source originator or destination end receiving unit of signals e g a computer see DTE A DCE device may also convert signals to comply with the transmission path network format Discrete Cosine Transform A technique for expressing a waveform as a weighted sum of cosines Raw video data is not readily compressible DCT is not in itself a compression technique but is used to process the video data so that it is compressible by an encoder DCT processes the picture on an 8x8 pixel block bas
211. ding Intraframe Coding l picture I frame ST TM E10076 3 Glossary Intermediate Frequency Usually refers to the 70 MHz or 140 MHz output of the Modulator in cable satellite and terrestrial transmission applications Compression coding involving consecutive frames When consecutive frames are compared temporal redundancy is used to remove common elements information and arrive at difference information MPEG 2 uses B and P frames but since they are individually incomplete and relate to other adjacent frames they cannot be edited independently Compression coding involving a single frame Redundant information is removed on a per frame basis All other frames are ignored Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses information only from that macroblock or picture Exploits spatial redundancy by using DCT to produce frames these are independent frames and can be edited Internet Protocol The IP part of TCP IP IP implements the network layer layer 3 of the protocol which contains a network address and is used to route a message to a different network or sub network IP accepts packets from the layer 4 transport protocol TCP or UDP adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data link protocol It may also break the packet into fragments to support the Maximum Transmission Transfer Unit MTU of the network Intracoded Picture Frame A picture frame which is coded using purely intracoding with referenc
212. disable automatic configuration T Use automatic configuration script Eddiess m Proxy server M Use a proxy server Address webgate Port feo Advanced IV Bypass proxy server for local addresses Advanced Cancel Figure 5 4 Local Area Network LAN Settings Dialog Box 7 Click Advanced to open the Proxy Settings dialog box see Figure 5 5 Proxy Settings 21x Servers Type Proxy address to use Port HUIF webgate feo Secure webgate 180 EIE webgate h feo Gopher webgate 180 Socks ee eg MV Use the same proxy server for all protocols r Exceptions SA Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with Type the IP address of the Encoder Figure 5 5 Proxy Settings Dialog Box Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 5 5 ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface 5 3 Page 5 6 8 In the Exceptions area type the IP address of the Encoder 9 Click OK as many times as necessary to close all dialog boxes until only the Internet Explorer window is open For Internet Explorer version 4 the same selections must be made but the process starts from the View menu Once Explorer has been set up type the IP address of the Encoder to be accessed in the address bar e g http 172 16 197 245 press Return and a connection is established After a few seconds a welcome screen appears followed by a window a
213. dual needs Courses can be run either at your premises or at one of our dedicated training facilities Where to Find Us For further information on TANDBERG Television s training programme please contact us International Telephone 44 23 8048 4229 International Facsimile 44 23 8048 4467 E mail Address training tandbergtv com Internet Address http www tandbergtv com Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address Tandberg Television Unit 2 Strategic Park Comines Way Hedge End Southampton Hampshire S030 4DA United Kingdom Return of Equipment If you need to return equipment for repair please contact the Customer Services Helpdesk on 44 0 23 8048 4455 A Returns Authorisation Number RAN will be issued and full details of the unit will be logged Please ensure the RAN number is clearly marked on the packaging of the unit The unit should then be sent to the following address Tandberg Television Customer Services Unit 1 Strategic Park Comines Way Hedge End Southampton Hampshire S030 4DA United Kingdom Technical Publications If you need to contact TANDBERG Television Technical Publications regarding this publication e mail techpubs tandbergtv com Page viii Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents 1 1 1 2 1 3 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Scope of this MANUAL eects essences
214. due to network transfer rates and image processing e lf the download completes but the OSD image does not appear on video the image may be too near the edge of the screen try moving it towards the centre Make sure the correct line standard is selected e Make sure the image is visible on a typical domestic television Make a note of the co ordinates where the image is required e If precise timing is required Download the image in advance with Auto Show off then click Show when display is required e To move the current Region reposition the white cursor check that the OSD File box has the correct image and click Download Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page E 13 ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo BLANK Page E 14 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents ST TM E10076 3 Annex F Band Plans TANEF S OIRT arasinan aana F 5 El e NNER AAA ENEE rt act GIee aleatin i Table F 9 land sissssvssesassoacivesavsdiaasvvsstaassasstansnessiaasianivcgiosiistsiveivs F 6 Table F10 South Afi Canas nan F 6 List of Tables Table F 11 French Overseas PIA isisisi F 6 Table Eb steal basco ssc cece coeds shee ag Secnale aca Secech f Table F12 F raNGeh sanonnan onain F 6 Table F 2 Europe VHF Table 133 apaissonar ni F 7 Table F 3 EuropeCATV Table F 14 USA Table F4 Italy Table F 15 CCIR Table F 5 MOroccO
215. e 576 Lines l 702 Pixels Analogue Active Picture l Mg l l l l l l l l l l l 310 l 623 E OSD Loader Co ordinates Coa Figure E 6 625 Line OSD Co ordinates in Active Picture OSD Loader Co ordinates 133 38 Fed i OSD Loader Co ordinates 142 38 Pixel Line 23 E 286 24 287 25 288 720 Pixels Digital Active Picture 480 Lines 702 Pixels Analogue Active Picture Mf ee 262 525 E OSD Loader Co ordinates 852 51 ja Figure E 7 525 Line OSD Co ordinates in Active Picture Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page E 11 ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo E 7 3 E 7 4 E 7 5 Page E 12 Show and Hide Regions The Download button defines a Region in the Encoder which remains until the Encoder is turned off the Remove button is clicked or the Region is Downloaded again The Region may be in the Shown or Hidden state which determines whether it appears in the video stream If the Auto Show box is checked the initial state is Shown Use the Show Hide Fade Up and Fade Down buttons to change the state of the region Shown regions have a green border in the main window Hidden regions have a red border NOTE Remove or Remove all does not erase a logo that has been stored in Flash memory It will be removed from the video picture but will still be available from the front panel Stored OSD On Off me
216. e 1A 220 240 Vac range 4 A 100 120 Vac range 2A 220 240 Vac range CEE 22 IEC 3 pin male receptacle Fuse in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit Do not use reversible plugs with this equipment Bussmann 505 Littelfuse 215 5x20 mm time delay T 1500 A breaking capacity HBC IEC EN 60127 2 Sheet 5 5A 250V T HBC 85 W maximum NO options fitted 150 W maximum WITH options fitted 100 W maximum NO options fitted 250 W maximum WITH options fitted 6 W typically 15 W typically Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page B 15 Technical Specification B 5 2 B 6 Page B 16 DC Power Input The power unit used in the Encoder is a soft start type designed for use on dc supplies having a negative or positive earth vehicle chassis voltage supply in the range 12 to 36 Vdc Table B 26 DC Power Supply Specification Item Rated Voltage Rated Current Input Connector Power Consumption On Power Consumption Stand by Specification 12 36 Vdc supplies only Correct polarity must always be observed This is the voltage required at the DC INPUT connector when the unit is powered on 4 A at 36 V rising to 12 A at 12 V 3 pin Jaeger plug 7 7 A at 12 V reducing to 2 8 A at 36 V 45 mA at 12 V rising to 150 mA at 36 V Physical Details Table B 27 Physical Details Item Height Width Overall width Depth Approximate weigh
217. e B 17 L Band Monitor Output Specification E5740 Table B 40 Audio Output SD Decoder 0 0 cece B 25 Lband asssssssssssssssstetsansssssssssnsnssacensnissnsassssossnenssneey B 12 Table B 41 Data Output SD Decoder sesssssssssssssssssssee B 25 Table B 18 OFDM IF Out 1 Specification E5750 ee B 12 Table B 42 IF In QPSK Demodulator B 26 Table B 19 OFDM IF Out 2 Specification E5750 eee B 12 Table B 43 RF In QPSK Demodulator ssssssssssesessesssssssee B 26 Table B 20 ASI Out Specification sssssseeeesesssssssssssesees B 12 Table B 44 L band Inputs 16QAM Demodulator 0 000 B 27 Table B 21 Ethernet Specification ssssscssessssssssssssseseees B 13 Table B 45 Ethernet Port IP Output Card B 27 Page B 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 B 1 B 1 1 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Inputs Video SDI Technical Specification Table B 1 Serial Digital Video Specification Item Safety status Connector designation Connector type Input standard UK EC Input standard USA Cable length Recommended cable type Input level Return loss Input impedance H SYNC Specification SELV SDI IN 75 Q BNC female socket ITU R RECMN BT 656 3 Interfaces for Digital Component Video Signals in 525 Line and 625 Line Television Systems Operating at the 4 2 2 Level of Recommendation
218. e B 7 Technical Specification Item Specification Noise RMB L A weighted 70 dB Unweighted 70 dB User Levels 1k Oto 50d K 10 dB 0 2 dB 10 dB 0 2 dB 20 dB 0 2 dB 30 dB 0 2 dB 40 dB 0 3 dB 50 dB 0 to 2 dB Phase OdBs Z 40 Hz 2 100 Hz 2 315 Hz 2 1 kHz 2 6 3 kHz 2 10 kHz 2 15 kHz 2 Embedded Audio Via SDI Audio embedded on the serial digital interface can also be extracted Up to four stereo pairs of audio can be extracted from the SDI The Encoder can extract two DIDs at once giving four stereo pairs Table B 10 Embedded Audio Specification Item Specification Serial Digital Interface Safety status SELV Connector designation SDI IN Connector type BNC female connector Input standard ITU R RECMN BT 656 3 SMPTE 272M A B 2 Test Tones Table B 11 Test Tones Specification Item Specification Level 0 dB relative to FSR 18 dB Frequency 1 kHz at 48 kHz sampling frequency Bit rate 96 kbit s Page B 8 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Outputs Technical Specification IF Outputs 1U E5714 Table B 12 IF OUT MAIN Specification 1U E5714 Item Safety status Connector designation Connector type Output impedance Return loss Output power Power level stability Signal type Symbol rate minimum Symbol rate maximum vs carrier frequency Fc Transmit symbol rate accuracy Convolutional FEC rate
219. e UP Scrolls up through character list e RIGHT Moves cursor one character right e LEFT Moves cursor one character left e ENTER Accepts new setting e CANCEL Leaves setting unchanged e Hold ENTER for two seconds to insert space for a character or digit e Hold CANCEL for two seconds to delete a space character or digit NOTE If the number being entered can be negative then a minus sign can be inserted by pressing LEFT when the cursor is on the left most digit This can then be toggled between plus and minus by pressing the UP DOWN keys A udio V ideo Menu 1U The A V Menu is designed to give the user fast access to basic audio and video input settings and operates in a slightly different way to other menus The menu gives a list of video and audio settings and the audio input levels Any of the settings can be changed by pressing ENTER to cycle through the options Each time ENTER is pressed the new setting is updated and actioned immediately by the Encoder Only those video input selections compatible with the currently selected frame rate can be chosen from this menu For example if the current selection is PAL B G H I frame rate 25 Hz then any format except PAL M or NTSC M can be selected 29 97 Hz only Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 11 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 4 Establishing Local Control 2U 4 4 1 Input Monitor At power on the Encoder runs
220. e Vertical Interval Time Code VITC or generated by the Encoder It is for status only and cannot be changed Video Encoder Menu Overview The Video Encoder Menu is selected from the Video Menu by pressing the Video Encoder softkey This menu permits the selection of video encoding parameters Profile Level Option NOTE This option is always MP ML and cannot be changed unless the M2 ESO2 422 software option is enabled To access the Profile Level option press the Profile Level softkey in the Video Encoder Menu 4 These options are only shown when the Input Source Select option is set to Auto Config Switch Page 4 36 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 31 Profile Level Options Selected Option Description MP ML Main Profile Main Level Typically used in 4 2 0 direct to home 422P ML 4 2 2 Profile Main Level Typically used in 4 2 2 contribution feed Compression Mode Option To access the Compression Mode option press the Compression Mode softkey in the Video Encoder Menu This enables various compression modes to be selected in which some encoding parameters are automatically controlled depending on the selected encoding delay NOTES 1 _ Changing compression causes a change to GOP structure and length 2 Picture quality may decrease with reduced delay Table 4 32 Compression Mode Options Se
221. e for both flyaway use within an appropriate flight case and truck installation Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 5 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder The E5714 and E5740 contain the same high performance encoder The E5714 is a 1U chassis housing the encoder and a QPSK satellite modulator The E5740 is a 2U chassis housing the encoder and a satellite modulator capable of QPSK 8PSK and 16QAM modulation The Encoder has one card containing a single video encoder two stereo audio encoders dual standard MPEG 1 layer 2 Dolby Digital AC 3 composite video decoder CA data input and general purpose VBI extraction and encoding circuitry It also contains either a satellite modulator or an OFDM modulator High quality 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 video encoding is ensured by the inclusion of digital noise reduction techniques and many other proprietary algorithms as well as standard MPEG compression techniques Fully Exhaustive motion estimation is also used Video can be input to the unit in serial digital component SDI format or composite analogue PAL NTSC There is also a logo overlay facility allowing broadcasters to trademark material The audio functionality supports multiple sampling frequencies bit rates and coding modes Audio can be input in balanced analogue digital AES EBU input as a discrete channel or embedded on serial digital video Various coding standards
222. e of distortion but others e g video index are intended for SDI transmission and will not survive MPEG coding decoding in VBI in Picture mode VITS test signal and ghost cancellation signal will become corrupted 2 VBI in Picture is not supported when 3 2 Pulldown is active Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 13 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder 1 3 4 Page 1 14 VBI User Data Closed Caption data together with other formats such as VITC and AFD can be transmitted in the user data field of the video or relevant part of the video stream VBI in PID The Encoder has the ability to extract and transmit a wide variety of VBI line formats Circuitry on the front end of the equipment incorporates a number of general purpose line grabbers so that known formats of VBI data can be extracted The following VBI data formats are supported e Line 21 field 1 and field 2 data Services ElA 608 Closed Caption and V chip e Neilson AMOL 1 Neilson AMOL 11 VITC EBU and SMPTE Programme Delivery Control PDC via ITU R system B Teletext extension data packets of type 8 30 format 2 and Line 16 Video Programme System VPS Video Programming Teletext VPT and VPS are trade names Wide Screen Signalling WSS line 23 ETS 300 294 Video Index for Pan Scan Aspect Ratio and Active Format Descriptor e The supported VBI line number range is 10 22 and 272 285 for 525 lines and 7 24
223. e operated mounted in a 19 inch rack Ensure that it is firmly and safely located and has an adequate through flow of air Slide the Encoder onto the chassis supports and affix to the rack by means of an M6 x 18 mm panhead screw in each corner See Figure 2 1 Do not use this product as a support for any other equipment Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment Location of screws to attach Encoder to rack Same at the opposite side of the Encoder TANDBERG a Figure 2 1 Fitting the Encoder into a Rack 2 3 2 Cable Routing Power supply cables should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them Pay particular attention to cables at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the appliance Do not run ac power cables in the same duct as signal leads 2 3 3 Equipment Access WARNING BERYLLIUM COPPER FINGER STRIPS ARE USED IN THIS EQUIPMENT TO SEAL THE ENCLOSURE FOR EMI PROTECTION THIS ARRANGEMENT IS PERFECTLY SAFE DURING NORMAL OPERATION DO NOT FILE THE STRIPS OR OTHERWISE CAUSE THEM TO PRODUCE DUST OR PARTICLES ANY CUTS CAUSED BY THE STRIP SHOULD BE TREATED APPROPRIATELY Ensure that the Encoder is installed in such a way as to allow access to the rear of the unit and the connectors 2 3 4 Ventilation WARNING NEVER PUSH OBJ ECTS OF ANY KIND INTO T
224. e specified orbital position is outside the valid input range a confirmation screen is displayed which shows the maximum minimum value allowed West East Option To access the West East option press the West East softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the satellite west east flag to be specified to indicate whether the satellite position is in the western or eastern part of the orbit Table 4 88 West East Options Selected Option Description West Satellite position is in western part of the orbit East Satellite position is in the eastern part of the orbit Polarisation Option To access the Polarisation option press the Polarisation softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the polarisation of the satellite transponder to be specified Table 4 89 Polarisation Options Selected Option Description Linear Horizontal Satellite transponder uses linear horizontal polarisation Linear Vertical Satellite transponder uses linear vertical polarisation Circular Left Satellite transponder uses circular left polarisation Circular Right Satellite transponder uses circular right polarisation Output Format Satellite Modulator IF Output IF Output Option To access the IF Output option press the IF Output softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enables the IF output to be switched On or Off Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST
225. e to no other field or frame information The frame is used as a reference for other compression methods IPPV Impulse Pay Per View One time events purchased at home on impulse using a prearranged SMS credit line IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder The Receiver with an internal MPEG Decoder which is connected to the subscriber s TV The IRD is responsible for receiving and de multiplexing all signals The unit receives the incoming signal and if CA is active decodes the signal when provided with a control word by the viewing card Domestic IRDs are also known as Set Top Units or Set Top Boxes IRE Institute of Radio Engineers No longer in existence but the name lives on as a unit of video amplitude measurement This unit is 1 of the range between blanking a peak white for a standard amplitude signal ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network The basic ISDN service is BRI Basic Rate Interface which is made up of two 64 kbit s B channels and one 16 kbit s D channel 2B D If both channels are combined into one called bonding the total data rate becomes 128 kbit s and is four and a half times the bandwidth of a V 34 modem 28 8 kbit s The ISDN high speed service is PRI Primary Rate Interface It provides 23 B channels and one 64 kbit s D channel 23B D which is equivalent to the 24 channels of a T1 line When several channels are bonded together high data rates can be achieved For example it is common to bond six channels for quality v
226. e viewing ratings ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface ASIC Application S pecific Integrated Circuit A customised chip designed to perform a specific function Async Asynchronous ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode A connection orientated cell based data transport technology designed for Broadband ISDN B ISDN It provides a circuit switched bandwidth on demand carrier system with the flexibility of packet switching It offers low end to end delays and negotiable on call set up Quality of Service guarantees Asynchronous refers to the sporadic nature of the data being transmitted Cells are transmitted only when data is to be sent therefore the time interval between cells varies according to the availability of data ATSC Advanced Television Standards Committee An organisation founded in 1983 to research and develop a digital TV standard for the U S A In late 1996 the FCC adopted the ATSC standard the digital counterpart of the NTSC standard Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page A 1 ST TM E10076 3 Glossary B3ZS Backward Compatibility BAT baud rate BER BISS Bit rate Block Pixel Block Bouquet B Picture B Frame BPSK Buffer BW Byte mode CA CAT C Band CCIR CCITT Channel Channel Coding Chrominance Closed Captioning CODE Codec COFDM Page A 2 Bipolar with Three Zero Substitution A method of eliminating long zero strings in a transmission It is used t
227. eck that the Base Board and Satellite Modulator are firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing them from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Error Messages H 11 Remux Related Errors Table H 9 Remux Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Overflow On Input 1 Overflow On Input 2 Overflow On Input 3 Reduce incoming bit rate Overflow Motherboard O P Reduce incoming bit rate of services or turn off some services Remux Card Stopped Power Encoder off then check that the Remux module is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Motherboard O P TS Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page H 9 ST TM E10076 3 Error Messages BLANK Page H 10 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Annex Accuracy of Frequency Sources This equipment is based around ISO IEC 13818 specifications
228. ected from the Video Encoder Menu by pressing the Reflex Enable softkey The option is used to enable On or disable Off Reflex Copyright Option This option indicates whether the information in the bit stream is shown to be protected by copyright It is for status only and cannot be changed Original Option This option indicates whether the bit stream is an original or a copy of an Original bit stream It is for status only and cannot be changed Bandwidth Option See Video Bandwidth Option on page 4 34 Encoder Type Option This option indicates the type of Encoder It is for status only and cannot be changed S W Release Option This option indicates the software release of the Encoder It is for status only and cannot be changed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 45 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 8 4 Page 4 46 Vertical Blanking Interval VBI Menu Overview The VBI Menu is selected from the Video Menu by pressing the VBI softkey This menu permits the selection of VBI parameters The VBI lines vary according to whether the video source is 525 lines 29 97 Hz or 625 lines 25 Hz If 525 the options are VBI Lines 10 22 and 272 285 if 625 the options are VBI Lines 7 24 and 319 336 NOTE A maximum of eight VBI lines per field may be extracted This limit does not apply to Teletext Teletext All lines Option NOTE This option is onl
229. ected the Encoder immediately reboots keeping the current configuration If No the Encoder keeps working normally Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 30 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally CAUTION The Reset Encoder option is not normally used One example of its use is when code has been downloaded in background mode such as Base Board code or Video Compression Module VCM code and you want to reset the Encoder to action the new code The Build Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the Build Build Menu shows the status of the options shown in Figure 4 9 They cannot be changed The Video Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Video softkey This menu permits the selection of video parameters Any option with a clear circle next to it cannot be accessed and changed It is for status information only see Figure 4 10 for menu structure 4 7 7 Build Menu softkey The 4 8 Video Menu 4 8 1 Introduction 4 8 2 Overview Video Source Menu The Video Source Menu is selected from the Video Menu by pressing the Video Source softkey This menu permits the selection of video source parameters The screens vary according to the type of video source selected Video Input Option To access the Video Input option press the Video Input softkey from the Video Source Menu Table 4 23 Video Input Options
230. ector provides an alarm Ge relay interface which can be used to send a signal to remote equipment Table 2 9 Alarm Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Ground 6 Fail NO 2 Fail common 7 Fail NC 3 Alarm NO 8 Alarm common 4 Alarm NC 9 Reset 2 internally grounded 5 Reset 1 internally pulled to 3 3 V via 10 KQ Fail e Fail NC Common e Fail NO Alarm e Alarm NC Common e Alarm NO NOTE NC Normally Closed NO Normally Open and refers to the relay contacts Refer to Annex B Section B 4 3 Alarm for details of the relay contact rating Page 2 16 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment Remote Control A 9 way D type male connector provides an 1 RS 232 RS 485 port for remote control of the Encoder see Serial Protocol Option This 2 Y connector is wired as a DTE Table 2 10 Remote Control Connector RS 232 RS 485 Remote DTE Encoder DTE Remote Control Signal Name Signal Direction Pin Signal Name 1 Not connected Transmit Data p 2 Received Data RS 232 Received Data lt _____ 3 Transmit Data RS 232 4 Not connected Signal Ground 5 Signal Ground Transmit Data B gt 6 Received Data B RS 485 Received Data A q 7 Transmit Data A RS 485 Received Data B q 8 Transmit Data B RS 485 Transmit Data A 9 Received Data A R
231. ects the automatic Tx bandwidth video bit rate and video resolution calculations Descriptor Type Satellite Frequency Option See Frequency Option on page 4 73 Modulation Type Option To access the Modulation Type option press the Modulation Type softkey inthe Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the type of modulation used by the satellite transponder to be specified Table 4 86 Modulation Type Options Selected Option Description 8PSK Satellite transponder uses 8PSK modulation 16QAM Satellite transponder uses 16QAM modulation BPSK Satellite transponder uses BPSK modulation QPSK Satellite transponder uses QPSK modulation FEC Inner Option To access the FEC Inner option press the FEC Inner softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This screen enables the inner FEC rate used by the satellite transponder to be specified See FEC Inner Option page 4 76 for further details Symbol Rate See Symbol Rate Option on page 4 77 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 77 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 11 8 Page 4 78 Orbital Position Option To access the Orbital Position option press the Orbital Position softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the orbital position of the satellite to be specified Table 4 87 Orbital Position Options Valid Input Range Description Min 0 0 Max 360 0 Step Size 0 1 If th
232. ed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page H 7 Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Level Clipping Left Level Clipping Right Audio input level on the reported channel is too high and is being clipped Reduce the audio input level Embedded Source 1 Embedded Source 2 Embedded Source 3 Embedded Source 4 AC 3 Input Invalid No Digital Input Check the audio input cable is correctly fitted and that the audio source is functioning If the fault persists call Service Engineer Mux FIFO Overflow Duplicate P ID Invalid PID Mux Bit R ate too low Audio Un Calibrated Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board and any audio modules are firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing them from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis P ower on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer H 10 Satellite Modulator Related Errors Page H 8 Error Message Table H 8 Satellite Modulator Error Messages Action to Take Config Update Processor Stopped Hardware Fault FPGA Configuration FPGA Temperature DLL Unlocked Module Uncalibrated Modulation Fault Synthesiser Unlocked ALC Error nput Clock Fault nput Sync Fault TSI FIFO DPC FIFO Parameter Fault F Card Missing Power Encoder off then ch
233. eeeceeeeeeeee 4 33 Frame Rate Option ccceeeeeeeeees 4 33 Video Locked Option csccssceeeeeee 4 34 Ident Text Option cecceeseeeeeeeees 4 34 Text Colour Option ccccceceeeeeeeeees 4 34 Background Colour Option 4 34 Video Bandwidth Option cceceeee 4 34 OP Video Loss Option 4 35 Input Termination Option ccee 4 35 Noise Reduction Option ccecceeee 4 35 Default 625 Config and Default 525 CON eieiei iinne nonini nit 4 36 Page 4 2 Logo Option When Logo Downloaded MO UNO ceigisacncheniahain meade 4 36 Time Code Option ccececeeeeeeeeeees 4 36 4 8 3 Video Encoder Menu 4 36 OVEIVIEW basta ieavaniniamuncdunerad 4 36 Profile Level Option cecceecseeeeeee 4 36 Compression Mode Option 0 0 4 37 Bitrate Option vi scsseacinuenwcnen ad 4 38 VBR Mode Option ceceeeeeeees 4 38 Delay Option ccesseseseseseeseeeeeseeeees 4 40 Resolution Option ccceecceeeeseseeeeseeees 4 40 Aspect Ratio Option ccccsecseeeeeee 4 41 AFD Opiini nensi 4 41 GOP Structure Option ccseeeceee 4 42 GOP Length Option eects 4 43 Long GOPs Option 3 1 and later 4 43 Field Frame Option ccecceesceeeeeeee 4 43 3 2 Pulldown Option cccseeeeeeees 4 44 Concatenation Option cceceeeeee 4 44 PID Options ononaria 4 45 Reflex Enable Option ccscseeeeee 4 45 Cop
234. eeee 4 57 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Audio Delay Option cesses 4 57 External Delay Option cece 4 57 Clip Level Option cececeeseeeeeeeeeees 4 58 Impedance Option eset 4 58 Language or Language Left Right Option 4 58 SMPTE 302M Standard Option 5 4 59 Channel Option ccccecesecseeeseeseeteees 4 59 Bit Stream Mode Option c ececee 4 59 Dialogue Level Option ou cesses 4 60 Dolby Srnd Mode Option eee 4 60 Production Info Option cccecceeee 4 61 Mixing Level Option oo cscs 4 61 Room Type Option ccc 4 61 Copyright Option ccseeeeeeeeteees 4 62 Original Option 4 62 Dynamic Range Option 4 62 RF Protection Option ccccsesseeees 4 63 Deemphasis Option cececeeeceeeeees 4 63 DC Filter Option c ceceseeeeeeeeeeees 4 63 Low Pass Filter Option c cceceeee 4 64 Embedded 1 2 DID Option 0 00 4 64 Embedded 3 4 DID Option 0 0 4 64 Audio PID Option cceccecccsesseeeeeeteeees 4 64 Hardware Release Option 0 cceee 4 64 Software Release Option cccceee 4 64 4 9 3 Audio Languages Menu 4 65 4 9 4 Audio XLR Menus 3 0 and later 4 65 Input Format Option cece 4 65 Input Termination Option cece 4 65 Input Clip Level Option ccceeeeee 4 65
235. eeresseeersseees 2 14 2 6 7 ASIOUT 1 2 and 3 Outputs ees 2 15 2 6 8 Control Interfaces ecesesecsteeesiseeeseee 2 15 CONMECHON sinsin 2 15 Ethernet 1 and ccsnnronnossnas 2 16 AAR EEA TE A 2 16 Remote C nfol saroian 2 17 209 Datdisciscosasencuissricctaarenetinihavanisnrants 2 17 RS 232 CONN COOL cceccsceseesseetseseeseees 2 17 RS 422 CONN CUOF sissien 2 18 2 6 10 Satellite Modulator IF Output E5714 and ESTAOIF Jiesios 2 19 IF OU CM GIN nnuaenena ninan 2 19 IF Out Monitor cnn 2 19 2 6 11 Satellite Modulator L Band Output E5740 LBAN Derose naa 2 19 BAN Manosrnmnimnnnimnna 2 19 L Band Out Main crne 2 20 L Band Out Monitor vices 2 20 Up Converter POWET cesses 2 20 2 6 12 OFDM Modulator Outputs E5715 and E S750 e terete 2 20 FOUT encrena ennn 2 20 Installing the Equipment IF QU Ziea 2 21 List of Tables Table 2 1 Supply Cable Wiring Colours 2 7 2 7 Powering Up DOWN s ssssesrrenssinssinsninnnrrnrrensrensrreenna 2 21 i k ie Powerin 2 21 Table 2 2 DC Input Connector and Cable details eee 2 10 ne YeP ee Table 2 3 SDI COMM CLM sssesssesseessesssseesesseessessessesssssnsesneesess 2 13 a Powenng HH ee a pet Table 2 4 H SYNC COnNECtHOr wscististisssensisoussasnmaransnsinionn 2 14 2 7 3 Powering DOWN rsssssssssesssstnssstineseinnseen 2 21 Table 2 5 COMP VIDEO CONNECtOr ssssisirsssssririrrrrsnsnsnrrrrnrenns 2 14 2 8 Setting the Encoder IP Address wcssccssssssssssssssssssees 2 22 Table 2 6
236. egning levere en dansk overs ttelse af denne h ndbog EAAHNIKA AIABAZTE MPOTA AYTO Av dev KaTaAGBeTe To TEpiex pevo auTo TOU BonO paTo eyxepiD ou MHN AEITOYPTHZETE AYTON TON E ONAIZMO Ettions auto To eyxeipidio eivai SiaGEoiyo o petr gpaon O GUTH TN YAWOOR KAI UTTOpEiTe va TO AYOP OETE Issue 3 first published in 2002 by TANDBERG TELEVISION LTD REGISTERED ADDRESS Unit 2 STRATEGIC PARK ComINes Way HEDGE END SOUTHAMPTON HAMPSHIRE S030 4DA Registered Company Number 03695535 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Preliminary Pages List of Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Gives a general description of the equipment and its main features and functions Identifies the controls indicators and connectors on the front and rear panels Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment Provides a guide to the suitability of an installation and gives detailed procedures for the preparation and installation of the equipment Also details the external connectors and provides important safety information Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades This chapter describes the options and upgrades available for the E57xx series of Encoder models Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Describes local control in detail Provides the power up power down procedures and other general operating control set up procedures Chapter 5 Web Browser I nterfa
237. emains at the bit rate set within the Mux menu and any spare unused bit rate is filled with stuffing packets These could optionally be removed and reinserted by some equipment between the Encoder and Decoder A typical view of the Video Encoder menu would be To run in VBR mode the Encoder must be placed into a Seamless Compression mode A new menu item VBR Mode then appears When set to Off Constant the Encoder generates a fixed constant bit rate set by the Bit rate option When changed to On Variable the Encoder enters its stand alone VBR Mode A new menu item appears Max VBR Bit rate This is the maximum bit rate the Encoder will generate The read only menu item Bit rate remains but now indicates the bit rate being generated by the Encoder Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 39 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 40 The required picture quality is set in the same menu by the VBR Target Quality item When running in VBR Mode the two top level status screens show the current bit rate being used This will typically vary Delay Option This option indicates the current video delay It is for status only and cannot be changed Resolution Option This option gives both horizontal and vertical resolution To access the Resolution option press the Resolution softkey in the Video Encoder Menu Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx
238. enu This is used with BISS E An Enc rypted Session Word is a 64 bit number that is transformed by the Encoder into a Session Word used to encrypt and decrypt the transport stream NOTE Take precautions to avoid general knowledge of the Encrypted Session Word BI SS E Injected Id Option To access the BISS E Injected Id option press the BISS E Injected Id softkey in the Mux Menu This is only used with BISS E and is an identifier for the unit comprising a 56 bit hexadecimal word NOTE Take precautions to avoid general knowledge of the BISS E Injected Id 13 BISS is implemented according to EBU Tech 3292 May 2002 Page 4 96 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 13 4 13 1 4 13 2 4 13 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Remux Introduction If the Remux option module M2 EOM2 REMUxX is fitted there is an additional item in the Mux Menu see Figure 4 18 and a further Remux Module Menu and 1 Service Menu Addition to Mux Menu When Remux Fitted Host Bit rate Option NOTE Prior to Build Version 3 0 0 the option was entitled Host Bit rate 188 and Host Bit rate 204 This option refers to the multiplex in the local host Encoder To change the Host bit rate press the Host Bit rate softkey in the Mux Menu The Host Bit rate can be in the range of 0 Mbit s to 54 0000 Mbit s NOTE The host bit rate cannot exceed the output rate Table 4 118 Host Bit
239. eo Source Error Messages v sssssesssessseesessesseessesees H 5 H 3 General OS EEEE H 4 Table H 3 VBI Error Messages sssrin H 6 Table H 4 Remote Control Error Messages H 6 H 4 Video Source Related Errors sccscscseceseeeeees H 5 Table H 5 Data Error MesSaQes u i i H 5 VBI Related Errors ceccccccccccccccccssccccssccsseccerseceseecsseeceess H 6 Table H 6 Video Encoder Error Messages Table H 7 Audio Error Messages H 6 Remote Control Related Errors s s s H 6 Table H 8 Satellite Modulator Error Messages v ssssssssssssssssssseen H 8 H 7 Data Related EOS ssscscscsccccccccccccccccccccssssssesescececcece H 6 Table H 9 Remux Error MeESSAgES visssssssssssssesesssssesesesesesesesesesesee H 9 H 8 Video Encoder Related Errors sssscrsserrrres H 7 H 9 Audio Related ErrOrs cscssssssssesssssssesssrsssnessees H 7 H 10 Satellite Modulator Related Errors essers H 8 H 11 Remux Related Errors cccsssssssssssnsssssssserssseeseees H 9 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page H 1 Error Messages BLANK Page H 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Error Messages H 1 H 2 Page H 3 Introduction WARNING DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED ONLY TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO SERVICE THIS EQUIPM
240. epeated PCR Resync Coding Mode Error PCR Error No PowerUp Tests Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer No Reflex Messages Check Ethernet connection to Encoder H 9 Audio Related Errors Table H 7 Audio Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Module Fault Comms Error Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board and any audio modules are firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing them from the rear of the Config Update Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Processor Stopped pane Incorrect parameters Check the parameter settings for the reported audio channel PCR Error Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board and any audio modules are firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing them from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Silence Timeout Left Silence Timeout Right A silence timeout period can be set contact Customer Services for details The error message is generated if the audio is silent for greater than the timeout period The default timeout period is 0 which disables this feature and so the error should not be report
241. epending upon the Coding Standard selected Audio A Menus are shown as examples The Audio A Menu is selected from the Audio Menu by pressing the Audio A softkey This menu permits the selection of individual channel audio parameters Set up the Audio in this sequence gt Setup Audio Setup Audio Setup Audio Source Option Coding Standard Coding Mode Option Option SDI De embedded 1 SDI De embedded 2 gt SDI De embedded 3 SDI De embedded 4 SDI Video Empty Packets Encoding Encoding Analogue A Digital A Analogue B Digital B MPEG Layer 2 Dolby Digital AC 3 dB Test Tone 1 kHz 0 dB E57xx Encoder Figure 4 14 Setting up the Audio Input Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 2 Only shown if Coding Mode Dual Mono 3 Status only Only shown if the Encoder has a viable source from a Dolby Encoder 6 Only shown if in two channel mode 1 Only shown if Production Info Yes 8 Only available from Build Version 3 0 0 Setup Menu Audio Menu Audio A Audio B Audio XLR Audio Languages Audio B Audio A Menu Menu Menu options depend on Coding Standard selected i Dolby E Pass Thru AC 3 Pass Thru MPEG Layer 2 Linear P
242. equipment and contact Customer Services for advice 6 5 4 Video Fault finding Fault Symptoms Table 6 1 Video Fault finding Problem What to do Video input lock error Check video input Video wrong line standard Check which video format is selected VCM stopped Reboot Bad parameters Check set up Breaks in Transmission If a transitory break in transmission occurs then check the encoding mode option of the Encoder see Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally In the standard delay low delay very low delay and mega low delay the following are not seamless encoding modes bit rate and GOP changes This is because the Encoder tries to maintain minimal end to end delay latency and that means buffer sizes must be as small as possible In the standard delay low delay very low delay and mega low delay encoding modes the buffer size is selected by the video bit rate Changing the bit rate changes the buffer size requiring a reset of the coding process For reflex operation video bit rate changes must be seamless as the bit rate varies continuously All the seamless modes are seamless only for video bit rate changes However for some GOP changes operation can be seamless but this aspect is not guaranteed Noise Reduction Where incoming picture material is corrupted by high frequency noise such as white noise it is advisable to make use of the noise reduction process Noise reduction can be selected at the front panel
243. erent ways according to the audio 9 15 input and the encoding configuration selected The connector provides two stereo pairs They may be independently configured as either analogue or digital The left channel is used to input digital audio Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 7 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades Table 3 4 Audio In Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Analogue Digital Analogue Digital 1 Left Channel A AES EBU A 9 Left Channel A AES EBU A 2 Not connected 10 Right Channel A 3 Right Channel A 11 Not connected 4 Left Channel B AES EBU B 12 Left Channel B AES EBU B 5 Not connected 13 Right Channel B 6 Right Channel B 14 Not connected 7 AES EBU 15 AES EBU Reference Output Reference Ground Signal 8 Not connected NOTES 1 In analogue mode termination is either 20 kQ or 600 Q 2 InAES EBU mode termination is 110 Q default 3 When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Q termination 4 The digital audio input does not support SPDIF CAUTION To ensure EMC compliance use the audio connector supplied with the Encoder Page 3 8 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades 3 5 RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input Option M2 EOM2 DAT 3 5 1 Overview NOTE The Data Input Option does not report errors b
244. erminal Ready A 3 Data Terminal Ready A Received Data A 4 Received Data A Data Set Ready A a 5 Data Set Ready A Received Clock A q 6 Received Clock A Transmit Clock A 7 Transmit Clock A Signal Ground 8 Signal Ground Transmit Data B 9 Transmit Data B Data Terminal Ready B 10 Data Terminal Ready B Received Data B lt 11 Received Data B Data Set Ready B 12 Data Set Ready B Received Clock B _ 13 Received Clock B Transmit Clock B oe 14 Transmit Clock B 15 Not connected NOTE Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS 422 specification A is positive and B is negative Page 3 11 Options and Upgrades 3 6 Remux Option M2 EOM2 REMUX 3 6 1 Overview NOTE The M2 EOM2 REMUX Remux Option Module is supported by Build version 2 2 0 and later The Remux option module is capable of accepting up to three separate transport streams via ASI connectors and one transport stream from the host Encoder The maximum permissible data rate of each input transport stream is 50 Mbit s Some or all of the services in the input transport streams are then multiplexed together to produce a Multiple Channels Per Carrier MCPC output at up to 50 Mbit s For a specification of this interface see Annex B Technical Specification 3 6 2 Assembly Rear Panel The Remux option module comprises assembly 12449 and Card S10655 See Table 3 1 for the slots that it can be installed in
245. ernal PSIP see Annex J Use of Remux Card in ATSC Setting Bit rates and Avoiding Overflow Overflow is the condition in which the total of the contributing service bit rates including the host mux exceeds the output bit rate of the primary remultiplexing unit NOTE Only useful packets e g video audio and data etc count towards the bitrate of the contributing service bit rates not null packets Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades The easiest way to configure the bit rates to avoid overflow is as follows 1 Divide the 188 byte output bit rate of the primary master remultiplexing unit this can be found in the Setup Mux Remux Module Output Bit rate by the number of contributing services including the primary service Such that O P Rate 188 N Host Rate 188 Where N number of services to be combined including primary 2 Then set the Host Rates 188 of each contributing unit and the master unit to equal the calculated Host Rate If the above procedure is followed an equal bit rate is allocated to each contributing unit By setting the host rates the video and audio bit rates will be automatically adjusted to suit The amount of spare bit rate and input bit rate that has been used in the Remultiplexer can be monitored using the bar graph indicators in the Setup Mux Remux Module Menu 3 6 8 What to do if Overflow Occurs If
246. errors menu active errors 4 117 error masks menu 4 117 G general menu 4 26 evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 config name 4 26 fan control 4 28 keypress beep option 4 27 local date 4 26 local time 4 26 model number 4 26 power dip recovery option 4 27 screen saver 4 27 software release 4 28 temperature 4 27 upgrade encoder option 4 28 UTC offset 4 27 IRD demod menu FEC rate option 4 106 frequency option 4 106 4 107 polarisation option 4 107 symbol rate option 4 106 IRD menu 4 104 IRD mode option 4 104 IRD ts source option 4 104 M M2 EOM2 DAT RS 232 and RS 422 data input option module 4 70 mux menu BISS key entry option 4 95 BISS firmware option 4 94 BISS hardware option 4 94 BISS E injected id 4 96 bit rate 188 option 4 93 bit rate 204 option 4 93 clock option 4 93 enc session word 4 96 FPGA firmware option 4 94 host bitrate 4 96 on air option 4 90 packet length option 4 90 PCR PID option 4 93 RAS firmware option 4 94 scramble option 4 94 SNG key RAS1 4 94 4 95 0 output menu delivery descriptor option 4 72 descriptor type cable 4 76 FEC inner option 4 76 FEC outer option 4 76 frequency option 4 76 modulation type option 4 76 symbol rate option 4 77 descriptor type satellite 4 77 FEC inner option 4 77 frequency option 4 77 modulation type option 4 77 orbital position option 4 78 polarisati
247. eseeteseeeeeeeneeeees 4 51 an j Figure 4 14 Setting up the Audio INpUt unennnnnne 4 52 TROIR AA AADI PIETE NONO e ies Figure 4 15 Menu Hierarchy Setup Audio Menu 00 4 53 TNE Coding Mode Options ee ne bas Figure 4 16 Menu Hierarchy Setup Data Menu 0 00 4 67 Table4 48 Lip Sync Orsel Options SE ere re ae Figure 4 17 Menu Hierarchy Setup Output Menu 4 71 Table 449 Audio Delay Options eee aac tal Figure 4 18 Menu Hierarchy Setup Mux Menu DVB 4 91 TOAS ea BAR PPN ae Figure 4 19 Menu Hierarchy Setup Mux Menu ATSC 4 92 1806491 cle Level Options P Ek Figure 4 20 Menu Hierarchy Setup IRD Menu c 00 0000 4 106 Table ieee Impedance OptiOnS ysis aeia aa Figure 4 21 Menu Hierarchy Error Masks Menu 0 4 119 Table 453 SMPTE otal Standard Options sattconceretd ta Figure 4 22 Configuration Graphical Explanation 4 120 DET Chelle options ans E u Table 4 55 Bit Stream Mode Options c cccceseeeeeeeeeeees 4 60 List of Tables Table 4 56 Dialogue Level Options u v visini 4 60 Table 4 1 Keypad Key Assignment sss sssssessessssssssssee 4 14 Table 4 57 Dolby Smd Mode Options sssss sssssssssseessessseeee 4 60 Table 4 2 Syntax Options ccsssssseseeseesseseeeenussnsseresnnunses 4 19 Table 4 58 Mixing Level Options ccc ssssssssssssesussseseeeeen 4 61 Table 4 3 SI Level Options ssss
248. ess Modes Frame Only 720x576 12 IBBP Off Off Off Off 4 3 8 Mbit s Off 308 Line 23 Off Medium Off Medium None Off MPEG Layer 2 Analogue On Off 0s Off Off English Page C 5 Predefined User Configurations Module Audio Dolby Digital AC 3 Audio Musicam MPEG 2 Linear PCM RS 422 Data RS 232 Data Page C 6 Parameter Language R Clip Level PID Termination Auto Lip Sync Lip Sync Delay Lip Sync Offset Bit rate Bit stream Mode Coding Mode Copyright Original Dolby Surround Mode Dialogue Normalisation Audio Production Information Mixing Level Room Type Dynamic Range Compression Sampling Frequency Channel Bandwidth Low Pass Filter DC High Pass Filter RF Protection Surround Mixing Level LFE Low Pass Filter External Delay Bit rate Coding Mode Copyright Original Sampling Frequency Linear PCM SMPTE Standard Linear PCM Channel Number RS 422 Data Encode RS 422 Data Delay Option Module RS 422 Bit rate PID RS 422 Test Mode Base Board Only RS 422 SNMP oid ref Base Board Only RS 232 Data Encode RS 232 Data Delay Option Module RS 232 Baud Rate PID RS 232 Test Mode Base Board Only RS 232 SNMP oid ref Base Board Only Default Value English 18 dB 0x100 0x105 20 kQ On 111 ms 0 ms 192 kbit s Complete Main 2 0 Stereo Off Off Not Indicated 27 dB Off 25 dB Small room Film Standard 48 kHz On
249. eve lower Bmins Bit rate Option To access the Bit rate option press the Bit rate softkey in the video Encoder Menu An error message is shown with the correct range of bit rates if the wrong rate is entered NOTE High bit rates in low resolutions cannot always generate sufficient bits to match the requested bit rate However a valid picture will still be produced CAUTION When using the Encoder with a PRO IRD M2 PSR 3 422BAS in 4 2 2 mode the upper video bit rate limit of the IRD is 25 Mbit s VBR Mode Option NOTE This option is available in Build version 3 0 and later Page 4 38 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally It is possible to operate the Encoder in a stand alone Variable Bit rate VBR mode When in this mode the bit rate generated by the video encoder ranges between a minimum Bmin dependent on Compression Mode and a maximum Bmax set by user up to a limit defined by the Compression Mode The video encoder attempts to use a bit rate to achieve a particular picture quality set by the user If this is set very high then the generated bit rate clips at the Bmax value If it is set very low then the bit rate clips at Bmin Somewhere in between the bit rate varies depending on the picture material being encoded Simple pictures use a lower bit rate than complex pictures When in this mode the main encoder output r
250. evel option press the Clip Level softkey in the Audio A Menu This screen enables the audio clipping level to be set NOTES 1 This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is MPEG Layer 2 Linear PCM or Dolby Digital AC 3 2 This option is only displayed when the audio source is analogue 3 Clip Level refers to the head room above 0 dBu prior to the audio being clipped Table 4 51 Clip Level Options Selected Option Description 12 dB 12 dB audio clipping level 15 dB 15 dB is only available with PCB issue 4 and later 18 dB 18 dB audio clipping level Impedance Option To access the Impedance option press the Impedance softkey in the Audio A Menu This screen enables the impedance of the audio input to be set NOTES 1 This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is MPEG Layer 2 Linear PCM or Dolby Digital AC 3 2 This option is only displayed when the audio source is analogue Table 4 52 Impedance Options Selected Option Description 600 ohms 20 kohms Used in analogue mode Language or Language Left Right Option To access the Language option press the Language softkey in the Audio A Menu This enables the language of the audio channel to be set To access the Language Left Right option press the Language Left Right softkey in the Audio A Menu This enables the language of the left and right audio channels to be set NOTE The Language Left Right option is only shown when C
251. evious menu in the hierarchy The screens displayed in this manual are only representations there might be differences between equipment depending upon the options chosen NOTE In the 2U Encoder menus when it states that you may update using softkeys you can use both softkeys and keyboard keys for some options Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 13 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Each softkey on each side of Where there is a This keypad is used to the display is used to access sign associated with a amend the menu option select and sometimes amend softkey this scrolls which has been selected the menu item associated with through a set of options unless indicated otherwise it Figure 4 6 2U Keypad and Display Functions 4 5 2 How to Use the Keypad Each key on the keypad has more than one inscription One press of a key makes the number appear on the display screen two quick presses makes the first letter appear etc All keys are cyclic displaying their assigned characters in sequence In certain options only letters or numbers may be available Table 4 1 Keypad Key Assignments Keypad Button 1Press 2Presses 3Presses 4Presses COlLOlMOINIO a Ryol rm CDILOlMOINIO a Ryolrm z alojz j ojo gt gt lt lt J NjSjT Z Tn o wn nol D O to Space OJSjx c d Z A Ir mjoj O P ES Figure 4 7 gi
252. exer also contains the cypher card which scrambles the services according to the control words supplied by the BCC In the context of broadcasting a collection of MPEG 2 transport stream multiplexes transmitted on a single delivery system for example all digital channels on a specific cable system Near Instantaneously Companded Audio Multiplex Official name is NICAM 728 Used for digital stereo sound broadcasting in the UK employing compression techniques to deliver very near CD quality audio 728 refers to the bit rate in kbit s Network Information Table Part of the service information data The NIT provides information about the physical organisation of each transport stream multiplex and the characteristics of the network itself such as the actual frequencies and modulation being used Nanometre a unit of length equal to one thousand millionth 10 9 of a metre National Television Systems Committee The group which developed analogue standards used in television broadcast systems in the United States Also adopted in other countries e g Mexico Canada Japan This system uses 525 picture lines and a 59 97 Hz field frequency Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 NVOD NVRAM OFDM OPPV OSD Packet PAL PAT PCM PCR PDC Pel PES PID PIN Pixel pk pk PLL PMT P picture P frame ST TM E10076 3 Glossary Near Video On Demand Method of offer
253. ftkey in the Video Encoder Menu This enables the choice of field or frame based pictures MPEG 2 encodes video at the field frame level in what are known as pictures These are coding units within the hierarchy of the spec Pictures can be used in two ways frame pictures and field pictures Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 43 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally With frame pictures a frame of a field 1 and field 2 is encoded as a single unit With field pictures each individual field of video is encoded as a single unit but must be followed or preceded by another field picture relating to its matching field Table 4 40 Field Frame Options Selected Option Description Fields Field based pictures Frames Frame based pictures Auto Automatically chooses the correct option on a frame by frame basis 3 2 Pulldown Option To access the 3 2 Pulldown option press the 3 2 Pulldown softkey in the Video Encoder Menu This enables 3 2 pulldown film mode to be switched On and Off NOTES 1 This option is only available if a 525 line 29 97 Hz video source is selected 2 VBI in Picture is not supported when 3 2 Pulldown is active 3 3 2 Pulldown is not valid for Very Low Delay and Mega Low Delay coding modes 4 t is recommended to set this option to On The option should be switched on if the video material originated on film and has been converted from the
254. ge B 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification NOTES 1 Refer to Annex G Audio Modes when using these coding standards 2 Problems may be experienced with some Receivers if the Encoder and Decoder are not using the same version of SMPTE 302M specification e g either 1998 or 2000 The Encoder can be set up to work in either standard 3 The digital audio input does not support SPDIF CAUTION When the unit is not powered the audio input defaults to digital with 110 Q termination Table B 9 MUSICAM Analogue Test Specification ST TM E10076 3 Item Specification Set up of Alteia Receiver Audio Format MPEG Output Analogue Clip Level 18 dB Set up of Audio Encoder Input Analogue Clip Level 18 dB Sampling Frequency 48 kHz Coding Standard MUSICAM MPEG 1 Layer 2 Coding Mode Stereo Bit rate 384 k bit s Set up of Lindos Audio Oscillator Sequence TPBDLKZ Test Tolerance for Left and Right Legs for Channel A and Channel B Test Level T 1 kHz 0 dB 0 2 dB Sweep 20 Hz 20 kHz 20cB P 20 Hz 63 Hz 0 0 to 0 5 dB 100 Hz 10 kHz 0 2 to 0 3 dB 12 5 Hz 18 kHz 0 2 to 0 5 dB 20 kHz 0 to 1 5 dB Crosstalk OdBs 100 Hz 76 dB 1 kHz 78 dB 6 3 kHz 68 dB 10 kHz 63 dB Distortion noise 8dB 100 Hz 68 dB 1 kHz 70 dB Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Pag
255. ger Encoder Page 5 7 ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface Bandwidth Calculations OFDM Bit rate Calculations The Bit Rate Calculator see Figure 5 9 allows you to enter various parameters and the optimal bit rate Mbit s is automatically calculated for 204 bytes and 188 bytes TANDBERG Television Bandwidth Modulation Guard Interval FEC Rate HP 8MHz C 7MHz C 6MHz 204 Bytes 188 Bytes Figure 5 9 Tools Bandwidth Calculations OFDM Bit rate Calculations Bandwidth Calculations RF Calculations The Modulation Help see Figure 5 10 allows you to see the difference that various parameters have upon the symbol rate and bandwidth TANDBERG Television Bit Rate Bit Rate FEC Modulation Type Symbol Rate BW R Bandwidth After RS Coding Rs 18 43137254 Mbps j Abps i fis MSym s EF fis s MHz feel Figure 5 10 Tools Bandwidth Calculations RF Calculations OSD Toolkit The OSD Toolkit see Figure 5 11 consists of an OSD Creator Creator exe and OSD Loader OSD exe There is a logo overlay facility allowing broadcasters to trademark material whereby the Encoder is able to overlay broadcasters trademarks logos onto the active video See Annex E Creating and Downloading a Logo for information on how to use the programs Page 5 8 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface File Download Eg You have chosen to download
256. gh Frequency A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum covering 30 MHz to 300 MHz Vertical Interval Time Code Vertical Interval Test Signal See ITS Video Programming System A German precursor to PDC Wide Screen Switching Data used in wide screen analogue services which enables a receiver to select the appropriate picture display mode World System Teletext System B Teletext Used in 625 line 50 Hz television systems ITU R 653 A type of programmable Integrated Circuit Defines the brightness of a particular point on a TV line The only signal required for black and white pictures Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents Bod IMPUS ciescserccrtie ert tieteachstrun tinea tatiederesnels B 3 BAI Vieraana B 3 e D E E E E E B 3 H SYNG asantak B 3 Analogue Video Specification 00 B 4 Encoder Settings for PAL NTSC Video Performance Figures s es B 4 PAL Video Performance Figures B 4 NTSC Video Performance Figures B 5 Teletext Extraction ccceeccecseeeeseeeeseees B 5 International Television Standards B 6 BA2 AUTO aeeie e B 6 Analogue and Digital Audio eee B 6 Embedded Audio Via SDI cecceee B 8 BZ TeSt TONGS aicniaiearinidaianinimiinnivens B 8 BS QUIDUIS s sc0s acre dennaeneiariabamomweaain B 9 B 3 1 IF Outputs 1U E5714 eceseceesteeeees B 9 B 3 2 IF Outputs E5740 IF ec
257. go The co ordinates that the Osd Loader uses include an offset Figure E 6 and Figure E 7 illustrate how these co ordinates relate to the active picture When the logo is correctly positioned click the Download button Transferring Data appears in the communications box The image will be displayed in the main window Wait for Transfer Completed OK to appear in the communications box After a short delay the image should appear on the output from the Receiver If the Auto Store box is checked when the logo is downloaded to the Encoder it will be stored in Flash memory and will still be present after the Encoder has been powered off Only one logo can be stored in Flash at any time The maximum logo file size that can be stored in Flash is 65 279 bytes The file size will be affected by the size of the logo and its complexity number of colours and levels of transparency For example this is roughly equivalent to a logo 200 x 145 pixels with 256 colours 62 567 bytes If the Auto Store box is left unchecked the downloaded logo will be stored in volatile memory and will be lost when power is removed from the Encoder Page E 10 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo OSD Loader Co ordinates 139 44 OSD Loader Co ordinates 148 44 Pixel Field 12 720 Line 23 E 336 24 337 25 338 720 Pixels Digital Active Pictur
258. gram Association Table Part of the MPEG 2 Program Specific Information PSI data and is mandatory for MPEG 2 compliance The PAT points maps to the PMT Pulse Code Modulation A process in which a signal is sampled each sample is quantised independently of other samples and the resulting succession of quantised values is encoded into a digital signal Program Clock Reference A time stamp in the transport stream from which the Decoder timing is derived Programme Delivery Control VBI A Teletext service allowing simple programming i e VideoPlus of VCR recording times If the desired program is rescheduled PDC updates the programming information in the VCR Picture Element Also known as a pixel The smallest resolvable rectangular area of an image either on a screen or stored in memory On screen pixels are made up of one or more dots of colour Monochrome and grey scale systems use one dot per pixel For grey scale the pixel is energised with different intensities creating a range from dark to light a scale of 0 255 for an eight bit pixel Colour systems use a red green and blue dot per pixel each of which is energised to different intensities creating a range of colours perceived as the mixture of these dots If all three dots are dark the result is black If all three dots are bright the result is white Packetised Elementary Stream A sequential stream of data bytes that has been converted from original elementary streams of a
259. h Calculations OF DM Bit rate Browser Interface ticles celts sted ta lestsde du tease 5 3 Calculations isssrsrsienusennenarenuniananenasnin 5 8 Figure 5 10 Tools Bandwidth Calculations RF Calculations 5 8 5 3 Web Browser Interface Options sss 5 6 Figure 5 11 Tools OSD ToOIKit cassssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssseen Figure 5 12 Tools Video Monitor AE GION FIN ataona i Figure 5 13 Backplane Modes List of Figures Figure 5 14 Installed Modules sssssssssssssussseecsusssssssssaseessusseseen Figure 5 1 Internet Options Dialog BOX sssrinin 5 3 Figure 5 15 TFTP Protocol for Cloning a File 5 11 Figure 5 2 Settings Dialog Box Figure 5 3 Conne tons Tab susscssniansnsniisnisansiisn Figure 5 4 Local Area Network LAN Settings Dialog Box 5 5 Figure 5 5 Proxy Settings Dialog BOX cscs sees 5 5 Figure 5 6 Web Browser Interface Options sssrin 5 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 5 1 Web Browser Interface BLANK Page 5 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface 5 1 Introduction There is a range of diagnostic and other utilities that can be accessed via a web browser such as Internet Explorer Before these can be accessed it is important to ensure that the Internet Explorer is correctly set up for the web browser NOTE Netscape not currently supported 5 2 How to Se
260. h EN 300 421 DVB S It provides a main and monitoring IF Output The IF frequency can be tuned between 50 MHz and 90 MHz in steps of 125 kHz The maximum symbol rate is 30 Msym s 60 MHz to 80 MHz 20 Msym s at 50 MHz and 90 MHz E5740 The satellite modulator fitted within the E5740 is capable of QPSK modulation in accordance with EN 300 421 DVB S and is also capable of 8PSK and 16QAM modulation in accordance with EN 301 210 DVB DSNG It is available with either IF outputs or L band outputs The IF output frequency can be tuned between 50 MHz and 180 MHz in 1 kHz steps The L band output frequency can be tuned between 950 MHz and 1750 MHz in 1 kHz steps The maximum symbol rate is 48 Msym s E5715 E5750 The OFDM modulator fitted within the E5715 and E5750 provides an IF output at 70 MHz and OdBm It is capable of operating in 2k carriers or 8k carriers transmission modes It supports FEC rates of 7 3 3a 6 and g and guard intervals of 32 i6 g and 1 4 It can provide QPSK 16QAM or 64QAM modulation schemes 1 3 7 Control and Monitoring Remote control of the Encoder is via the Ethernet network running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP protocol or via the RS 232 RS 485 remote control port Alternatively Local control is implemented through the front panel keypad and display 1 3 8 Options and Upgrades Options and Upgrades are described in Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades 18 ATSC in
261. he 1U Encoder uses a similar air flow path with three fans on each side of the unit With both 1U and 2U units it is important not to block the front air intake on the bottom left corner of the front panel see Figure 2 2 2 3 Warm air out Cool air in right front Three fans mounted at rear left side of right rear y unit 4 Two fans mounted Warm air out at front right side left rear of unit 1 Cool air in front via bottom vent Do not block the air intake Figure 2 2 Air Path Through the Enclosure Page 2 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment 2 4 AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing 2 4 1 AC Power Supply CAUTION This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your business consult a qualified electrical engineer or your local power company See Annex B Technical Specification for a full power supply specification There are no links or switches to be altered for operation from different ac supplies 2 4 2 Power Cable and Earthing General Check that the ac power cable is suitable for the country in which the Encoder is to be used WARNINGS IF THE MOULDED PLUG FITTED TO THE MAINS CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THIS UNIT IS NOT REQUIRED PLEASE DISPOSE OF IT SAFELY FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY ENDANGER LIFE AS LIVE END
262. he DIDs are located in ancillary packets in the data stream NOTE Default DIDs are selected when a DID value gt 1024 is set Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Audio Modes Audio groups taken from SDI ade i a SDI Embedded 1 rou e embedder Group 3 SDI Embedded 2 _ Audio Group 4 Router To Option D Modules 7 gt Tie DID Selection Default 0x2F F De embedder 2 Aisa DID Selection Default 0x1F D Group 1 gt Group 2 41 Group 3 Group 4 SDI Embedded 3 SDI Embedded 4 Le Audio Channel A Audio Stereo PairA Interface Stereo Pair B and gt x Conversion Channel B Audio 15 way D type i Connector Base Card Audio Audio option module M2 EOM2 AUDLIN is required if more than two channels of audio require processing Figure G 3 Embedded Audio and Stereo Pairs Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page G 5 ST TM E10076 3 Audio Modes BLANK Page G 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents ST TM E10076 3 Annex H Error Messages H L Introduction cesacisesaccasecsaasaaandasicehsae ashi nczvansaasacandetde H 3 List of Tables Dealing with M H 3 Table H 1 General Error Messages sssri H 4 H 2 Dealing with Error Messages wissen i Table H 2 Vid
263. hen back on when noise is present Refer to Application Note ST AN 1094 Video Noise Reduction and Compression for more information 3 Noise reduction is only available when software option M2 ESO2 NR is purchased Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 35 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 8 3 Table 4 30 Noise Reduction Options Selected Option Description Off Level 1 Use noise reduction if necessary but don t damage the picture in any way Level 2 Medium setting best compromise quite powerful but noise reduction might very occasionally introduce some artefacts Level 3 Very powerful noise reduction that may introduce some artefacts Default 625 Config and Default 525 Config NOTE These options are available in Build version 3 1 0 and later To access the Default 525 625 Config options press the appropriate Default 525 625 Config softkey from the Video Source Menu These options define which of the stored configs are loaded Logo Option When Logo Downloaded into Unit To access the Logo option press the Logo softkey from the Video Source Menu This gives the choice of superimposing the broadcaster s logo on the video On or not Off NOTE This option only appears if the logo has previously been downloaded into the equipment see Annex E Creating and Downloading a Logo Time Code Option This option indicates the time given by th
264. ideo stream should be sent It can either be a unicast IP address or it can be a class D multicast address 224 0 0 1 239 255 255 255 Choosing a multicast IP address enables IGMPv2 support Configuring a normal IP address turns off the GMPv2 support again In some cases when running multicast traffic you may want to forward the IP frames to a multicast relay agent Configuring a unicast IP address here ensures that the IP Output card forwards the outgoing IP multicast packets to the MAC address corresponding to the chosen IP address If the address 172 21 207 1 is put here the module would resolve the MAC address corresponding to this IP address instead of using the static multicast MAC address mapping specified in RFC1112 the 23 bits etc To turn off this feature again type in 0 0 0 0 Destination UDP Port Option To access the Destination UDP Port option press the Destination UDP Port softkey in the IP Streamer Menu This configures the UDP destination port field in the outgoing UDP frames TS Pkts UDP Frm Option To access the TS Pkts UDP Frm TS Packets UDP Frame option press the TS Pkts UDP Frm softkey in the IP Streamer Menu This configures how many 188 byte MPEG 2 Transport Stream packets are mapped into each UDP frame Valid values are between 1 and 7 For bit rates in excess of 15 Mbit s it is recommended to use the maximum setting of 7 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST
265. ideoconferencing at 384 kbit s In Europe PRI includes 30 B channels and one D channel equivalent to an E1 line ISO International Standards Organisation ISOG Inter union Satellite Operations Group ITS Insertion Test Signal A suite of analogue test signals placed on lines in the VBI Also known as VITS ITT Invitation To Tender ITU R International Telecommunications Union Radiocommunications Study Groups was CCIR ITU T International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Standardisation Sector was CCITT JPEG J oint Photographic Experts Group ISO ITU standard for compressing still images It has a high compression capability Using discrete cosine transform it provides user specified compression ratios up to around 100 1 there is a trade off between image quality and file size kbit s 1000 bits per second Kbit 1024 bits usually refers to memory capacity or allocation Ku band The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum which spans the frequency range of approximately 12 GHz to 14 GHz Used by communications satellites Preferred for DTH applications because this range of frequency is less susceptible to interference LAN Local Area Network A network which provides facilities for communications within a defined building or group of buildings in close proximity L band The frequency band from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz which is the normal input frequency range of a domestic IRD The incoming signal from the satellite is down
266. ignation Pin out 1 coOo PymlT oO oy AJ wy rm Specification 75 Q BNC Female ASI OUT Signal Ground Specification RJ 45 10 100 BT Tx Out Tx Out Rx In Not Connected Not Connected Rx In Not Connected Not Connected Software Options M2 ESO2 NR Options and Upgrades FRONT a 1 8 This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include noise reduction mode Contact Customer Services for details M2 ESO2 PU This purchasable option upgrades the performance of the Encoder Contact Customer Services for details ST TM E10076 3 Page 3 27 Options and Upgrades 3 12 3 3 12 4 3 12 5 3 12 6 3 12 7 3 12 8 3 12 9 M2 ESO2 VBR This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include variable bit rate Contact Customer Services for details M2 ESO2 422 This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include 4 2 2 video encoding mode Contact Customer Services for details M2 ESO2 RAS This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include RAS mode Contact Customer Services for details M2 ESO2 ACON This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include auto concatenation Contact Customer Services for details M2 ESO2 AC3 This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide Dolby Digital AC 3 audio Contact Customer Services for details M2 ESO2 SM38PSK This purchasable option allows the E5740 to provide 8PSK modulation Conta
267. in the output scrambled using BISS Mode 1 and the Session Word entered in this menu On BISS E BISS E is available from Build version 2 2 0 and later The service is included in the output scrambled using BISS E and the Enc rypted Session Word entered in this menu Source BNC Option This option indicates the source of the input It is for status only Table 4 121 indicates what is shown for the various inputs Table 4 121 Source BNC Options Selected Option Description 0 Host Encoder 1 2 3 Remux inputs 1 to 3 Short Name In Option NOTE This option is only shown in ATSC mode To access the Short Name In option press the Short Name In softkey in the 1 Service Menu This option allows the Short Name In to be changed Short Name Out Option NOTE This option is only shown in ATSC mode To access the Short Name Out option press the Short Name Out softkey in the 1 Service Menu This option allows the Short Name Out to be changed Name In Option NOTE This option is only shown on an incoming Service menu 2 13 Service Menu To access the Name In option press the Name In softkey in the 2 Service Menu This option indicates the input service name It is status only and cannot be changed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 99 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Name Out Option To access the Name Out option press the Name Out softkey in the
268. in western part of the orbit East Satellite position is in the eastern part of the orbit Page 4 82 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Polarisation Option To access the Polarisation option press the Polarisation softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enables the polarisation of the satellite transponder to be specified Table 4 101 Polarisation Options Selected Option Description Linear Horizontal Satellite transponder uses linear horizontal polarisation Linear Vertical Satellite transponder uses linear vertical polarisation Circular Left Satellite transponder uses circular left polarisation Circular Right Satellite transponder uses circular right polarisation Status Only Options for the Satellite Modulator Menu The following options are status only and cannot be changed They give information about the Baseband BB Card e Baseband BB Card Option BB PCB Revision Option BB Mod Status Option BB Serial No Option BB S W Release Option BB CPLD F W Release Option BB DSP F W Release Option BB RNF F W Release Option IF Card Type Option DPC Card Type Option 4 11 9 Output Format Satellite Modulator L Band Output 3 1 and later L Band Output Option To access the L Band Output option press the L Band Output softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enables the L Band output to be switched On or
269. ing Pulses 312 3143 Equalising Pulses part 624 Equalising Pulses 625 NOTES 1 Any type of valid VBI can be on any line even if it is not usually associated with that line 2 625 line fields start on the leading edge of the first vertical sync broad pulse Therefore the first half of line 313 is in field 1 and the second half is in field 2 3 An MPEG frame is 576 lines when formatting 625 line format pictures 4 Line 23 is the Wide Screen Signalling line It carries information which defines the picture Aspect Ratio 5 ETS 300 294 is the specification which describes WSS 6 EN 300 472 is the specification associated with System B Teletext World System Teletext Figure 4 13 VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for 625 line Systems Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 51 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 9 4 9 1 4 9 2 Page 4 52 Audio Menu Overview The Audio Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the Audio softkey This menu permits the selection of audio parameters Any option with a clear circle next to it cannot be accessed and changed It is for status information only see Figure 4 15 for menu structure Although a full list of menu options are given it depends upon the Coding Standard selected as to which are shown on the front panel display Audio A and B Menus Introduction Audio A and B have the same menu options d
270. ing multiple showings of movies or events The showings are timed to start at set intervals determined by the broadcaster Each showing of a movie or event can be sold to subscribers separately Non volatile Random Access Memory Memory devices permitting random read write access that do not lose their information when power is removed Stores the default configuration parameters set by the user Orthogonal FDM A modulation technique used for digital TV transmission in Europe Japan and Australia more spectrally efficient than FDM In OFDM data is distributed over a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies The carriers are arranged with overlapping sidebands in such a way that the signals can be received without adjacent channel interference Order ahead Pay Per View An advance purchase of encrypted one time events with an expiry date On screen display Messages and graphics typically originating from the SMS and displayed on the subscriber s TV screen by the IRD to inform the subscriber of problems or instruct the subscriber to contact the SMS A unit of data transmitted over a packet switching network A packet consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes from an elementary data stream Phase Alternating Line A colour TV broadcasting system where the phase of the R Y colour difference signal is inverted on every alternate line to average out errors providing consistent colour reproduction Pro
271. input to R allow another L band signal to be summed with the modulator output a Table 2 15 L band In Connector Item Specification Connector Type 50 Q SMA Female Type Analogue Connector designation L Band In Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page 2 19 Installing the Equipment L Band Out Main 50 Q SMA female connector provides the main L band output This can also provide 24 V dc at up to 500 mA to power an up converter S _1 Table 2 16 L band Out Main Connector 2 6 12 Page 2 20 Item Specification Connector Type 50 Q SMA Female Type Analogue Connector designation L Band Out Main Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground CAUTION The modulator provides dc power to drive an up converter Do not connect equipment to the main output which might be damaged by dc power without protecting with a suitable dc block L Band Out Monitor 75 Q F type female provides an L band monitoring output which is 30 dB relative to the main output Sore Item Specification Connector Type 75 Q F type Female Type Analogue Connector designation L Band Out Monitor Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground Up Converter Power An LED is illuminated when the 24 V dc up converter power on the main output is switched on OFDM Modulator Outputs E5715 and E5750 IF Out 1 A 75 Q BNC socket provides a 70 MHz IF outpu
272. ion 4 66 4 72 output fsr option 4 66 output on video loss black screen 1 10 freeze frame 1 10 test pattern 1 10 output option 4 85 4 98 output source option 4 65 outputs ASI 1 15 overflow avoiding 3 16 what to do if it occurs 3 17 overflow error 3 17 own IP address option 4 88 P packet length option 4 90 4 97 PCR PID option 4 93 4 101 PID remapping when remultiplexing 3 12 PID option 4 44 PMT PID option 4 20 4 23 4 101 polarisation option 4 78 4 83 4 85 4 107 power dc cable colour code 2 10 dc supply information 2 9 supply dc 2 8 supply specification c B 16 power cable 2 7 power dip recovery option 4 27 power LED unlit 6 11 power supply 2 12 B 15 ac 2 7 ac specification B 15 colour code 2 7 problems 6 11 stand by switch 1 17 powering down 2 21 Indexes powering up 2 21 predefined user configurations C 3 C 7 default configuration settings C 3 preliminary checks 2 4 6 7 preset pwr low option 4 81 4 84 preset pwr norm option 4 81 4 85 preventive maintenance 6 3 production info option 4 61 profile level option 4 37 program number out option 4 100 program number option 4 20 Q qpsk demodulator option 3 25 R RAS firmware option 4 94 rate buffer 6 10 rear panel connectors 1 18 1 19 2 11 description 1 17 reflex minimum bit rates with and without performance upgrade 3 5 reflex enable option 4 45 remote control 4 24 re
273. ion Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 79 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Symbol Rate Option To access the Symbol Rate option press the Symbol Rate softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 93 Symbol Rate Options Valid Input Range Description 1U When the IF frequency is 60 MHz to 80 MHz the maximum symbol rate Min 0 4688 Msym s is 30 Msym s Max 30 0000 Msym s When the IF frequency is 50 MHz or 90 MHz the maximum symbol rate Step Size 0 0001 Msym s is 20 Msym s 2U Min Low Sym Rate 0 3000 Msym s Minimum with low symbol rate option M2 ES02 LSYM Min 1 0000 Msym s Changing the symbol rate affects the automatic Tx bandwidth video Max 30 0000 Msym s bit rate and video resolution calculations Step Size 0 0001 Msym s FEC Rate Option To access the FEC Rate option press the FEC Rate softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 94 FEC Rate Options Selected Option Description 1 2 Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 1 2 2 3 Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 2 3 3 4 Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 3 4 5 6 Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 5 6 7 8 Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 7 8 8 9 Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 8 9 NOTE Only certain combinations of Modulation Type and FEC Rate are valid Spectrum I nvert Option To access the Spectrum Invert option press the Spectrum Invert softkey in the
274. ion fitted Data X B RS422 Data X A RS232 Data B RS422 Data A RS232 Menu Menu Menu Menu Encoding Encoding Encoding Encoding Bit rate Baud Rate Bit rate Baud rate RS422 PID RS232 PID RS422 PID RS232 PID Hardware Release Test Mode maa Software Release Software Release L SNMP oid index 4 10 2 D Mode SNMP oid index Version X the number of the option slot ae Only available from Build Version 3 0 0 and later Figure 4 16 Menu Hierarchy Setup Data Menu Data A RS232 Menu 3 0 and later Encoding Option To access the Encoding option press the Encoding softkey in the Data A RS232 Menu This enables the RS 232 asynchronous data channel to be switched On or Off Baud Rate Option To access the Baud Rate option press the Baud Rate softkey in the Data A RS232 Menu This enables the baud rate of the RS 232 asynchronous data channel to be set Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 67 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 10 3 Table 4 68 Baud Rate Options Selected Option Description Selected Option Description 1200 1200 Baud rate 9600 9600 Baud rate 2400 2400 Baud rate 19200 19200 Baud rate 4800 4800 Baud rate 38400 38400 Baud rate RS232 PID Option The RS232 PID option is selected from the Data A RS232 Menu by pressing the RS232 PID softkey The option is used for entering or updating data PIDs Enter a PID
275. ion is Yes The problem lies within the Encoder If the Encoder is clearly working normally then the Power LED itself is probably at fault Call a Service Engineer The problem lies within the Encoder or power cable Proceed to next step The problem lies within the Encoder Proceed to next step Replace the fuse with one of the correct type and rating see Annex B Technical Specification If the PSU still does not work unplug the power cable and call a Service Engineer Fan s Not Working Overheating The fans can be disabled at low temperatures to allow the unit to quickly attain operational temperature In the event of overheating problems refer to Table 6 4 NOTE If Result of Action is No Rotate the Stand by Switch so that the I is at the top If the problem persists proceed to next step Proceed to next step Th bo Th e problem lies with the power source Check building circuit breakers fuse xes etc If problem persists contact the electricity supplier e problem lies with either the cable itself or with the fuse in the plug Replace the fuse or try to substitute an other cable Possible problem with the PSU module Call a Service Engineer Failure to ensure a free air flow around the unit may cause overheating This condition is detected by a temperature sensor on the Base Board which may be used to trigger an automatic alarm Instruction Manual evo
276. ions Standard European Telecommunications Standards Institute Federal Communications Commission Frequency Division Multiplex A common communication channel for a number of signals each with its own allotted frequency Forward Error Correction A method of catching errors in a transmission The data is processed through an algorithm that adds extra bits and sends these with the transmitted data The extra bits are then used at the receiving end to check the accuracy of the transmission and correct any errors Fast Fourier Transformation A fast algorithm for performing a discrete Fourier transform First In First Out A data structure or hardware buffer from which items are taken out in the same order they were put in Also known as a shelf from the analogy with pushing items onto one end of a shelf so that they fall off the other A FIFO is useful for buffering a stream of data between a sender and receiver that are not synchronised i e they not sending and receiving at exactly the same rate The area of the Earth s surface covered by a satellite s downlink transmission Also generally the area from which the satellite can receive uplink transmissions File Transfer Protocol A protocol used to transfer files over a TCP IP network Internet UNIX etc For example after developing the HTML pages for a Web site on a local machine they are typically uploaded to the Web server using FTP Unlike e mail programs in which graphics an
277. ipment designed for use within certain voltage limits NOTE The CE mark was first affixed to this product in 2001 B 8 5 C Tick Mark Cr The C Tick mark is affixed to denote compliance with the Australian Radiocommunications Compliance and Labelling Incidental Emissions Notice made under s 182 of Radiocommunications Act 1992 NOTE The C Tick mark was first affixed to this product in 2001 B 9 Cable Types The signal cable types or similar in Table B 29 are those recommended by TANDBERG Television in order to maintain product EMC compliance Table B 29 Suitable Signal Cable Types Signal Type Connector Cable RS 232 9 way D type Male Belden 8162 CM 2PR24 shielded E108998 typical Ethernet RJ 45 Alcatel Data Cable FTP 7 x 0 16 ASI Outputs BNC Canford Audio BBC 1 3 PSF type 2 Video cable SDI In Video Input BNC Canford Audio BBC 1 3 PSF H SYNC BNC Canford Audio BBC 1 3 PSF Composite Video Input BNC Canford Audio BBC 1 3 PSF Audio Input 15 way D type Male Canford Audio DFT 110 O RF BNC Canford Audio BBC1 3 PSF Audio Out XLR Canford Audio DFT cable XLR Expander Card Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page B 19 ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification B 10 B 10 1 B 10 2 Page B 20 Option Modules M2 EOM2 AUDLIN Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option Module See Section B 1 2 Audio for details M2 EOM2 DAT RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input Option Asynchronous
278. is converting the data from an uncompressible X Y form as displayed by an oscilloscope to a compressible frequency domain form as displayed by a spectrum analyser Can be forward DCT or inverse DCT Direct Digital Synthesiser The unit containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode encrypted signals Some Decoders are separate from the receiver but in satellite TV broadcasting the term is often used interchangeably as a name for an Integrated Receiver Decoder IRD The term IRD or IRD Decoder is usually associated with satellite TV broadcasting while Cable systems are based on Converters or on Set Top Boxes Converters A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target Decoder Data Identifier Method of coding using the difference between the value of a sample and a predicted value Dual In Line The most common type of package for small and medium scale integrated circuits The pins hang vertically from the two long sides of the rectangular package spaced at intervals of 0 1 inch Deutsches Institut f r Normung German Standards Institute Formerly AC 3 An audio coding system based on transform coding techniques and psychoacoustic principles The part of the satellite communications circuit that extends from the satellite to an Earth station The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a lower frequenc
279. is described in Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Section 4 9 In the Audio Setup Menu additional options are displayed for Audio XA and Audio XB where X is the option slot number where the module is fitted Refer to Annex G Audio Modes for details of Encoder locking to ensure correct performance Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 3 4 2 Assembly Rear Panel Options and Upgrades QO Encoder Analogue Composite Video Son Mase Output Transport Stream Serial Digital Interface sb IN Output Transport Stream Audio Input aupI0 IN Output Transport Stream Additional Audio Option Additional Audio Option Mono 1 Stereo 1 Right Pins 3 10 Mono 2 Stereo 1 Left Pins 1 9 Mono 3 Stereo 2 Right Pins 6 13 Mono 4 Stereo 2 Left Pins 4 12 Pins 7 15 AES EBU AES EBU Digital A reference AES EBU Digital B Pins 4 12 Digital Audio Inputs NOTE The AES EBU reference signal is provided for backwards compatibility only When using E57xx Encoders use the reference signal provided by the Base Board Figure 3 1 Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option M2 EOM2 AUDLIN The Additional Audio option module comprises Assembly 12293 and Card S11976 See Table 3 1 for the slots that it can be installed in Audio In Connector 1 8 Connect the audio cable to the AUDIO IN connector The 15 way D type male connector is used in diff
280. isation system 3 30 M2 ESO2 SM38PSK internal modulator 3 30 M2 ESO2 VBR variable bit rate 3 30 software release option 4 28 4 64 4 70 source BNC option 4 98 source option 4 54 Specification gt Index 6 Instruction Manual alarm B 13 ASI B 12 audio embedded B 8 standard B 6 encoder settings for PAL NTSC video performance figures B 4 environmental conditions B 17 ethernet B 13 H sync B 3 internal dc power supply B 16 NTSC video performance figures B 5 PAL video performance figures B 4 physical details B 16 power supply B 15 QPSK modulator card B 9 serial digital video B 3 television standards B 6 B 7 test tones B 8 spectral pol option 4 87 spectrum invert option 4 80 4 84 SPTS See single programme transport stream SPTS SSI and ASI optical output module 3 21 connectors 3 22 stand by switch 1 17 status only option 4 83 4 85 status only options remux module menu 4 97 store active config option 4 121 store configs in backup option 4 121 subtitling 1 14 summary screen summary screen and advanced menu 4 16 symbol rate option 4 77 4 80 4 84 4 106 syntax option 4 19 4 21 system b teletext 4 51 system control option 4 29 system menu 4 17 T technical specification B 3 teletext extraction 1 14 services 1 14 system b 4 51 system B 4 49 teletext all lines option 4 46 teletext data out option 4 46 teletext extraction B 5 teletext option 4 103 teletex
281. isplayed in its own window The application does not accept compressed bitmaps or multi planed bitmaps If a 24 bit colour bitmap image is loaded into Osd Creator it will be automatically converted down to a 256 colour palette E 5 3 Creating Transparency Overview Each pixel in a bmp file is represented by a red green and blue component each with a value 0 to 255 Osd Creator adds a fourth component for the transparency of the pixel This is referred to as a mix or transparency T value and is displayed in the bottom right status panel The transparency component also has a range of 0 to 255 where 0 is fully transparent and 255 is fully opaque Page E 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo Osd Creator uses a colour palette with a maximum of 256 entries Each pixel in the image is mapped to an entry in the palette which holds a value for the red green and blue and transparency component The transparency or mix is treated as a colour component so for two colours with identical red green and blue values but different transparency levels two entries will be generated in the palette When a bitmap image is loaded all colours have a transparency value of 255 opaque The area of the image that is to remain opaque is referred to as the active area The area of the image that is to be made transparent is called the inactive area Transparency can a
282. j 1 Page J 3 Remux Card In ATSC With Internal PSIP The Encoder automatically remuxes ATSC streams arriving at its inputs as in DVB The Encoder uses the PAT Program Association Table and PMT Program Map Table to work out all the associated PIDs Packet Identifier and attempt to extract the short name the long name and the Service Type from the VCT Virtual Channel Table NOTE If more than one program is present on any input the Encoder may be unable to extract any information from the VCT on that input The Encoder then maps the PIDs using the program paradigm based upon the program number If possible the program number of the input is preserved In Intelligent mode the Encoder automatically remaps the program number PIDs if a clash occurs If an active program is overwritten by another the program number PIDs of the first program are changed to non clashing values In Dumb mode the Encoder requires a user to remap clashing program numbers PIDs to prevent overwriting an active program The Encoder generates all PSIP Program System Information Protocol tables for the output stream It generates a minimum set of tables containing a minimum amount of data The tables constructed are the MGT Master Guide Table CVCT Cable Virtual Channel Table or TVCT Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table STT System Time Table RRT Rating Region Table EIT Event Information Table 0 1 2 and 3 PAT CAT Conditional Acces
283. kup softkey in the Config Menu NOTE The 16 backup configurations are stored immediately the Store Configs in Backup softkey is pressed Page 4 122 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 17 13 Factory 525 Defaults Option This option enables the 16 user configurations to be overwritten by the factory default settings for 525 line 29 97 Hz video operation Press the Factory 525 Defaults softkey in the Config Menu NOTE The Factory 525 Defaults option is activated immediately 4 17 14 Factory 625 Defaults Option The Factory 625 Defaults option is very similar to the Factory 525 Defaults option except that it overwrites the 16 user configurations with the factory default settings for 625 line 25 Hz video operation Press the Factory 625 Defaults softkey in the Config Menu NOTE The Factory 625 Defaults option is activated immediately Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 123 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally BLANK Page 4 124 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents ST TM E10076 3 Chapter 5 Web Browser Interface Figure 5 7 Build Info Version NUMDerS seser 5 7 AEL AUGO aeieeiaii 3 Figure 5 8 Build Info Release Notes 5 7 5 2 How to Set Up Internet Explorer For the Web Figure 5 9 Tools Bandwidt
284. l Service Engineer Option Slot 1 Option Slot 2 Option Slot 3 Option Slot 4 Option Slot 5 Option Slot 6 Power Encoder off then check that the option cards are firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing the module s from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Duplicate PMT PID nvalid PMT PID Duplicate PCR PID nvalid PCR PID Check the Encoder configuration System Clock Not Locked ux PCR not incrementing CA Module not present CA Module Boot Fail Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 H 4 Error Messages Video Source Related Errors Table H 2 Video Source Error Messages Error Message Action to Take Comms Error Power Encoder off then check that the Base Board is firmly seated in the chassis Do this by firmly pressing it from the rear of the Encoder into the chassis Power on the Encoder If the fault persists call Service Engineer Video Lock Composite Video Lock SDI Video Line Standard Check video input is present and that the Encoder is configured for the corre
285. l configurations cannot be selected for loading to the User FLASH Configuration Write Protection Any or all of the 16 user configurations can be write protected by selecting Write Protect Configs A password is asked for With the correct password entered the question Write protect Which Configs appears Select which configurations to protect by pressing the associated softkey in each case This toggles the write protect condition On or Off for each individual configuration The letter R when shown to the left of the config number indicates that the configuration is read only write protected Any configuration that is write protected will be displayed as read only if attempting to overwrite it Quick Configuration From the Summary Screen The sixteen predefined user configurations are a quick and easy way to configure the Encoder without having to enter individual parameters The Config Menu can be accessed directly from the summary screen see Section 4 4 2 Summary Screen by pressing the Cfgs softkey Press the Load Active Config softkey see Load Active Config Option on page 4 122 and a list of configurations is shown refer to Annex C Predefined User Configurations for details of individual configurations Select the required one by pressing the associated softkey Nothing more need be done The Encoder is ready for use Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 121 ST TM E10076 3 Oper
286. last r the same as aspect ratio value encoded frame extracted from extracted Present but no Video Index from Video Video Index data Index This could be 0 Page 4 42 GOP Structure Option To access the Group of Pictures GOP Structure option press the GOP Structure softkey in the video Encoder Menu Table 4 38 Group of Pictures Structure Options Selected Option IBBBP IBBP IBP IP IBBB IBB IB Frame NOTE IBBBPBBBPBBB Description for successive B frames IBBPBBPBBPBBP default for operation with B frames IBPBPBPBPBP for non B frame operation IPPPPPPPPPPI default for low delay mode IBBBIBBBIBBBIBBB professional editing standard IBBIBBIBBIBBIBBIBBI professional editing standard IBIBIBIBIBIBIBIBIB a professional editing standard IINIIIININNI for precise editing and compression For some GOP changes operation can be seamless but this is not guaranteed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally GOP Length Option To access the Group of Pictures GOP Length option press the GOP Length softkey in the Video Encoder Menu This enables the video GOP structure length to be set The structure length determines how regularly an frame is transmitted The frame provides a regular reference from which predicted frames can be generated thereby ensuring that predictions do not become wi
287. ldly inaccurate NOTE Some of the settings may not be available if they are not valid for use with other current encoding parameters Also changing the GOP structure automatically changes the GOP length if the current GOP length is not compatible with the selected structure Table 4 39 Group of Pictures Length Options Long GOPs Disabled Valid Input Range Description Min 1 GOP lengths available depend on GOP structure selected and the frame rate Max 15 Maximum GOP lengths are 12 for 25 Hz and 15 for 29 97 Hz Frame and IP encoding have 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 IBP and IB have 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 IBBP and IBB have 3 6 9 12 15 IBBBP and IBBB have 4 8 12 Long GOPs Option 3 1 and later NOTES 1 This option is available in Build version 3 1 0 and later 2 Only available if M2 ESO2 PU has been purchased To access the Long GOPs option press the Long GOPs softkey in the Video Encoder Menu This is used to enable or disable the use of GOP structures that are longer than 500 ms in duration Long GOP structures can improve video encoding performance particularly at low bit rates However it can lead to compression artefacts being visible on scene cuts and a periodic build up and removal of noise at the frame rate NOTE Long GOPs are not DVB compliant and should be used with caution Field Frame Option To access the Field Frame option press the Field Frame so
288. le 4 108 Transmission Options cccccesseeeteeeeeieeee 4 87 Table 4 148 Video Default Output OptionS ccceeeeee 4 111 Table 4 109 Spectral Polarity Options 0 ccceeeeeeeeteee 4 87 Table 4 149 EDH Enable Options 0 0 00 cseceseeeseeeeeeees 4 112 Table 4 110 Centre Frequency Options ccceeseeeeeeneees 4 87 Table 4 150 Embedded Audio Mode OptionS cs see 4 112 Table 4 111 Packet Length Options cccsceesesestesteeeteeees 4 90 Table 4 151 Embed Data ID Options c ceseseeeeeeeeeeees 4 112 Table 4 112 On Air Options 0 cseeseecesceseesteestesneeeteseeeeeeeees 4 90 Table 4 152 Audio Routing Options cscccscse eee 4 113 Table 4 113 Bit rate 188 and Bit rate 204 Options 4 93 Table 4 153 Downmix Mode Options cceseeeeeeeeees 4 114 Table 4 114 Clock Options cscsceseteteeetesteeetesteeeeeeeees 4 93 Table 4 154 Audio Output Options 0 00 cece eeeteeeeneees 4 114 Table 4 115 PCR PID OptionS cccscssseeetesteeeteeteseeeeees 4 93 Table 4 155 BISS Mode Options ecccsseeeeeeseeesneees 4 115 Table 4 116 Scramble Options RAS cscseseeeesneeeteeees 4 94 Table 4 156 VITS Enable Options cesesecse tees 4 116 Table 4 117 Scramble Options BISS c cesses 4 95 Table 4 157 Subtitles Enable Options csescseeeeeeeeee 4 117 Table 4 118 Host Bit rate Options ccseesceeeteestesteeete
289. lected Option Description Seamless 1 Seamless 2 Seamless 3 This gives a fixed delay which allows the bit rate to be changed over the permitted range ese 2 without a break in transmission Seamless 4 Seamless 5 Seamless 6 In the following modes the delay is a function of the bit rate selected If the bit rate is changed there is a break in transmission Mega Low Delay The generated transport stream is not fully DVB compliant and may not work with all Decoders The delay is reduced by not allowing B frames but using field pictures and other techniques Very Low Delay Delay is reduced using the same techniques as Low Delay mode GOP structure used is IP and field pictures are used Low Delay Delay is reduced by reducing the size of the video rate buffer This compromises video quality in some circumstances Standard The normal mode with no special techniques or fixed settings to reduce encoding delay NOTE See Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades Section 3 2 Bit rate Limits With Reflex Licence and or Performance Upgrade for possible differences with different combinations of Performance Upgrade M2 ESO2 PU and Reflex VBR Licence M2 ESO2 VBR 5 4 2 2 is not available unless the M2 ESO2 422 software option is enabled Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 37 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 33 Seamless Mode Bit rate Full Resolution Only Profile Seamless 1
290. lity the range should be kept to a minimum For instance it takes approximately 80 seconds to map 4000 PIDs If the External PSIP input port is changed the Encoder may fail to correctly map the PIDs on the new port This can be resolved by rebooting the Encoder Page J 4 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Annex K EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders Contents K 1 EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders ices K 3 List of Tables Table K 1 EDH Capability Matrix for E57xx Encoders K 3 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page K 1 ST TM E10076 3 EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders BLANK Page K 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 K 1 EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders Table K 1 contains EDH capability for different mux firmware versions To find the mux firmware version for a particular Encoder refer to Summary Screen More Advanced Setup System Build Menu Table K 1 EDH Capability Matrix for E57xx Encoders Software versions 2 0 0 and above excluding 3 0 1 Software versions 3 0 1 and above Mux F W V14 and below Base Card Base Card Not Modified Modified EDH does not work no errors reported Software aware that EDH is not supported EDH does not work no errors reported Software aware that EDH is not supported Various ED
291. lly A udio V ideo Menu 2U The A V Menu contains some basic video and audio options They can all be changed with the exception of the audio input levels These are only indicators of the current audio input level and are status only Only those video input selections compatible with the currently selected frame rate can be chosen from this menu For example if the current selection is PAL B G H I frame rate 25 Hz then any format except PAL M or NTSC M can be selected 29 97 Hz only Keyboard Lock 2U The softkeys can be locked out to prevent inadvertent operation see the key icon in Figure 4 5 Figure 4 5 Keyboard Lock Press the softkey adjacent to the key icon This shows the Keyboard Lock screen Press the Yes softkey to disable the softkeys They are all disabled with the exception of Unlock To enable and restore the softkey functions press the Unlock softkey This shows the Keyboard Lock screen Press the Yes softkey Navigating the Display Screens 2U Moving Through the Menu Screens Each of the menu items on the display has a connection to a softkey see Figure 4 6 Press the associated softkey to select the required option Use the and softkeys to scroll through the choices in the option or use the keypad on the far right of the display to change options unless indicated otherwise in the display The last item in the right hand corner of each menu is Quit This causes the display to revert to the pr
292. lock is locked to the HSYNC input Video The system clock is locked to the video source 4 12 8 PCR PID Option To access the PCR PID option press the PCR PID softkey in the Mux Menu This shows the Program Clock Reference Packet Identifier Table 4 115 PCR PID Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 93 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 12 9 FPGA Firmware This option indicates the version of the FPGA Firmware It is for status only and cannot be changed 4 12 10 RAS Firmware This option indicates the version of the RAS Firmware It is for status only and cannot be changed 4 12 11 BI SS Hardware This option indicates the version of the BISS Hardware It is for status only and cannot be changed 4 12 12 BISS Firmware This option indicates the version of the BISS Firmware It is for status only and cannot be changed 4 12 13 RAS Options Enabled Scramble Option To access the Scramble option press the Scramble softkey in the Mux Menu This enables RAS1 security scrambling of the Encoder transmission to be switched on or off Table 4 116 Scramble Options RAS Selected Option Description Off Encoder output is not scrambled RAS Fixed 1 Encoder output is scrambled using the fixed RAS key assigned by TANDBERG TV and preprogrammed into the Encoder RAS Fixed 2 Encoder output is s
293. lution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Page 6 11 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding Table 6 4 Fans Not Working Overheating Step Action If Result of Action is Yes If Result of Action is No 1 Check Fan Rotation Inspect the fans Check that the Encoder has been installed Possible break in the dc supply from the located at the sides of the enclosure Are with sufficient space allowed for air flow PSU module to the suspect fan s Call the fans rotating Check Base Board see Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment If a Service Engineer temperature and fan see the Build the ambient air is too hot additional cooling Menu in Figure 4 9 may be required 6 9 Disposing of This Equipment 6 9 1 General Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life Local codes and or environmental restrictions may affect its disposal Regulations policies and or environmental restrictions differ throughout the world Contact your local jurisdiction or local authority for specific advice on disposal 6 9 2 Lithium Batteries The equipment uses the Dallas Semiconductor NVRAM DS1746WP which contains a Dallas DS9034PCX Power Cap Lithium battery This cell is not a USA Environmental Protection Agency listed hazardous waste It is fully encapsulated and should not be tampered with Page 6 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Annex A Glossary The following list
294. ly when operating in the two channel mode Audio Coding Mode 2 0 L R To access the Dolby Srnd Mode option press the Dolby Srnd Mode softkey in the Audio A Menu This indicates whether a two channel Dolby Digital AC 3 bit stream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program Table 4 57 Dolby Srnd Mode Options Selected Option Description Not indicated It is not known if the bit stream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program Not Dolby Surround The bit stream is not conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program Dolby Surround The bit stream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded program Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Production I nfo Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the Production Info option press the Production I nfo softkey in the Audio A Menu This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type parameters exist within the bit stream The options are On and Off Mixing Level Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 and the Production Info parameter is set to On To access the Mixing Level option press the Mixing Level softkey in the Audio A Menu This parameter indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialog level during the final audio mixing session This makes it possible for the programme to
295. m is delivered via a link with very restricted dynamic range One example is the case of a television broadcast where sound is modulated onto an RF channel and delivered to a low cost television Receiver In this situation it is necessary to restrict the maximum peak output level to a known value with respect to dialogue level in order to prevent overmodulation Deemphasis Option NOTE This option is shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 or MPEG Layer 2 To access the Deemphasis option press the Deemphasis softkey in the Audio A Menu This parameter is used to de emphasise the pre emphasised audio To meet the specifications of the audio encoding algorithms MPEG AC 3 the audio input signal must not have any pre emphasis applied If the input signal does have pre emphasis a de emphasis filtering process must be applied prior to encoding For a digital audio input pre emphasis detection is typically achieved by monitoring the pre emphasis flags within the channel status data of the incoming digital audio signal This is adjusted automatically by the Encoder when it is set to Auto For an analogue audio signal the user must manually enable the appropriate de emphasis filter accordingly The displayed options vary according to the audio Source and Coding standard The options for AC 3 are Off Auto On Auto applies to digital only The options for MPEG 1 are Off 50 15 us CCITT J 17 DC Filter Option
296. m to be decoded from those present in the selected service 4 14 11 IRD System Status Menu 4 15 4 15 1 4 15 2 4 15 3 Page 4 118 The IRD System Status Menu has a number of options which are status only and cannot be changed TS Network Name Network ID Services Current Service ID Current TS ID Current ON ID App Version Part Number Errors Menu Overview From the 2U Encoder the Errors Menu can be Selected from the Advanced Menu by pressing the Errors softkey From the 1U Encoder the Errors Menu can be selected from the Main Menu by selecting the Errors option New errors are reported to the front panel display approximately every 30 seconds Active Errors Option To access the Active Errors option press the Active Errors softkey in the Errors Menu This gives a list of any current errors Error Masks Menu Status of Error Masks To access the Error Masks option press the Error Masks softkey in the Error Masks Menu This allows any of the error messages to be masked There are three states for the error message Alm Fail or Off e Alm Alarm shows the error message and triggers the alarm relay e Fail shows the error message and triggers both the fail and alarm relays e Off does not show the error message and does not trigger any relays Refer to Annex H Error Messages for details of all the error messages Press the softkey next to a message As the key is pressed the status of the mess
297. mary Encoder This basic configuration using a single stage of remultiplexing means that four Encoder services or streams can be combined together in the output Figure 3 4 shows a typical satellite system using one stage of remultiplexing Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 3 13 ST TM E10076 3 Options and Upgrades Up link equipment including Up converter and High P ower Amplifier Contributing Encoders VIDEO ANALOGUE Primary Master VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO Encoder with SYNC DATA Remux ASYNC DATA VIDEO ANALOGUE VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO SYNC DATA A ASYNCDA IF Output Service 1 VIDEO ANALOGUE NOTE VIDEO ANALOGUE VIDEO DIGITAL sad SIAN Senice4 AUDIO IF Output contains 4 services SYNC DATA rei Service 1 Service 2 Service 3 Service 4 ASYNC DATA Figure 3 4 Block Diagram One Stage of Remultiplexing Similarly if two stages of remultiplexing are introduced thirteen Encoders can be combined providing up to thirteen services in the remultiplexed output This is the maximum number of services that can be provided using this system see Figure 3 5 coo ao Contributing Up link equipment Encoders Encoder including with Remux Up converter and ASI x3 High Power He l pee Amplifier Service 2 Encoder with Remux Contributing Encoders Encoder
298. menu 4 117 ETS 300 294 1 14 4 51 ETS 300 472 4 51 external delay option 4 57 F factory 525 defaults option 4 122 factory default configurations 4 120 fan control option 4 28 fans 6 3 See also ventilation fault finding 6 3 6 7 breaks in transmission 6 9 fans not working overheating 6 11 preliminary checks 6 7 1 2 FEC HP and FEC LP option 4 74 FEC inner option 4 76 4 77 FEC outer option 4 76 FEC rate option 4 80 4 84 4 86 4 106 field frame option 4 43 Indexes manuals ii FPGA firmware option 4 94 frame rate 4 33 frame rate option 4 33 frame synchroniser internal 1 10 frequency option 4 73 4 76 4 77 4 84 4 106 4 107 frequency sources accuracy l 1 front panel indicators 1 16 1 17 G 5 G gateway address option 4 24 general menu 4 26 GOP length option 4 43 GOP structure option 4 42 greenwich mean time GMT 4 27 guard interval option 4 75 4 86 H handling the encoder 2 3 hardware configuration 1 5 reference number 1 5 hardware release option 4 64 4 66 4 70 hierarchy option 4 74 host bit rate option 4 96 HSYNC IN connector 2 13 ident text option 4 34 IF frequency option 4 79 IF modulation e5714 1 15 e5715 1 15 e5740 1 15 e5750 1 15 IF output main connector 2 18 monitor connector 2 19 IF output option 4 78 4 87 IF power option 4 79 impedance option 4 58 information label 1 5 input clip level option 4 65 input form
299. menu 6 5 alarm led test 6 6 alarm relay test 6 6 buzzer test 6 7 fail relay test 6 6 keyboard test 6 6 Icd display test 6 6 dialogue level option 4 60 display functions 4 9 moving through the screens 4 9 4 13 display contrast option 4 30 display errors option 4 29 T of equipment 6 12 dolby AC 3 descriptor option 4 23 dolby digital 1 10 3 30 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 dolby digital ac 3 1 12 dolby srnd mode option 4 60 DST end date ATSC 4 21 DST start date ATSC 4 21 dynamic range option 4 62 earth protective 2 8 technical 2 8 2 13 earthing 2 7 2 9 te CA PID option 4 102 capability for e57xx encoders K 3 EDH See error detection and handling See error detection and handling capability for e57xx encoders 2 13 electromagnetic compatibility EMC vi 2 3 cables used during EMC testing B 19 embedded 1 2 DID option 4 64 embedded 3 4 DID option 4 64 EMC See electromagnetic compatibility EMC enc session word option 4 96 4 101 enclosure 1 16 encoder settings for PAL NTSC video performance figures B 4 encoder type option 4 45 encoding modes 1 8 RS 232 option 4 67 encoding option 4 67 4 68 environment 2 3 environmental conditions B 17 equipment access 2 5 models 1 3 error detection and handling EDH 2 13 error masks menu 4 117 restore defaults 4 118 error menu 6 5 error messages H 3 errors
300. multiplexing block diagram one stage of remultiplexing 3 14 two stages of remultiplexing 3 14 overall block diagram 3 15 PID remapping 3 12 service name remapping 3 12 remux atsc 3 16 function 3 15 modes 3 15 using 3 16 remux mode option 4 97 remux option 3 12 remux option module B 21 connectors 3 13 replacement parts 6 4 reset encoder 3 3 reset encoder option 4 30 reset on download option 4 30 resolution and bit rate 1 9 resolution option 4 40 RF protection option 4 63 roll off factor option 4 84 roll off option 4 80 room type option 4 61 router IP address option 4 88 RS 232 and RS 422 data input connectors 3 10 RS 232 and RS 422 data input option 3 9 RS 232 data input option B 13 RS232 PID option 4 68 RS 422 data input option B 14 RS422 PID option 4 69 S s w release option 4 45 sabus address option 4 25 sabus baud rate option 4 25 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Index 5 ST TM E10076 3 Indexes sabus data bits option 4 26 sat deliv freq option 4 82 4 85 sat orb pos option 4 82 4 85 sat west east option 4 82 sat west east option 4 85 scramble option 4 94 scrambling remote authorisation system RAS 4 89 screen saver option 4 27 sd decoder option 3 23 SDI serial digital video input connector error detection and handling EDH 1 8 2 13 seamless modes 4 38 serial protocol option 4 25 service id out option 4 99
301. n the performance of external equipment as well Bit rate 188 Option The Bit rate 188 option value cannot be updated Bit rate 204 Option The Bit rate 204 option value cannot be updated Preset Pwr Low Option Refer to Preset Pwr Low Option on page 4 81 for details Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Preset Pwr Norm Option Refer to Preset Pwr Norm Option on page 4 81 for details Upconverter Power To access the Upconverter Power option press the Upconverter Power softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This option allows the 24 Vdc power on the L Band Modulator Main output to be either Enabled or Disabled NOTE The modulator provides dc power to drive an upconverter Do not connect equipment to the main output which might be damaged by dc power without protecting with a suitable dc block Sat Deliv Freq Option Refer to Sat Deliv Freq Option on page 4 82 for details Sat Orb Pos Option Refer to Sat Orb Pos Option on page 4 82 for details Sat West East Option Refer to Sat West East Option on page 4 82 for details Polarisation Option Refer to Polarisation Option on page 4 83 for details Status Only Options for the Satellite Modulator Menu The following options are for status only and cannot be changed Baseband BB Card Option BB PCB Revision Option BB Mod Status Option BB Serial No Option BB S W Release Op
302. n when Event Log or Non Volatile Event Log is clicked Option 10 Fault Reporting click version nos htm event log htm event nv log htm and Encoder Errors to display the appropriate file Save the files to a disk e Right click the hyperlink version nos htm event log htm event nv log htm and Encoder Errors e From the shortcut menu click Save Target As e Select the directory where you want to save the files and click Save e Send to the files to TANDBERG Television Also send a clone file of the Encoder configuration See Section 5 4 Cloning a File for details 5 4 Cloning a File A particularly useful feature of the Encoder is the ability to extract a clone file This can be sent to TANDBERG Television and used to configure other Encoders to exactly the same specification It is very useful when trying to reproduce a fault and also for restoring a machine after repair The file is extracted using TFTP protocol see Figure 5 15 To extract the file open a Command Prompt window and type tftp i IP address of Encoder get clone For instance tftp i 172 16 197 245 get clone The cloned file will be stored on the PC drive in the same directory that the command prompt is set to 4 Command Prompt Microsoft R gt Windows NT lt TM gt lt C gt Copyright 1985 1996 Microsoft Corp F gt tftp i 172 16 197 245 get clone Transfer successful 261728 bytes in seconds 22414 bytes s F gt Figure 5 15 TFTP
303. nables the service information level to be specified Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them 1 For further information refer to ATSC Standard Doc A 65 Program and System Information Protocol for Terrestrial Broadcast and Cable Annex D Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 19 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 20 Table 4 3 SI Level Options Selected Option Description PAT PMT CAT only Program Association Table Program Map Table Conditional Access Table PAT PMT only Program Association Table Program Map Table Off Elementary streams only On PAT PMT CAT TDT SDT NIT EIT minimum DVB On No EIT PAT PMT CAT TDT SDT NIT Major Channel Option 3 0 and later This is associated with the field major_channel_number and is used to group all channels that are to be identified as belonging to a particular broadcast corporation To access the Short Channel Name option press the Major Channel softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the Major Channel name to be changed Minor Channel Option 3 0 and later This is associated with the field minor_channel_number and is used to identify a particular channel within the major_channel_number group of channels To access the Minor Channel option press the Minor Channel softkey in the Service Info Menu Progr
304. ncoding Modes Either the 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 video encoding modes can be selected The coding mode selected affects the compression techniques encoder delay and rate control Video Inputs The standard video inputs are e SDI Serial Digital Interface ITU R BT 656 4 part 3 D1 serial format SMPTE 259 component only e Composite Analogue PAL NTSC Video Input Types The video input types which are supported are e 625 line composite PAL B D G H or I ITU R BT 624 4 e 525 line composite NTSC M with and without pedestal or PAL M ITU R BT 624 4 e Serial digital ITU R BT 656 4 part 3 input D1 serial format and ANSI SMPTE 259M component only e Internal test pattern function Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection and Handling EDH The serial digital video input supports error detection and handling EDH as defined by the specification SMPTE RP 165 1994 Error Detection Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital Interfaces for Television Video Encoding Functions The standard video encoding functions include e Support for all MP ML and 422P ML standard coding modes e Selectable bit rate operation lt 1 5 Mbit s 50 Mbit s see Table 1 3 7 e Support for the standard set of video picture resolutions 720 704 640 544 480 352 in both 625 and 525 line operation 352 supports full and half vertical resolution in both 625 and 525 line operation 8 4 2 2 is only av
305. nd softkeys can be used to change the month Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally UTC Offset Option The Universal Time Co ordinate UTC is effectively the same as Greenwich Mean Time GMT When including SI in the output transport stream the Encoder is required to output a Time and Date Table TDT This uses UTC Therefore as the local time is input on the front panel a UTC offset is needed so that the UTC time for the TDT table is generated To access the UTC Offset option press the UTC Offset softkey in the General Menu Table 4 15 UTC Offset Options Selected Option Description Min 12 Hours UTC offset A positive value indicates East of Greenwich and Max 15 Hours a negative value indicates West of Greenwich Step Size 1 Hour If the specified UTC offset is outside the valid input range a confirmation screen is displayed which shows the minimum maximum value allowed Temperature Option The Temperature option is shown in the General Menu It indicates the current internal temperature Screen Saver Option To access the Screen Saver option press the Screen Saver softkey in the General Menu Table 4 16 Screen Saver Options Selected Option Description Top Level Menu Van If no changes have been made to the Encoder for five TANDBERG minutes no softkey has been pressed the chosen screen Service Name saver appe
306. nel carrying a number of signals each with its own allotted time slot Time and Date Table Part of the DVB Service Information The TDT gives information relating to the present time and date Information repetition due to areas of little or no movement between successive frames Removed using motion estimation and compensation Inter Frame Coding A term that indicates the time of a specific action such as the arrival of a byte or the presentation of a presentation unit Time Offset Table This optional SI table supports the use of local offsets as well as the UTC time date combination The purpose of the table is to list by country the current offset from UTC and the next expected change to that offset to track when daylight saving occurs The offset resolution is to within 1 minute over a range of 12 hours from UTC A set of packetised elementary data streams and SI streams which may comprise more than one programme but with common synchronisation and error protection The data structure is defined in ISO IEC 13818 1 1 and is the basis of the ETSI Digital Video Broadcasting standards A data structure used to convey information about the transport stream payload Transport Stream Transport Stream Descriptor Table A component of the MPEG 2 PSI data This table describes which type of Transport stream it is in i e DVB ATSC etc It may also contain other descriptors Transport Stream Processor Terrestrial Virtual Ch
307. nformation technology equipment Immunity characteristics Limits and methods of measurement Conducted and radiated emission limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to the Code of Federal Regulations CFR Title 47 Telecommunications Part 15 Radio frequency devices subpart B Unintentional Radiators The Encoder and Receiver chassis complies with the requirements of ETS 300 019 2 5 Table 2 for both non operational and operational states without any special mounting or casing requirements over and above the standard mounting requirements specified ETS 300 019 2 5 European Equipment Engineering EE Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment Part 2 5 Specification of environmental tests Ground Vehicle Installations Table 2 2 The EMC tests were performed with the Technical Earth attached and configured using recommended cables see Table B 29 3 Applies only to models of the Encoder using mains ac power sources Page B 18 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification B 8 4 CE Marking The CE mark is affixed to indicate compliance with the following directives 89 336 EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility 73 23 EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equ
308. nput Monitor eececeeceseeeseeeeeteeeeeees 4 12 4 4 2 Summary Screen 4 12 4 4 3 A udio V ideo Menu 2U 4 13 4 44 Keyboard Lock 2U 4 13 Navigating the Display Screens 2U 4 13 4 5 1 Moving Through the Menu Screens 4 13 4 5 2 How to Use the Keypad 4 14 4 5 3 How to Use the Functions Associated With SOFKCYS seeseeesesseeeeesseeseeeesteseeeees 4 15 4 5 4 Display Screens 4 15 4 5 5 Menu Formats cscecesesseseeeseeeeeeteeeneeees 4 15 4 5 6 Summary Screen and Advanced Menus 4 17 Setup MONu c ccceccecececeecesecseeesesceeeeeesesneneeeeeees 4 17 Systemi MON csccscecsececesiecsssesseseseeseeeetiecetees teens 4 17 AA MTOTO cnnan 4 17 4 7 2 Service Info Menu Syntax ATSC 4 19 OVGIVIOW i occu cunncieuenvuane 4 19 Short Channel Name Option 008 4 19 ST TM E10076 3 Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Long Channel Name Option 4 19 Syntax Option cece 4 19 SI Level Option ecceeceeeseeesteeseeseeees 4 19 Major Channel Option 3 0 and later 4 20 Minor Channel Option 3 0 and later 4 20 Program Number Option s s s 4 20 Service Type Option 3 0 and later 4 20 PMT PID Option cccecseseccceseeeeseeeeees 4 20 DST Start Date Option 3 0 and later 4 21 DST End Date Option 3 0 and later 4 21 Service Info Menu Syntax DVB 4 21 OVEMNVIEW sacs ncacichaisivaddndaundaan 4 21 Netw
309. nput is lost carry on outputting last valid data NOTE 625 line with AFD set to On lines 11 and 324 will be set to Video Index 525 line with AFD set to On lines 14 and 277 will be set to Video Index Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 41 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 37 AFD Information Video Encoder Encoder AFD off Encoder AFD on Encoder AFD on No action Input Video Index on Error Extraction Sequence_header AFD user_data sequence_header AFD user_data sequence_header AFD aspect_ratio_infor active format aspect_ratio_infor active format aspect_ratio_infor user_data mation T mation E mation active_format Present ON Aspect ratio from Not present Aspect ratio from AFD value from Aspect ratio from AFD value Video Index Video Index Video Index Video Index from Video Index Present OFF Encoder setting Not present Encoder setting 0 Active region is Stays at last Stays at last the same as aspect ratio value encoded frame extracted from extracted Video Index from Video Index This could be 0 No input ON Encoder setting Not present Encoder setting 0 Active region is Stays at last Stays at last o the same as aspect ratio value encoded frame extracted from extracted Present but no Video Index from Video Video Index data Index This could be 0 No input OFF Encoder setting Not present Encoder setting 0 Active region is Stays at last Stays at
310. ntacts 5 Q in common Fail contacts Change over contacts 5 Q in common Reset contacts Short pins 9 and 5 resets the Encoder Relay Contact Rating Maximum switching power 30 W Maximum switching voltage 110 V Maximum switching current 1A B 4 4 Remote Control This connector provides an RS 232 RS 485 user interface control port that allows the unit to be controlled by an external master Table B 23 Remote Control Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Connector designation REMOTE CONTROL Connector type 9 way D type male B 4 5 RS 232 Data Asynchronous Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder RS 232 is not currently supported on the Base Board in Build version 2 0 0 but it is in the option module M2 EOM2 DAT Page B 13 ST TM E10076 3 Technical Specification B 4 6 RS 422 Data This provides an RS 422 synchronous serial communications data input interface Table B 24 RS 422 Data Specification Item Specification Safety status SELV Type ITU T V 11 RS 422 synchronous serial data and external clock Connector designation RS 422 DATA Connector type 15 way D type female Clock frequencies n x 64 kbit s from 64 kbit s to 2048 kbit s selectable or nx 56 kbit s from 56 kbit s to 1792 kbit s selectable Time stamp Not supported Operation modes Bit pipe Transport packet alignment and byte alignment relative to the incoming bit stream are arbitrary Page B 14 Instruction Manual
311. ntrol 4 9 B 13 1U 4 9 2U 4 12 establishing 4 12 summary screen and advanced menu 4 17 ocal date option 4 26 ocal time option 4 26 ock keyboard softkeys 4 13 ogical chan desc option 4 24 ogical channel option 4 24 4 100 ogo creating and downloading 5 8 ogo option 4 36 ogo overlay 5 8 ong channel name option 4 19 ong GOPs option 4 43 ow pass filter option 4 64 M ae ag basic interoperable scrambling system BISS 3 5 M2 EOM2 ASI OPT and M2 EOM2 SSI US SMPTE 310 and ASI optical output 3 21 Index 4 Instruction Manual M2 EOM2 AUDLIN additional audio input 3 6 connectors 2 14 3 7 M2 EOM2 DAT RS 232 and RS 422 data input 3 9 B 20 M2 EOM2 DAT RS 232 and RS 422 data input option connectors 3 10 M2 EOM2 DEC 3 23 M2 EOM2 IP 3 27 M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD 3 25 M2 EOM2 REMUX Remux B 21 M2 EOM2 REMUX remux option 3 12 B 21 connectors 3 13 M2 EOM2 SATDEMOD 3 26 M2 EOM2 XLR 3 18 MAC address option 4 24 major channel ATSC 4 20 major channel option 4 100 mechanical inspection 2 4 menu diagnostics 6 5 menu formats 4 15 menu screens moving through 4 9 4 13 minor channel option 4 100 minor channel option 4 20 mixing level option 4 61 mod type option 4 79 4 84 model number description 1 4 model number option 4 26 modulation mode option 4 86 modulation option 4 79 4 84 modulation type option 4 74 4 76 4 77 motion estimation 1 9 fully exhaustive 1 6 macro block 1 9 m
312. nu option Multiple Regions Multiple Regions may be displayed To define an additional Region change the Region Number at the top of the Region Operations box and repeat the Download procedure Buttons in the Region Operations box only affect the current Region number with the exception of Remove All The current Region can also be changed by double clicking on the image in the main window The current region has a brighter border in the main window Uncheck the Images box to display the Region number in the main window instead of the image Region Interference If two Regions share a horizontal line they may interfere This means that when both Regions are Shown only one actually appears in the video stream The application warns if this is the case When one of the Regions is Hidden the other may be Shown as normal Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo E 8 Fault finding If there appears to be a problem creating or downloading a logo check the following If the Communications box reads Error Creating Socket there may be a problem with the PC s network set up or another application may be using the TFTP socket number e If the Communications box reads Waiting For Response for a long time the target Encoder is either busy or not visible on the network Abort the transfer before changing the IP address e Large images take time to appear
313. o ensure a sufficient number of transitions to maintain system synchronisation when the user data stream contains an insufficient number of 1s to do so B3ZS is the North American equivalent of the European HDB3 Refers to hardware or software that is compatible with earlier versions Bouquet Association Table Part of the service information data The BAT provides information about bouquets It gives the name of the bouquet and a list of associated services The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises information symbols that may consist of a number of possible states Equivalent to bit rate when the symbols only have two states 1 and 0 Measured in Baud Bit Error Rate A measure of transmission quality The rate at which errors occur in the transmission of data bits over a link It is generally shown as a negative exponent e g 10 7 means that 1 in 10 000 000 bits are in error Basic Interoperable Scrambling System Non proprietary encryption from EBU Tech3290 The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises two logic states 1 and 0 Measured in bit s An 8 row by 8 column matrix of luminance sample values or 64 DCT coefficients source quantised or dequantised A collection of services TV radio and data or any combination of the three grouped and sold together and identified in the SI as a group A single service may be in several bouquets Bi directionally Predictive Coded Picture Frame A pi
314. o be changed 4 7 3 Service Info Menu Syntax DVB Overview The Service Info Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the Service I nfo softkey This menu provides options for configuring the Service Information SI parameters transmitted in the output transport stream See Figure 4 9 for the menu structure when the Syntax option has been set to DVB Network Name Option To access the Network Name option press the Network Name softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the network name to be changed The information is included in the Network Information Table NIT Service Provider Option To access the Service Provider option press the Service Provider softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the service provider name to be changed The information is included in the Service Description Table SDT Service Name Option To access the Service Name option press the Service Name softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the service name to be changed The information is included in the SDT Syntax Option To access the Syntax option for the output Transport Stream and associated SI PSIP press the Syntax softkey in the Service Info Menu See Syntax Option page 4 19 for details SI Level Option To access the SI Level option press the SI Level softkey in the Service Info Menu This enables the service information level to be specified Use the and softkeys to scroll through the o
315. o channel interference and other impairments can cause some bits to be received in error Therefore Forward Error Correction FEC consisting of Reed Solomon RS coding followed by convolution coding is used to add extra bits to the transmitted signal This allows a large number of errors at the receive end to be corrected by convolutional Viterbi decoding followed by RS decoding Five convolutional rates are available 7 3 y4 6 and g These provide different compromises between bit rate and ruggedness The modulation scheme used on each carrier can either be QPSK 16QAM or 64QAM These also provide different compromises between bit rate and ruggedness QPSK being the most rugged Four guard intervals are available 32 1 16 1 8 and Y4 These are used to reduce the effects of intersymbol interference at the receive end caused by multipath propagation The output of the modulator is 70 MHz IF for connection to a suitable radio transmitter Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 7 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder 1 3 1 3 1 Summary of Features Video Encoding MPEG 2 Encoding The Encoder processes a broadcast standard video signal into a compressed encoded bit stream in accordance with e The MPEG 2 Main profile Main level MP ML specification ISO IEC 13818 e The MPEG 2 4 2 2 profile Main Level 422P ML specification ISO IEC 13818 Video E
316. ock countries of Europe Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page F 5 ST TM E10076 3 Band Plans Table F 9 Ireland UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz lA 48 500 F 194 000 IB 56 500 IG 202 000 IC 64 500 H 210 000 ID 178 000 IJ 218 000 IE 186 000 Table F 10 South Africa UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz 4 178 000 9 218 000 5 186 000 10 226 000 6 194 000 11 234 000 7 202 000 12 242 000 8 210 000 13 250 180 Table F 11 French Overseas PIA UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz 4 178 000 7 202 000 5 186 000 8 210 000 6 194 000 9 218 000 Table F 12 France UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz A 45 000 2 186 750 B 53 000 3 194 750 C 61 000 4 202 750 Cl 57 750 5 210 750 1 178 750 6 218 750 Page F 6 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Band Plans Table F 13 Japan UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz in MHz in MHz 1 93 000 18 503 000 35 605 000 52 707 000 2 99 000 19 509 000 36 611 000 53 713 000 3 105 000 20 515 000 37 617 000 54 719 000 4 173 000 21 521 000 38 623 0
317. odes 5 Installed Modules Microsoft Intemet E xploces I a ER View Favomtes Too Heb e IES SAPPE 2 B a 3 roa 3 B 4S Ww Back Hitoy Mal Pret Eck Adress 0 tec 172 16 197 242 eg bievinoddes Oo Links 2 est cl the Wb 2 Charen Gude 2 Customize Links 2 Fiew Hola intent Explem News intel Start 42 Windows Installed Modules View of Encoder Rear Panel oem en Empty Empty lE Done Te Local neaei Figure 5 14 Installed Modules Option 6 Licenced Features shows a list of all the features which are and can be enabled when the appropriate licence is purchased Option 7 SNMP MI Bs this option is password protected It allows the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Management Information Base MIB files to be downloaded from the Encoder to the PC The password is available from TANDBERG Television Customer Services under a non disclosure agreement NDA 2 A definition of management items for some network component that can be accessed by a network manager A MIB includes the names of objects it contains and the type of information retained Page 5 10 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface Option 8 Encoder Errors shows a list of Active Errors Masked Active Errors and Latched Errors Option 9 Event Log shows the events and tests which have been performed since the Encoder was last switched o
318. oding Mode is set to Dual Mono Page 4 58 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally SMPTE 302M Standard Option NOTES 1 This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Linear PCM or Dolby E Pass Thru 2 Problems may be experienced with some Receivers if the Encoder and Decoder are not using the same version of SMPTE 302M specification e g either 1998 or 2000 The Encoder can be set up to work in either standard To access the SMPTE 302M Standard option press the SMPTE 302M Standard softkey in the Audio A Menu This enables the SMPTE 302M standard that the audio is being encoded to to be specified Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them Table 4 53 SMPTE 302M Standard Options Selected Option Description 1998 Standard Refers to the 1998 SMPTE 302M standard 2000 Standard Refers to the 2000 SMPTE 302M standard Channel Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Linear PCM or Dolby E Pass Thru To access the Channel option press the Channel softkey in the Audio A Menu This indicates the number of the audio channel Table 4 54 Channel Options Valid Input Range Description Min 0 This value is written to the channel identification field in the Max 15 SMPTE 302M AES3 data elementary stream header Bit Stream Mode Option N
319. oding Resolutions To provide optimum picture quality over the full range of supported bit rates the encoded picture resolution is controlled automatically according to the video bit rate Alternatively the user can override this and select manual control if desired Coding resolutions are shown in Table 1 4 11 Noise reduction is only available when software option M2 ESO2 NR is purchased 12 The video bit rate depends on the Multiplexer bit rate which is set 13 4 2 2 is only available when software option M2 ESO2 422 is purchased Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 9 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder 1 3 2 Table 1 4 Video Coding Resolutions 625 Line Modes 720 pixels x 576 lines 704 pixels x 576 lines 640 pixels x 576 lines 544 pixels x 576 lines 480 pixels x 576 lines 352 pixels x 576 lines 352 pixels x 288 lines 525 Line Modes 720 pixels x 480 lines 704 pixels x 480 lines 640 pixels x 480 lines 544 pixels x 480 lines 480 pixels x 480 lines 352 pixels x 480 lines 352 pixels x 240 lines Internal Frame Synchroniser An internal frame synchroniser is provided to accommodate slight differences between the incoming frame rate and that generated by the stable reference used by the Encoder Output on Video Loss The Encoder can be software configured to show in the event of video input loss either e Atest pattern with or without ident text
320. oloured Repeat until the whole of the inactive area is transparent If parts of the active area have become transparent uncheck the Changes Affect Palette box and paint with the right button to correct these areas Zoom in if necessary If there is no general colour for the inactive area uncheck the Changes Affect Palette box and paint the inactive area manually with the left mouse button Use the right button to correct mistakes Trace around the edge of the area with a medium brush then use the large brush for wide areas Zoom in to do the fine corrections Adding Transparency Using a Key File A key file is a Bitmap bmp file of the same size as the source file with the active area of the image coloured white the inactive area coloured black and intermediate levels of transparency coloured grey Create the key file using a drawing package Colour the active area white and the inactive area black Save as a bmp file Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page E 7 ST TM E10076 3 Creating and Downloading a Logo E 5 4 E 5 5 Page E 8 Click the Key File toolbar button Select the key file The inactive area of the image should now be transparent background coloured Change the background colour to verify that the correct area is transparent Editing the Palette The palette may be displayed alongside the image by clicking the Show Hide Palette toolbar button The transparency of each
321. on option 4 78 symbol rate option 4 77 west east option 4 78 descriptor type terrestrial band plan option 4 72 bandwidth option 4 73 carriers option 4 75 Indexes channel option 4 73 FEC HP and FEC LP option 4 74 frequency option 4 73 guard interval option 4 75 hierarchy option 4 74 modulation type option 4 74 other frequency option 4 75 descriptor type option 4 72 output format ofdm modulator bandwidth option 4 86 bit rate 188 option 4 87 bit rate 204 option 4 87 centre frequency option 4 87 FEC rate option 4 86 guard interval option 4 86 IF output option 4 87 modulation mode option 4 86 OFDM S W release option 4 87 output option 4 85 spectral pol option 4 87 transmission option 4 87 Pa E Satellite modulator itrate 188 option 4 81 4 84 bit rate 2048 option 4 81 FEC rate option 4 80 IF frequency option 4 79 IF output option 4 78 IF power option 4 79 mod type option 4 79 modulation option 4 79 polarisation option 4 83 preset pwr low option 4 81 preset pwr norm option 4 81 roll off option 4 80 sat deliv freq option 4 82 sat orb pos option 4 82 sat west east option 4 82 spectrum invert option 4 80 status only option 4 83 symbol rate option 4 80 tx bandwidth factor option 4 81 tx bandwidth option 4 81 4 84 output format satellite modulator I band output FEC rate option 4 84 frequency option 4 84 band output option 4 83 l band po
322. option 4 60 dynamic range option 4 62 embedded 1 2 DID option 4 64 embedded 3 4 DID option 4 64 external delay option 4 57 hardware release option 4 64 impedance option 4 58 input level left option 4 55 input level r right option 4 56 Index 8 Instruction Manual language left right option 4 58 lip sync offset option 4 57 low pass filter option 4 64 mixing level option 4 61 original option 4 62 production info option 4 61 RF protection option 4 63 room type option 4 61 SMPTE 302M standard option 4 59 software release option 4 64 source option 4 54 audio xlr menu firmware release option 4 66 hardware release option 4 66 input clip level option 4 65 input format 4 65 input termination option 4 65 output format option 4 66 output fsr option 4 66 output source option 4 65 B build menu 4 31 C configs menu 4 118 D data A RS232 menu baud rate option 4 67 d mode option 4 69 delay option 4 68 4 69 encoding option 4 67 RS232 PID option 4 68 data A RS 232 menu SNMP oid index option 4 68 data B RS422 menu bit rate option 4 69 RS422 PID option 4 69 SNMP oid index option 4 69 test mode option 4 69 version 4 69 data menu 4 66 data XA RS232 menu hardware release option 4 70 software release option 4 70 data XA RS232 menu 4 70 data XB RS422 menu 4 70 hardware release option 4 70 software release option 4 70 diagnostics menu 4 118
323. or Professional 110 Q Same as digital source Table B 41 Data Output SD Decoder Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Item Safety Status Connector Type Connector Designation RS 232 Asynchronous Data Data Rate Standards RS 422 Synchronous Data Data Rate Specification SELV 9 way D type Female Data 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bit s EIA RS232C ITU T BT V 24 V 28 In integer multiples of 56 kbit s and 64 kbit s up to 2 048 Mbit s Page B 25 Technical Specification B 10 6 M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD QPSK Demodulator Card Option NOTE The M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD QPSK Demodulator Card Option is supported by Encoder software version 3 1 and later Table B 42 IF In QPSK Demodulator Item Specification Safety Status SELV Connector Type BNC Female Connector Designation IF IN Input Impedance 75Q Input Power 20 dBm to 40 dBm Input Frequency 50 MHz to 180 MHz Capture Range Up to 5 MHz Signal Type BPSK as per ETSI TR 101 198 option QPSK as per EN 300 421 DVB S Symbol Rate 1 45 Msym s 0 3 45 Msym s optionally Table B 43 RF In QPSK Demodulator Item Specification Safety Status SELV Connector Type F type Female Connector Designation RF1 RF 2 Input Impedance 150 Input Power 25 dBm to 65 dBm Input Frequency 950 MHz to 2150 MHz Capture Range Up to 5 MHz Signal Type BPSK as per ETSI TR 101 198 option
324. ork Name Option c cceceeeees 4 21 Service Provider Option cceceee 4 21 Service Name Option ceecceeeeeeee 4 21 SyMtax Option cece 4 21 SI Level Option ceceseseeeceseeseeseseeeteees 4 21 Network Id Option c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 22 Service Id Option cecccccseceeeeeseeeeeees 4 22 Transport Stream Id Option ccee 4 23 Service Type Option 3 0 and later 4 23 PMT PID Options 4 23 Dolby AC 3 Descriptor Option 3 0 and later ji aeria aaaea niaaa andana 4 23 Logical Chan Desc Option 0 0 cee 4 24 Logical Channel Option cceceee 4 24 Remote Control Menu ccceeeeeeees 4 24 OVOIVIOW eceseecescceesesecseeeeeestsneseeeeteateneeeaees 4 24 IP Address Option ccccscseeeeeeeeneees 4 24 MAC Address Option ccceeeeeeeees 4 24 Network Mask Option c cceceeees 4 24 Gateway Address Option cceeeseeeee 4 24 Operating the Equipment Locally SNMP Master Option ccceeeeeeeeees 4 25 Last SNMP Master Option cce 4 25 Last SNMP Poll Option ccecseee 4 25 SNMP Trap IP Option s 4 25 SABus Address Option ccccceeceee 4 25 Serial Protocol Option cccceeeee 4 25 SABus Baud Rate Option ceccee 4 25 SABus Data Bits Option ceeeeee 4 26 4 7 5 General Menu ccececeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 26 OVENVIEW disainima 4 26 Model Number Option
325. orm Option To access the Preset Pwr Norm option press the Preset Pwr Norm softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 97 Preset Pwr Norm Options Valid Input Range Description Min 20 0 dBm Max 5 0 dBm Step Size 0 1 dBm Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 81 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Sat Deliv Freq Option To access the Sat Deliv Freq option press the Sat Deliv Freq softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu Table 4 98 Sat Deliv Freq Options Valid Input Range Description Min 0 0000 GHz Max 999 9999 GHz Step Size 0 0001 GHz Sat Orb Pos Option To access the Sat Orb Pos option press the Sat Orb Pos softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enables the orbital position of the satellite to be specified Table 4 99 Sat Orb Pos Options Valid Input Range Description Min 0 0 Max 360 0 Step Size 0 1 If the specified orbital position is outside the valid input range a confirmation screen is displayed which shows the maximum minimum value allowed Sat West East Option To access the Sat West East option press the Sat West East softkey in the Satellite Modulator Menu This enables the satellite west east flag to be specified indicating whether the satellite position is in the western or eastern part of the orbit Table 4 100 Sat West East Options Selected Option Description West Satellite position is
326. ost Freeze Ident The last video frame received is encoded if the video input is lost Text message is superimposed Black Ident A black screen is encoded if the video input is lost Text message is superimposed Bars amp Red Ident Bars and red test pattern is encoded if the video input is lost Text message is superimposed Input Termination Option To access the Input Termination option press the Input Termination softkey from the Video Source Menu This enables the termination of the analogue video input to be switched On or Off Noise Reduction Option This option enables the noise reduction feature to be switched on at different levels or off The feature can be used when the incoming picture material is corrupted by high frequency noise such as white noise When noise reduction is enabled the Encoder applies sophisticated edge preserving filters on the incoming material and removes the noise which can reduce the encoding difficulty considerably To access the Noise Reduction option press the Noise Reduction softkey from the Video Source Menu The three levels of noise reduction are in increasing order of noise reduction capability They are independent of video content All three settings are noise level adaptive i e it is not necessary to change the setting for different noise levels Once a level has been selected it can be left enabled When a clean source is used the noise reduction dynamically switches off and t
327. ot 5 Option Slot 1 3 6 g Option Slot 3 Option Slot 1 ial i Option Slot 2 IF OUT 1 IF OUT 2 Figure 1 13 5750 2U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors 1 4 5 Boards in the Basic Encoder The basic Encoder contains two boards mounted horizontally in the enclosure see Table 1 8 Option modules can be fitted in the remaining slots see Equipment Models on page 1 3 and Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades Table 1 8 Boards in the Basic Encoder Model Number Card E5714 11171 Encoder Base Board 12376 Tuneable QPSK Modulator E5715 11171 Encoder Base Board 12524 OFDM Modulator E5740 IF 11171 Encoder Base Board 10872 70 140 MHz Satellite Modulator E5740 LBAND 11171 Encoder Base Board 12695 L Band Satellite Modulator E5750 11171 Encoder Base Board S12524 OFDM Modulator Access to the modules or boards in the basic Encoder is not required for normal operation and may invalidate the warranty Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 19 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder BLANK Page 1 20 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents Dike MO CUCOON iriserai 2 3 211 Read This First visiscistevtsnencalaneteneren 2 3 2 12 GONG tinicavinniiaunandidauniid 2 3 2 1 3 Site Requirements crrr 2 3 Power Supplies eects 2 3 ENV rONMENt errr 2 3 Lightning Protec
328. output transport stream Each new service defaults to Off unless it was connected to the Remultiplexer the last time the Encoder was powered when it assumes its previous state It is possible to remultiplex transport streams that have already been scrambled by BISS encryption but it is not possible to remultiplex transport streams that have already been scrambled using RAS encryption Also it is not possible to scramble a service that has already been scrambled ATSC Remultiplexing The Remultiplexer can work with ATSC compliant transport streams It remaps the services following the ATSC program paradigm The Encoder can be configured to generate the PSIP for the output transport stream It generates the minimum number of tables to give an ATSC compliant output transport stream i e Event Information Tables EIT 0 1 2 and 3 the System Time Table STT the Rating Region Table RRT the Master Guide Table MGT and either the Cable Virtual Channel Table CVCT or the Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table TVCT depending on the delivery descriptor set It will not pass through any tables that are present on the ASI input transport streams Alternatively an external PSIP generator can be connected to one of the Remultiplexer inputs and the remultiplexer programmed to pass through a range of PIDs thus inserting the PSIP into the output transport stream For more information about using the Remux card in ATSC with internal and ext
329. oving the equipment 2 4 MP ML 1 8 MPEG 1 audio 1 12 MPEG 2 1 8 1 10 1 11 B 6 multicast IP address option 4 88 multiplexer mux menu 4 89 RAS option menu 4 89 mux fault finding 6 10 name in option 4 99 name out option 4 99 navigating the menus 1U 4 10 Neilsen AMOL 4 49 network id option 4 22 network mask option 4 24 4 88 network name DVB 4 21 no services option 4 30 noise reduction 6 9 noise reduction option 4 35 notes meaning of vi 0 OFDM S W release option 4 87 on air option 4 90 op video loss option 4 35 operation 4 9 evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 option modules B 20 en demodulator option 3 26 additional audio input module 3 6 basic interoperable scrambling system BISS 3 5 hardware 3 3 how to see which are fitted enabled 3 5 ip output card option 3 27 M2 EOM2 AUDLIN audio additional and linear PCM B 20 M2 EOM2 DAT RS 232 and RS 422 data input B 20 M2 EOM2 REMUX Remux B 21 number 3 4 positions 3 3 qpsk demodulator option 3 25 QPSK modulator card B 9 remux option module B 21 RS 232 and RS 422 data input option 3 9 sd decoder option 3 23 software 3 4 SSI and ASI optical outputs option 3 21 use 3 5 what s available 3 3 xlr expander card option 3 18 orbital position option 4 78 original option 4 45 4 62 other frequency option 4 75 output DVB ASI 2 15 on video loss 1 10 output format opt
330. pairs They may be independently configured as either analogue or digital The left channel is used to input digital audio The Encoder is supplied with a break out cable which plugs into this connector and provides a more convenient means of connecting the audio signals via five connectors There are four XLR female connectors with the fifth cable being a BNC which provides an AES EBU 75 Q digital reference output Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment Table 2 6 Audio In Connector Pin Signal Pin Signal Analogue Digital Analogue Digital 1 Left Channel A AES EBU A 9 Left Channel A AES EBU A 2 Not connected 10 Right Channel A 3 Right Channel A 11 Not connected 4 Left Channel B AES EBU B 12 Left Channel B AES EBU B 5 Not connected 13 Right Channel B 6 Right Channel B 14 ot connected 7 AES EBU 15 AES EBU Reference Signal Reference Ground 8 Not connected NOTES 1 In analogue mode termination is either 20 KQ or 600 Q In AES EBU mode termination is 110 Q When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Q termination The digital audio input does not support SPDIF In order to comply with EMC regulations use the audio break out cable supplied with the unit Pa ge te 2 6 7 ASI OUT 1 2 and 3 Outputs Connect the Multiplexer or Modulator ASI cable to the N appropriate
331. palette entry may be altered in the same way as the image itself using the left and right mouse buttons Changes to the palette are shown immediately on the image The Red Green Blue and Mix component of the pixel or palette entry under the cursor can be seen on the status bar at the bottom of the screen Palette Reallocation When the level of transparency of a pixel in the image is changed a new colour is effectively created Whenever the image is downsampled or saved the palette is rebuilt to reflect the actual colours in the image As part of this process pixels which have a mix value of zero are mapped to palette entry zero which is defined as Red Green Blue Mix 0 The original colour information is lost and the right mouse button will not change the pixel back to its original colour To rebuild the palette during editing click the Reallocate Palette toolbar button Downsampling Click the Downsample toolbar button A dialog box appears asking for a downsampling ratio This can be specified directly or by entering the desired image size Click OK to downsample the image The downsampling algorithm includes a filter so the boundary between the active and inactive areas softens slightly Zoom in and check that the correct areas are transparent and make corrections if necessary NOTE Once the image has been downsampled the process cannot be reversed to change the image back to its original size Saving the o
332. perature is low Refer to Annex B Technical Specification for more information 2 During initialisation invalid PIDs may appear momentarily in the transport stream 2 7 3 Powering Down To power down the Encoder remove the power supply connection at the rear of the unit Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 21 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment 2 8 2 8 1 2 8 2 2 8 3 Page 2 22 Setting the Encoder IP Address Methods of Changing the Encoder IP Address If for any reason the IP address has to be changed this can be achieved via the front panel menus see Section 4 7 4 Remote Control Menu or by Telnet see Section 2 8 3 Via Telnet The user may also set the network mask NOTE The new IP address is only accepted after the Encoder is repowered From the Front Panel Menus To access the IP Address option from the front panel menus press the IP Address softkey in the Remote Control Menu Edit the IP address via the keypad and then press the Enter softkey P Address lt Left Encoder P Address Ri ght 172 16 248 91 Q O Update usi ng softkeys Via Telnet A Telnet program is supplied with Microsoft Windows To communicate with the Encoder through Telnet 1 From DOS type telnet lt I P address gt 2 Press Enter for the user name and press Enter for the password 3 The Main Telnet Menu is displayed Telnet 172 16 197 245 Connec
333. prehensive 12 month warranty Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service Support For stand alone equipment then TANDBERG Television BASI C Advantage is the value for money choice for you BASIC provides you with year by year Service long after the warranty has expired For systems support you can choose either Gold or Silver Advantage These packages are designed to save you costs and protect your income through enlisting the help of TANDBERG Television support specialists VOYAGER Advantage is the truly mobile service solution This provides a package specifically designed to keep you mobile and operational Call TANDBERG Sales for more details Where to Find Us Europe Middle East 44 0 23 8048 4455 and Africa Fax 44 0 23 8048 4467 fieldservice tandbergtv com Americas 1 321 308 0470 fieldservice americas tandbergtv com China 86 10 6539 1109 Beijing 852 2530 3215 Hong Kong fieldservice asia tandbergtv com Australia NZ 612 9360 2053 fieldservice australia tandbergtv com Internet Address http www tandbergtv com Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page vii ST TM E10076 3 Preliminary Pages Technical Training Training Courses TANDBERG Television provides a wide range of training courses on the operation and maintenance of our products and on their supporting technologies TANDBERG can provide both regularly scheduled courses and training tailored to indivi
334. press the VPS Line 16 softkey in the VBI Menu This enables the extraction of VPS Video Programming System data from line 16 of the video input The option can be turned On or Off 4 2 2 is only available when software option M2 ESO2 422 is purchased Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 47 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally WSS Line 23 Option NOTES 1 This option is only available when Frame Rate is 25 Hz 2 Aspect ratio will change when WSS is enabled To access the WSS Line 23 option press the WSS Line 23 softkey in the VBI Menu This enables the extraction of WSS Wide Screen Signalling data from line 23 of the video input The option can be turned On or Off Closed Caption Option To access the Closed Caption option press the Closed Caption softkey in the VBI Menu This enables the extraction of closed captioning data from line 21 of the video input The option can be turned On or Off CC Format Option To access the CC Format option press the CC Format softkey in the vBI Menu This inserts the closed captions as user data in the video stream in the selected format NOTE This option is only displayed if the video frame rate is set to 29 97 Hz Table 4 42 CC Format Options Selected Option Description TANDBERG NDS ATSC Closed Caption format Auto Detect VITC Option To access the Auto Detect VITC option
335. ptions and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 21 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 5 SI Level Options Selected Option Description PAT PMT CAT only Program Association Table Program Map Table Conditional Access Table PAT PMT only Program Association Table Program Map Table Off On On No EIT Network Id Option To access the Network Id option press the Network Id softkey in the Service Info Menu This enables the Network Identity to be specified Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them The information is included in the NIT NOTE This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control Table 4 6 Network Id Options Selected Option Description Min 0 Network identity number Max 65535 Step Size 1 Service Id Option This option ties the SDT to the PMT and is the same as the Program Number in ATSC To access the Service Id option press the Service Id softkey in the Service Info Menu This enables the Service Identity to be specified Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them The information is included in the PAT PMT SDT EIT and NIT NOTE This option is not displ
336. r Encoder for them to be available AUX TWO INTERNATIONAL SOUND INT AUDIO 1 AAA AUDIO 2 AAB AUDIO 3 AAC AUDIO 4 AAD AUDIO 5 AAE AUDIO 6 AAF AUDIO 7 AAG AUDIO 8 AAH AUDIO 9 AA AUDIO 10 AA AUDIO 11 AAK AUDIO 12 AAL AUDIO 13 AA AUDIO 14 AAN AUDIO 15 AAO AUDIO 16 AAP 1 International Standards Organisation Page D 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents ST TM E10076 3 Annex E Creating and Downloading a Logo N T costa E3 Figure E 3 Files for OSD Creator and Loader a E 5 Figure E 4 OSD Creator Screen Showing Example Logo E 6 E 2 Summary Of Features E 3 Figure E 5 OSD Loader Screen Showing Example Logo E 9 i Figure E 6 625 Line OSD Co ordinates in Active Picture E 11 E 3 OSD Programs Built Into the Encoder sass E 3 Figure E 7 525 Line OSD Co ordinates in Active Picture E 11 E 4 Creating a Logo Using OSD Creator eee E 5 ES Using OSD Creator wis cciticsiei sinister E 5 E 5 1 OVO IVIGW cescssesesessessnssssstssrssssrssseesssseeeseess E 5 E 5 2 Loading a DMP File ccccssssssssseesseeeesees E 6 E 5 3 Creating Transparency cscs E 6 OVOIVIOW ccesesstesessesstssesstssesesrssseesesseeessseees E 6 Adding Transparency Manually sses E 7 Adding Transparency Using a Key File E 7 Editing the Palette cscssssssssressresees E 8 Palette Reallocation ccc E 8 E 5 4 Downsampling scccc
337. r Services for details Figure 4 12 VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for 525 line Systems Page 4 50 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally FIELD 1 FIELD 2 7 Teletext System B or Inverted Teletext VITC Video Index 319 Same options as line 7 Closed Caption Wide Screen Signalling WSS Off Video Programming System VPS 8 Same options as line 7 320 Same options as line 7 9 Same options as line 7 321 Same options as line 7 10 Same options as line 7 322 Same options as line 7 11 Same options as line 7 323 Same options as line 7 12 Same options as line 7 324 Same options as line 7 13 Same options as line 7 325 Same options as line 7 14 Same options as line 7 326 Same options as line 7 15 Same options as line 7 327 Same options as line 7 16 Same options as line 7 328 Same options as line 7 17 Same options as line 7 329 Same options as line 7 18 Same options as line 7 330 Same options as line 7 19 Same options as line 7 331 Same options as line 7 20 Same options as line 7 332 Same options as line 7 21 Same options as line 7 333 Same options as line 7 22 Same options as line 7 334 Same options as line 7 23 Same options as line 7 Start of coded video 335 Same options as line 7 24 Same options as line 7 ACTIVE VIDEO 336 Same options as line 7 Start of coded video 25 ACTIVE VIDEO 337 ACTIVE VIDEO 310 622 311 Equalising Pulses 623 ACTIVE VIDEO Equalis
338. r a range of service options that will meet your needs at a price that makes sense It s called the TANDBERG Advantage Warranty All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service Support For stand alone equipment then TANDBERG Television BASI C Advantage is the value for money choice for you BASIC provides you with year by year Service long after the warranty has expired For systems support you can choose either Gold or Silver Advantage These packages are designed to save you costs and protect your income through enlisting the help of TANDBERG Television support specialists VOYAGER Advantage is the truly mobile service solution This provides a package specifically designed to keep you mobile and operational Call TANDBERG Sales for more details Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 6 4 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding Errors and Diagnostics Menus When to Use 6 4 1 6 4 2 Them Error Messages More Advanced Menu Errors Front Panel Diagnostics Menu Active Errors Error Masks Quit Figure 6 1 Finding the Errors Menu Investigate any run time errors by pressing the Active Errors softkey in the Errors Menu see Figure 6 1 Current errors are displayed NOTES
339. rate Options Selected Option Description Min 0 0000 Mbit s Multiplexer Host bit rate when in baseband output format and ASI output mode Max 54 0000 Mbit s Changing the bit rate affects the automatic video bit rate i and video resolution calculations Step Size 0 0001 Mbit s If the specified bit rate is outside the valid input range a confirmation screen is displayed which shows the maximum minimum value allowed Remux Module Menu Remux Mode Option To access the Remux Mode option press the Remux Mode softkey in the Remux Module Menu See Chapter 3 Options Section 3 6 4 Function of Remultiplexer for details of remux modes Table 4 119 Remux Mode Options Selected Option Description Intelligent PID clashes are automatically resolved Dumb PID clashes have to be changed manually The user must ensure that all service clashes are resolved The Encoder will not action a PID change that will cause a PID clash Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 97 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally NOTE If Intelligent mode is selected the Action On PID Error option see page 4 30 in the Setup System Advanced Menu must be set to Auto Correct If Dumb mode is selected the Action On PID Error option must be set to Raise Alarm Packet Length Option This option indicates the packet length See Section This option indicates the packet length See Section 4 12 4 Packe
340. rating instructions If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged 6 When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance ul Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 6 3 ST TM E10076 3 Preventive Maintenance and Fault finding 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3 Page 6 4 Replacement Parts When replacement parts are required be sure the service technician has used parts specified by the manufacturer or which have the same characteristics as the original part Unauthorised substitutions may result in fire electric shock or other hazards Checks on Completion of Servicing Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in a safe operating condition Also performance and EMC checks may be required Maintenance and Support Services Introduction TANDBERG Television is a leader in the design integration and implementation of digital broadcasting products and systems It has a large team dedicated to keeping our customers on air 24 hours a day 365 days a year With regional offices worldwide and ultra modern specialist service facilities in the US UK Hong Kong and Australia TANDBERG Television covers the world There is a customer service centre open round the clock every day of the year in your time zone TANDBERG s years of design and support experience enable it to offe
341. representation of the sample values and other data elements Million bits per second Multiplex Control Computer A component of a System 3000 compression system The MCC sets up the configuration for the System 3000 Multiplexers under its control The MCC controls both the main and backup Multiplexer for each transport stream Multiple Channels Per Carrier Multiplex Element Manager A GUI based control system part of the range of TANDBERG Television compression system control element products The evolution 5000 MEM holds a model of the system hardware Using this model it controls the individual system elements to configure the output multiplexes from the incoming elementary streams The MEM monitors the equipment status and controls any redundancy switching Multichannel Microwave Distribution System A terrestrial microwave direct to home broadcast transmission system The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of sample values The prediction uses motion vectors to provide offsets into the past and or future reference frames or fields containing previously decoded sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process A two dimensional vector used for motion compensation that provides an offset from the co ordinate position in the current picture or field to the co ordinates in a reference frame or field Main Profile at Main Level
342. req RD Video LNB Switch Freq LNB Supply RD Audiol IRD Audio IRD Video Search Range RD Audio2 Menu Menu BER Error Threshold RD CA Audio Stream BOVE Audio Routing RD Data m Default Language 7 Downmix Mode RD System Status m Mute State Stop Mode Audio Output o Aspect Rati Left Sys Clip Mea ute sania Right Svs Cli 525 Line Composite 625 Line Composite m Rate Buffer Mode t Video Default Output m EDH Enable i Embedded Audio Mode Embed Data ID ee IRD Data IRD VBI IRD CA Status Menu Menu Menu Async Stream VITS Enable t DSNG Key CCVC Enable BISS Mode Sync Stream VITC Enable Session Word GCR Enable L Enc Session Word Subtitle Stream Subtitles Language Subtitles Type Subtitles Enable Teletext Stream Figure 4 20 Menu Hierarchy Setup IRD Menu Page 4 106 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 14 4 IRD Demod Menu Frequency Option To access the Frequency option press the Frequency softkey in the IRD Demod Menu This value is either the L Band frequency for the demodulator to tune to if the LNB option is set to Direct RF or it is the satellite frequency to tune to if the LNB option is set to Active If the demodulator is M2 EOM2 QPSKDEMOD and the IF input is selected then this value is the IF freq
343. right audio channel It is for status only and cannot be changed Coding Mode Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is MPEG Layer 2 Linear PCM or Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the Coding Mode option press the Coding Mode softkey in the Audio A Menu If the current audio bit rate is outside the bit rate range supported by the new coding mode the bit rate is changed automatically to the lowest value within the supported range Table 4 47 Coding Mode Options Selected Option Description Coding Standard IMPEG Layer2 Linear PCM Dolby Digital AC 3 Mono Single channel mono audio coding Jv x x Stereo Dual channel stereo audio coding Jv Jv x Joint Stereo Dual channel joint intensity stereo audio coding Jv x x Dual Mono Dual channel mono audio coding Jv Jv x Audio Description Jv x x 1 0 C Single channel mono audio coding x x Jv 2 0 L R Dual channel stereo audio coding x x Jv 3 0 L C R x x x 2 1 L R S x x x 3 1 L C R S These modes are passed through the x x x 2 2 L R Ls Rs Encoder as part of the AC 3 Pass through x x x transport stream 3 2 L C R Ls Rs x x x NOTE Audio Description is only available if the input source is either digital or SDI embedded Auto Lip Sync Option To access the Auto Lip Sync option press the Auto Lip Sync softkey in the Audio A Menu and select either On or Off See the text underneath Table 4 20 on page
344. rk Name TANDBERG Syntax DVB Network Id OxFFFF Service Id 1 Transport Stream Id 1 PMT PID 0x20 ATSC Program 2 SI Level On DVB compliant PSIP Source ATSC BNC 1 PSIP Min PID 0x1FDO PSIP Max PID Ox1FFE Logical Channel Descriptor Off Logical Channel 1 Logical Channel Descriptor Id 0x83 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page C 3 ST TM E10076 3 Predefined User Configurations Module Mux Video Preprocessor Page C 4 Parameter Output Mode Setup Password Display Errors LCD Brightness SNMP Control During Initialisation System Type Action on PID Error MEM Error Handling IP Address Network Mask Gateway Address Serial Number if non zero used for MAC address SNMP Master SNMP Trap Address SABus Address SABus Port SABus Baud Rate SABus Data Bits Active Clock On Air ASI Output Packet Length PCR PID Bit Rate 188 Bit Rate 204 Host Bit Rate Remux Remux Mode Scrambling RAS BISS SNG RAS1 Key RAS1 Key 1 RAS1 Key 2 EBU RAS1 Key 3 future extensions BISS E Session Word BISS Injected Id BISS Code Frame Rate Noise Reduction Video Input Analogue Input Termination Output on Video Loss Audio 1 2 DID Audio 3 4 DID Analogue Calibration OSD from Flash Default Value Satellite Off Yes Medium No Reply Local Auto Correct Report Errors 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0x31 RS 485 19200 8 1 stop bit Local Oscillator
345. rmance Figures B 5 Table B 29 Suitable Signal Cable Types cccceceeseeeee B 19 Table B 7 International Television Standards scccssseee B 6 Table B 30 RS 232 Asynchronous Data Input Specification B 20 Table B 8 Analogue and Digital Audio Specification 4 B 6 Table B 31 RS 422 Synchronous Data Input Specification B 20 Table B 9 MUSICAM Analogue Test Specification 000 B 7 Table B 32 DVB ASI In 1 2 and 3 Connector 0 ceceeeeecee B 21 Table B 10 Embedded Audio Specification 0 ccccsceeeee B 8 Table B 33 DVB ASI Out 1 Connector Disabled 00 B 21 Table B 11 Test Tones Specification cccccecse eee B 8 Table B 34 DVB ASI In 1 2 and 3 LED Indications B 21 Table B 12 IF OUT MAIN Specification 1U E5714 wo eee B 9 Table B 35 DVB ASI Out 1 LED Indications cece B 22 Table B 13 IF Monitor Output Specification 1U E5714 B 10 Table B 36 Analogue and Digital Audio XLR Expander Card B 23 Table B 14 IF OUT MAIN Specification E5740 IF B 10 Table B 37 ASI Output SD Decoder cccseseesteeteteeeee B 24 Table B 15 IF OUT MONITOR Specification E5740 IF B 11 Table B 38 Composite Video Output SD Decoder B 24 Table B 16 L Band Out Main Specification E5740 Lband B 11 Table B 39 Digital Video Output SD Decoder eeeceee B 24 Tabl
346. rs Indicator Colour Description Alarm Red This LED is lit when an alarm condition has been detected by the Encoder Power Green This LED is lit when power is being received by the Encoder Cancel Navigation keys to select options DSNG Voyager E5714 Figure 1 7 1U Encoder Front Panel Indicators Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Power Supply Stand by Switch The use of this switch puts the Encoder into stand by mode It powers down the supply rails of the display and internal circuits within the unit The switch type avoids accidental powering down of the Encoder For normal use ensure that the I is always at the top see Figure 1 8 WARNING THIS IS NOT A MAINS SWITCH AND DOES NOT ISOLATE THE ENCODER FROM THE POWER SUPPLY NOTE Earlier versions of the 1U Encoder may not have this switch fitted On position Stand by position Figure 1 8 Stand by Switch Power Supply Stand by Switch Softkeys to select options TANDBERG Figure 1 9 2U Encoder Front Panel Indicators 1 4 4 Rear Panel Description Introduction The Encoder provides connectors at the rear panel All except the power connector are physically located on the separate modules which comprise the Encoder Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 17 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to
347. rtion Most analogue VBI types are robust against this type of distortion but others e g video index and ITS are intended for SDI transmission and will not survive MPEG coding decoding in VBI in Picture mode To access the VBI in Picture option press the VBI in Picture softkey in the VBI Menu This enables the extended picture format available in the MPEG 4 2 2 specification to be selected When selected the Encoder compresses and transmits the VBI data as part of the active picture This mode requires up to 3 Mbit s of bit rate depending on the amount and complexity of the VBI present It may be necessary to increase the video bit rate accordingly to maintain picture quality NOTE When encoding VBI in this way 3 2 Pulldown should be switched off If it is not then occasionally fields may not be encoded because of the inverse pulldown process This results in some VBI lines not being transmitted When this option is not selected or when 4 2 0 format video is used VBI data must be transmitted in its original digital form either in an independent data stream in the case of Teletext or in user data fields within the MPEG video transport stream Table 4 41 VBI in Picture Options Selected Option Description On VBI is coded as active video Off Off Bit rate too low Insufficient bit rate VPS Line 16 Option NOTE This option is only available when Frame Rate is 25 Hz To access the VPS Line 16 option
348. ruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Setup Menu Mux Menu Mux Remux Module Operating the Equipment Locally 1 Service 2 Service 1 up to 13 Service 1 Mdb Service up to 4 Mdb Service This menu is mainly for TANDBERG Television use for testing purposes Mux Menu When RAS scrambling When BISS scrambling has heen enabled has been enabled BISS E Injected Id Clock PCR PID Packet Length Packet Length Packet Length On Air On Air On Air Bit rate 188 Bit rate 188 Bit rate 188 Bit rate 204 Bit rate 204 Bit rate 204 Host Bit rate 188 Host Bit rate Host Bit rate Scramble Clock Scramble SNG Key RAS 1 PCR PID BISS Key Entry5 Clock Session Word PCR PID Enc Session Word L E 2 13 Service 1 4 Mdb Service Menu 1Service Remux Module Menu when there is an Menu menu incoming service Name Outpu Output Remux Mode Service Id Packet Length Service Type Name Out Bit rate 188 PMT PID Name Out Service Provider Service Id Out Video Service Provider Logical Channel Audio A Service Id Out BISS Key Code5 Audio B Logical Channel Enc Session Word4 Data A CA Input Session Word BISS Key Code5 Enc Session Wordt Session Word
349. s Bit rate 204 byte format Power spectrum Power spectrum detail nominal Carrier frequency Fc Carrier frequency step Carrier frequency accuracy Carrier suppression IF spectrum inversion Residual carrier carrier OFF state Spurious outputs modulated carrier Spurious outputs unmodulated carrier Carrier phase noise Transmission modes Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Specification SELV IF OUT MAIN BNC female 75 Q 75Q gt 18 dB 35 lt f lt 105 MHz 20 to 5 dBm in 0 1 dB steps 0 5 dB QPSK per EN 300 421 0 46875 Msymbol s Fc MHz 80 90 110 Fc 50 60 60 80 Symbol rate Fc 30 30 Msymbol s Within 15 ppm 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 and 7 8 2xRs x FEC Mbit s where Rs Symbol rate Msymbol s FEC FEC ratio values listed above Square root raised cosine 0 35 per EN 300 421 Bandwidth Rs ratio BW Rs at power spectral density Co values dB relative to the power spectral density Coo at the carrier centre frequency Co Coo dB BWI Rs 3 1 0 6 1 13 10 1 21 20 1 32 30 1 37 50 90 MHz 125 kHz Within 7 5 kHz gt 40 dB Selectable on off lt 70 dBm lt 60 dBc 4 kHz relative to unmodulated carrier 0 lt f lt 500 MHz excluding 1 06 x Symbol Rate about the carrier frequency lt 50 dBc lt 55 dBc typical 0 lt f lt 500 MHz each component Phase noise density dBc Hz Frequency
350. s e Part Number e Code Version Service List Menu To access the Service List Menu press the Service List softkey in the IRD Menu This lists all the services found in the current transport stream and allows the user to select which one is to be decoded if there is more than one IRD Video Menu Stop Mode Option To access the Stop Mode option press the Stop Mode softkey in the IRD Video Menu Table 4 142 Stop Mode Options Selected Option Description Blank Outputs a blank screen if the video fails Freeze Freezes on the last picture if the video fails Aspect Ratio Option To access the Aspect Ratio option press the Aspect Ratio softkey in the IRD Video Menu Table 4 143 Aspect Ratio Options Selected Option Description 4 3 Set if the video monitor aspect ratio is 4 3 16 9 Set if the video monitor aspect ratio is 16 9 Video Output Source Option To access the Video Output Source option press the Video Output Source softkey in the IRD Video Menu Table 4 144 Video Output Source Options Selected Option Description Normal Video The decoded video stream is output Various 525 and 625 test The selected test pattern is output patterns Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 525 Line Composite Option To access the 525 Line Composite option press the 525 Line Composite softkey in the IRD Video Menu Table 4 1
351. s Table PMT The program paradigm is applied to any input program which has a program number of less than 256 If the program number is greater than 255 any PID may be used for each stream If a non ATSC service is detected then that may also be passed through the Remux card as an ATSC program The program paradigm will be applied to such a service if possible and if the program number is less than 256 Remux Card In ATSC With External PSI P The Encoder only provides a minimum amount of information within the PSIP tables If more sophisticated tables are required then the PSIP may be fed in externally using an ASI input on the Remux card The user is able to specify a PID range via a minimum and maximum PID The user then selects a port to use and chooses a Service I nfo level of On Ext PSIP All PLDS between the maximum and minimum are then mapped directly to the output Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Use of Remux Card in ASTC In this configuration the Encoder generates the PAT CAT and PMT for all programs but it is the responsibility of the user to provide all the PSIP for the associated programs Any programs present on the same input as the external PSIP are not detected and are not referenced in the PAT This mode may be also be used for passing data through the Remux card NOTE It can take a long time to map a range of PIDs using the Remux card and for usabi
352. s and Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital Interfaces for Television For more information about EDH refer to Annex K EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders Table 2 3 SDI Connector Pin Signal Centre Video Input Screen Ground Impedance 75 Q H SYNC Studio Black and Burst should be fed to the 75 Q BNC connector H SYNC This will then genlock the Encoder to the Studio system This method may be s required with some audio formats or for locking Encoders to an evolution 5000 Multiplexer For details on the genlocking system see Annex G Audio Modes Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 2 13 ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment 2 6 6 Page 2 14 Table 2 4 H SYNC Connector Pin Signal Centre Video Input Screen Ground Impedance 75 Q COMP VI DEO A 75 Q BNC connector provides a high quality O analogue video input to the unit See Chapter 4 S Operating the Equipment Locally Video Input Option for the types of video and selection method NOTE The input is differential to prevent 50 Hz 60 Hz hum Table 2 5 COMP VIDEO Connector Pin Signal Centre Video Input Screen Video Input Return Impedance 75 Q Audio I nputs Connect the audio cable to the AUDIO IN connector The 15 way D type male connector is ee m used in different ways according to the audio input 7 and the encoding configuration selected 9 15 The connector provides two stereo
353. s in Figure 5 6 To find the IP address of the Encoder refer to Section 4 7 4 Remote Control Menu IP Address Option Web Browser I nterface Options The Web Browser interface gives access to the options as shown in Figure 5 6 Some options show diagnostic information for parts of the Encoder Figure 5 6 Web Browser Interface Options Option 1 Build I nfo displays a screen similar to Figure 5 7 when clicking Version Numbers or Figure 5 8 when clicking Release Notes Full information on the build status of the Encoder is given here This can be important when a software upgrade is to be made because it may require a certain level of hardware modification as well The software releases found in the release notes screen are very useful in identifying any known defects and the various code releases which fixed them Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface Figure 5 7 Build Info Version Numbers Figure 5 8 Build Info Release Notes Option 2 Tools displays a screen similar to e Figure 5 9 when clicking Bandwidth Calculations OFDM Bit rate Calculations Figure 5 10 when clicking Bandwidth Calculations RF Calculations Figure 5 11 when clicking OSD Toolkit e Figure 5 12 when clicking Video Monitor 1 Prior to Build Version 3 0 0 this was called Bandwidth Calculations Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voya
354. s selected from the Data B RS422 Menu by pressing the SNMP oid index softkey See SNMP oid index Option on page 4 68 for details of this option Version Option This option indicates the version of the data It is for status only and cannot be changed oid object identifier Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 69 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 10 4 4 10 5 4 11 4 11 1 Page 4 70 Data XA RS232 Menu When M2 EOM2 DAT Fitted Overview NOTE Inthe Data XA RS232Menu X the number of the option slot that the module fits into See Section 4 10 2 Data A RS232 Menu for the following options e Encoding e Baud rate e RS232 PID Hardware Release Option This option indicates the hardware release of the data card It is for status only and cannot be changed Software Release Option This option indicates the software release of the data card It is for status only and cannot be changed Data XB RS422 Menu M2 EOM2 DAT Fitted Overview NOTE Inthe Data XB RS422 Menu X the number of the option slot that the module fits into See Section 4 10 3 Data B RS422 Menu for the following options e Encoding e Bit rate e RS422 PID Hardware Release Option This option indicates the hardware release of the data card It is for status only and cannot be changed Software Release Option This option indicates the software
355. s ssn Table F 6 New Zealand Table F 7 China wc Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page F 1 Band Plans BLANK Page F 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Band Plans F 1 Channels and Centre Frequencies The Output Menu has options called Band Plan and Channel see Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Once a country has been selected in the Band Plan option then the required channel should be selected in the Channel option Each channel number corresponds to a particular frequency NOTE Only those frequencies associated with a channel number can be selected This Annex contains the channel IDs and centre frequencies for the band plans in the Output Menu If the Manual band plan option is selected then the required frequency must be selected manually Table F 1 Australia UHF Centre UHF Centre UHF Centre Channel Frequency Channel Frequency Channel Frequency in MHz in MHz in MHz 0 48 500 32 557 500 52 697 500 1 59 500 33 564 500 53 704 500 2 66 500 34 571 500 54 711 500 3 88 00 35 578 500 55 718 500 4 97 500 36 585 500 56 725 500 5 104 500 37 592 500 57 732 500 5A 140 500 38 599 500 58 739 500 6 177 500 39 606 500 59 746 500 7 184 500 40 613 500 60 753 500 8 191 500 41 620 500 61 760 500 9 198 500 42 627 500 62 767 500 9A 205 500 43 634 500 63 714 500 10 212 500 44 641
356. s that all equipment chassis within a rack are at the same potential usually by connecting a wire between the Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack This is sometimes known as a Functional earth Protective Earth Used for electric shock protection This is sometimes known as a safety earth European Broadcast Union Entitlement Control Message Ethernet Data Input Electronics Industries Association USA Event Information Table Equipment A component of the DVB Service Information SI stream generated within an Encoder containing information about events or programmes such as event name start time duration etc System EIT Present Following contains the name of the current and next event It may include an optional descriptor synopsis giving brief details of content EIT Schedule is used to produce a full EPG The EIT is the only DVB SI table which can be encrypted A generic term for a coded bit stream be it video audio or other Electromagnetic Compatibility Entitlement Management Message Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the appropriate decryption equipment and authorisation Electronic Programme Guide On screen programme listing using thumbnail pictures and or text The most widely used local area network LAN defined by the IEEE as the 802 3 standard Transmission speeds vary according to the configuration Ethernet uses copper or fibre optic cables European Telecommunicat
357. scseseeeesteeeeneees 4 103 Table 4 88 West East OptionS c ccceseeesestesteeeteseeeeeees 4 78 Table 4 128 VBI PID Options 0 ccceeececsesseeeesestenseeeeeteens 4 103 Table 4 89 Polarisation Options cccccceeceteeeeeseeteeeeeeees 4 78 Table 4 129 Audio Type of Audio Options ccceeeeee 4 104 Table 4 90 IF Power Options cccccccseesesessteeeiesteeeeeenees 4 79 Table 4 130 Data Type of Data Options ccesceseeeee 4 104 Table 4 91 IF Frequency Options cscccseetesneeeteeteeeeneaees 4 79 Table 4 131 Teletext Options ceeseesecsesses esses tseeteeteneees 4 104 Table 4 92 Modulation Type OptionS cccsceeseieeeeteeees 4 79 Table 4 132 IRD Mode Options ceeecccseeessesteseseeeeeseneens 4 105 Table 4 93 Symbol Rate OptionS c cccceeeeseetseeeteeees 4 80 Table 4 133 IRD TS Source Options eseceeeeeeseeeeeee 4 105 Table 4 94 FEC Rate Options 00 ceescecseeeetesteeeteeteseeesnees 4 80 Table 4 134 Symbol Rate Options cccceeeeeeseeeeneees 4 107 Table 4 95 Tx Bandwidth Factor Options cccsceeeeeeeeeeeee 4 81 Table 4 135 FEC Rate Options ceecccsseeseseeeseseeesneees 4 107 Table 4 96 Preset Pwr Low Options ccccseseeeeeeeteeees 4 81 Table 4 136 Polarisation Options 0 eecccseeesesesteeseeeeteees 4 108 Table 4 97 Preset Pwr Norm Options ccccceseeeeeeeeeees 4 81 Table 4 137 Sat Input Options cece ees tee
358. sd File Select File Save As OSD file from the menu Saving is possible at any time and it is advisable to save the image often while editing is in progress The file may also be saved in bmp format but this file will not contain transparency information Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 E 6 Downloading a Logo Using OSD Loader The Osd Loader application osd exe is used for downloading logo osd files to the Encoder and controlling which are displayed The application runs on a PC with Windows 95 or Windows NT A network connection is required The target Encoder s IP address must be visible from the host PC The application uses the osd file format for images These can be derived from Windows bmp files using the OSD Creator application see Section E 4 Creating a Logo Using OSD Creator An example of an OSD Loader screen is shown in Figure E 5 HE Osd lel Es m Region Operations r Coordinates l IP Address po i E g fi 72 16 197 175 Transfer Completed OK Abot M AutoShow Auto Store ttv osd Shown Remove Remove All Show Fade Up Hide Fade Down r OSD File ttv osd 413x212 256 cols Choose File m Resolution Mode ad i Borders Figure E 5 OSD Loader Screen Showing Example Logo E 7 Using the OSD Loader E 7 1 Start up Activate the application osd exe The application attempts to connect to the last known Encoder address If the address is not corre
359. se 21 ee Move Folder View Files View Objects cea Figure 5 2 Settings Dialog Box 4 For Check for newer versions of stored pages select Every visit to the page or any changes made to the pages will not be displayed Click OK to save the changes and return to the I nternet Options dialog box 5 If Internet Explorer currently connects to the internet via a proxy server then it must be reconfigured to connect directly to the Encoder bypassing the proxy server Click the Connections tab see Figure 5 3 Internet Options x General Security Content Connections Programs Advanced kE Use the Internet Connection Wizard to Setup connect your computer to the Internet _ m Dial up settings Add Renove Settings Weyer dial a connection Diallwhenever a network connection is not present Always dielmy default connection Gorent defaults None Set Default m Local Area Network LAN settings LAN Settings OK Cancel Apply Figure 5 3 Connections Tab Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface 6 Click LAN Settings to open the Local Area Network LAN Settings dialog box see Figure 5 4 Local Area Network LAN Settings EE m Automatic configuration Automatic configuration may override manual settings To ensure the use of manual settings
360. sed for entering or updating audio PIDs Enter a PID using the softkeys then press the Enter softkey to accept it To be DVB compliant PIDs below 32 are reserved Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are available for use In the event of a clash one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder s internal checking algorithm NOTE Although PIDs below 32 are reserved it is still possible to change them However in the event of a clash one of the PIDs will NOT be changed by the Encoder s internal checking algorithm Hardware Release Option This option indicates the hardware release of the audio It is for status only and cannot be changed Software Release Option This option indicates the software release of the currently selected audio standard It is for status only and cannot be changed Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 9 3 4 9 4 Operating the Equipment Locally Audio Languages Menu The Audio Languages Menu is selected from the Audio Menu by pressing the Audio Languages softkey This menu permits the selection of languages used in the MPEG broadcast English is the default language and cannot be changed Those other languages which have an asterisk next to them are selected for use those without an asterisk are not To select deselect a language press the softkey nearest to it The asterisk is turned on and off There are over forty languages to choose from Audio
361. seeeeeneees 4 108 Table 4 98 Sat Deliv Freq Options ccsesceeeeetssteeeteenees 4 82 Table 4 138 Modulation Options cccsescseseeeseseeesees 4 108 Table 4 99 Sat Orb Pos Options ccccceeeeeeeeeteseeeeesnees 4 82 Table 4 139 LNB Options c eececeseeseecessesteseseetsnseeeteneees 4 108 Table 4 100 Sat West East Options c cc cceseeneteeeteeee 4 82 Table 4 140 LNB Supply Options 0 ccecceeeeeseseeeteeees 4 109 Table 4 101 Polarisation Options csesceeeeeeeeetesteseeteeneee 4 83 Table 4 141 Search Range Options csesceeseeeseeeeneees 4 109 Table 4 102 L Band Power Options ccscssseseeeeeeteeees 4 83 Table 4 142 Stop Mode Options cceccessesseseseseeteeseees 4 110 Table 4 103 Frequency Options scsccceeeeseesteeeeeeeeeeeees 4 84 Table 4 143 Aspect Ratio Options cesesseeseeeseeeenees 4 110 Table 4 104 Bandwidth Options 0 cceeseeteseeeeteseeeneeee 4 86 Table 4 144 Video Output Source Options ccceeeee 4 110 Table 4 105 Modulation Mode OptionS cccsesseeeeees 4 86 Table 4 145 525 Line Composite Options ceceeeeee 4 111 Table 4 106 Guard Interval Options ccccseeeeteeteeeeeee 4 86 Table 4 146 625 Line Composite Options ccceeeee 4 111 Table 4 107 FEC Rate Options ccseceeseessteeeteseeeeteenees 4 86 Table 4 147 Rate Buffer Mode Options cscseeeseeeeee 4 111 Tab
362. seeseseesseseeenusssssssesneunsen 4 20 Table 4 59 Room Type Options c ccsssssssssssssssssenussseseeeeeee 4 61 Table 4 4 Program Number OptionS sssssssssessssssssssssssee 4 20 Table 4 60 Dynamic Range OptionS cccs ssssssscseessesssesee 4 62 Table 4 5 SI Level OPtions csssssessesseessnseseeussnssereenunsnees 4 22 Table 4 61 Embedded 1 2 DID Options cccss sssesussseeeeeeen 4 64 Table 4 6 Network Id Options cssssseessessssssnussssseseennunsen 4 22 Table 4 62 Input Format Options cc ssscsssssesssesessseeeeeeeen 4 65 Table 4 7 Service Id Options ssssssssssssseseeeeeeesnsssssssseeees 4 22 Table 4 63 Input Termination Options When Analogue Input Table 4 8 Transport Stream Id Options cscccssessesseseeeeeees 4 23 Selected csceasteeisisanitatreetsrsansaihanvien avec 4 65 Table 4 9 PMT PID Options ccecseeccceseeeseesseetssteseeeeeetenees 4 23 Table 4 64 Input Clip Level Options When Analogue Input Table 4 10 Audio AC 3 Descriptor Options sscsssssessesese 4 24 Selected cessssssssssesseesuassssssssssssnsacenuasasssssssneas 4 65 Table 4 11 SABus Address Options cccscscssssssssssssssssssssssssee 4 25 Table 4 65 Output Source Options 0 4 66 Table 4 12 Serial Protocol Options scssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssses 4 25 Table 4 66 Output Format Options 0 0 ssssssssssssssssesssesssesssee 4 66 Table 4 13 SABus Baud Rate Options csssssssssssss
363. sh Breton L_ Malay Menu j DC Filter French Bulgarian Miscellaneous j Low Pass Filter German Chinese L Multiple Languages L Input Format Embedded 1 2 DID Dutch Czech Ndebele Zimbabwe L Input Termination z Embedded 3 4 DID Spanish Estonian f Polish L Input Clip Level j Audio PID i Portuguese Gaelic Scots Romanian Output Source PCR on Audio PID Italian Greek _ Russian Output Format Hardware Release Danish f Irish Serbo Croat Output FSR 8 L Software Release Norwegian Hungarian Slovak _Firmware Release Swedish Icelandic i Somali L Hardware Release Finnish Indonesian L Swahili Undefined Japanese Thai Afrikaans Korean i L Tibetan Albanian Latvian Ukrainian Arabic Lithuanian Welsh d Only shown if Source Input Format Analogue 5 Only shown if Auto Lip Sync Off Basque Macedonian a Only shown if Auto Lip Sync On Figure 4 15 Menu Hierarchy Setup Audio Menu Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 and later Page 4 53 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 54 Source Option To access the Source option press the Source softkey in the Audio A Menu Table 4 44 Source Options Selected Option Description Off No audio packets are sent in the transport stream and audio is removed from the SI Mute Audio silence Test Tone The internal test tone is used as the audio
364. sion Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Value 2 Mbit s Standard Delay MP ML IBBP 4 Mbit s Standard Delay MP ML IBBP 6 Mbit s Standard Delay MP ML IBBP 8 Mbit s Standard Delay MP ML IBBP 15 Mbit s Standard Delay MP ML IBBP 2 Mbit s Very Low Delay MP ML IP 4 Mbit s Very Low Delay MP ML IP 6 Mbit s Very Low Delay MP ML IP 8 Mbit s Very Low Delay MP ML IP 15 Mbit s Very Low Delay MP ML IP Page C 7 Predefined User Configurations Page C 8 Configuration Number 11 12 13 14 15 16 Service Name Mega Low Delay 6 MHz Mega Low Delay 7 5 MHz Mega Low Delay 9 MHz Mega Low Delay 13 5 MHz Mega Low Delay 18 MHz 422P ML 18 MHz Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Variable Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Video Bit rate Video Compression Mode Video Profile Level GOP Structure Value
365. snees 4 97 Table 4 119 Remux Mode Options cceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 4 97 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 7 Operating the Equipment Locally BLANK Page 4 8 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 Operating the Equipment Locally Introduction The front panel display and keypad are used to configure control and monitor the Encoder The control interface is a structured menu which gives access to the various options This chapter describes the menu hierarchy and menu items in detail NOTES The configuration of the Encoder after booting is the same as when power was removed with the following exceptions e The satellite modulator output is switched off e The modulation of the IF carrier is switched on e The output power level is set to low If the Encoder configuration after power up matches the required configuration then to re enable transmission the satellite modulator output must be switched on and the output power level must be set to its previous setting Establishing Local Control 1U At switch on the Encoder runs through a boot sequence boot time without any option modules is approximately 45 seconds A typical Summary aT REIS displayed Any of the following can be displayed Initialising Only shown when the Encoder is booting On Air Outputs are on Off Air Outputs are off S
366. ssages according to whether the option is set On or Off System Control Option To access the System Control option press the System Control softkey in the Advanced Menu This option enables the type of system control specified in the SI to be set Table 4 20 System Control Options Selected Option Description MEM Control of the video audio delay lip sync is via the MEM Local Control of the video audio delay lip sync is within the Encoder External SNMP Control of the video audio delay lip sync is via the SNMP protocol If the control equipment is a TT7000 System Manager ensure that the Auto Lip Sync option is turned on see Auto Lip Sync Option on page 4 56 The TT7000 does not have a lip sync function therefore the Encoder has to provide this 2 To ensure correct lip sync when working with linear or pre encoded audio the option card M2 EOM2 AUDLIN should be used Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 29 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Action On PID Error Option To access the Action on PID Error option press the Action on PID Error softkey in the Advanced Menu Table 4 21 Action on PID Error Options Selected Option Description Raise Alarm An error message is displayed if a PID error is found Auto Correct If a PID error is found it is automatically corrected SNMP Control Option To access the SNMP Control option press the S
367. ssssssssssssee 4 26 Table 4 67 Output FSR Options When Analogue Input Table 4 14 SABus Data Bits Options ccss csesnsesnsererenene 4 26 Selected eres stsestnnstnentnnntnenenenenanenanene Table 4 15 UTC Offset Options uu 4 27 Table 4 68 Baud Rate Options Table 4 16 Screen Saver Options u 4 27 Table 4 69 SNMP oid index Options eee 4 68 Table 4 17 Keypress Beep OptionS ccesssecsereesesseresens 4 27 Table 4 70 Bit rate OPtONS svstsnstnnstnentneemaenenein 4 69 Table 4 18 Power Dip Recovery Options wo 4 28 Table 4 71 Descriptor Type Options sess 4 72 Table 4 19 Fan Control Options ccccssssssssssssssssssssssssseusesee 4 28 Table 4 72 Band Plan Options 4 73 Table 4 20 System Control Options ccscecesceeteteeeteeteeeees 4 29 Table 4 73 Channel OptioNs svstsnstnestnsntnereneeneneen 4 73 Table 4 21 Action on PID Error Options csscsosersessseteeee 4 30 Table 4 74 Frequency Options ssnstseernenrneneisensnenn 4 73 Table 4 22 SNMP Control Options vscssssssetsesesetsesetetsenee 4 30 Table 4 75 Bandwidth Options Table 4 23 Video Input Options c ccccssssssssssssssssssssssssuesssee 4 31 Table 4 76 Modulation Type Options ssssssssssssesssesesesesee 4 74 Table 4 24 Input Source Select Options cccceceeeeeeteeee 4 33 Table 4 77 Hierarchy Options sverssseminenrnenemenenenenn 4 74 Table 4 25 Frame Rate Options casscsssssetsessntsesetetneiee 4 34 Table 4
368. t Table 2 17 IF Out 1 Connector Item Specification Connector Type BNC 75 Q Female Type Analogue Connector designation IF Out 1 Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment IF Out 2 A 75 Q BNC socket provides a 70 MHz IF output used for monitoring Table 2 18 IF Out 2 Connector Item Specification Connector Type BNC 75 Q Female Type Analogue Connector designation IF Out2 Pin outs Centre Signal Screen Ground 2 7 Powering Up Down 2 7 1 Before Powering Up Before powering up the Encoder check that 1 The unit has been installed in a suitable location 2 The unit has been connected to external equipment and power supply as required 3 The power supply has been checked and a good earth provided 4 The correct fuse type and rating has been fitted to the equipment and for the ac supply version the ac power cable 2 7 2 Powering Up To power up the Encoder 1 Turn on the local power supply The Encoder executes a series of power up initialisation and self test routines 2 Confirm that the green Power LED is lit and that the red Alarm LED is unlit 3 Ensure that the Stand by switch is set to On see Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 1 8 After the boot period the Encoder Input Monitor screen is displayed NOTES 1 The fans on the Encoder can be temperature controlled so may not be on if the ambient tem
369. t Specification 1U 44 5 mm chassis 2U 88 9 mm chassis 1U 442 5 mm excluding fixing brackets 2U 442 5 mm excluding fixing brackets 1U 482 6 mm including fixing brackets 2U 482 6 mm including fixing brackets 1U 545 mm excluding rear connector clearance 2U 545 mm excluding rear connector clearance 1U 7 5 kg 16 5 Ibs 2U 11 5 kg 25 3 lbs Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 B 7 B 8 B 8 1 Technical Specification Environmental Conditions Item Operational Temperature Over temperature alarm generated at Under temperature alarm generated at Temperature checked All fans switched off at Half the fans switched off at All fans on at Relative humidity Cooling requirements Handling movement Storage Transportation Temperature Relative humidity Compliance Safety Table B 28 Environmental Specification Specification 10 C to 50 C 14 F to 122 F ambient with free air flow gt 55 C lt 0 C Once every 30 seconds lt 10 C when set to auto lt 20 C when set to auto gt 20 C when set to auto 0 to 90 non condensing Front section Cool air input from front panel exhaust from right side of unit Rear section Cool air input from right side of unit exhaust from left side of unit See Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment Figure 2 2 Designed for stationary or fixed use when in operation 20 C to 7
370. t Edit Terminal Help Main Telnet Menu Systen Video Audio Output Hux NAAAA ango MEENE S A lt ESC gt Exit Figure 2 9 Main Telnet Menu 4 Press lt a gt System lt b gt Remote Control lt a gt IP Address 5 Enter the new value and press Enter 6 Reset the Encoder Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Contents 3 1 What s Available ccccscsssssscsssrsrssserssrsseerssrasees 3 3 3 1 1 Option FUNCHONS ysccfatanducientantets 3 3 3 1 2 Limitations on Number of Option Modules 2U ONIY Vease 3 4 OVOIVICW ssssenssrrenssrrinssrrnnenrrinnnrrnnenrrerrrrrrens 3 4 E5740 Option Slots cece 3 4 E5750 Option Slots cece 3 4 3 1 3 Limitations on Use of Option Modules 3 4 3 1 4 How to See Which Options are Fitted Enabled erren 3 4 3 2 Bitrate Limits With Reflex Licence and or Performance UpGrade cecescceesueesecenerertes 3 5 3 3 Basic Interoperable Scrambling System BISS M2 EDCOM2 BISS nren 3 5 3 4 Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option M2 EOM2 AUDLIN ccsesscscssestssrsssstssrssssrsseereerasees 3 6 SAL OVNE W nnana 3 6 34 2 ASSOMDIY vxiciivnnstsitiatat audiatindatrare 3 7 Rear PANEL sas ciscesescisctvevaestesled naies tensive 3 7 Audio IN CONN CIOL cscsesstsesestsstsseetesnssees 3 7 3 5 RS 232 and RS 422 Data Input Option M2 EOM2 DAT Vrain 3 9 3 5 1 OVOVIOW escssesstesesstessesssssssrssessnsresseeessnees 3 9 3 5 2 ASSEMDIY cui ieanitinnnii
371. t Length Option for details Bit rate Option This option indicates the bit rate See Section 4 12 6 Bit rate 188 and Bit rate 204 Option for details Status Only Options for the Remux Module Menu The following options are status only and cannot be changed Spare Bit rate Input Bit rate Output Bit rate Host TS Output Rate Host Data Rate Input TS 1 188 Data Rate 1 188 Input TS 2 188 Data Rate 2 188 Input TS 3 188 Data Rate 3 188 Software Release NOTE The maximum input bit rate allowed on the Remux Module ASI inputs is 50 Mbit s If the input bit rate exceeds 86 Mbit s it will be incorrectly reported as a lower rate 4 13 4 1 Service 2 Service Menu Output Option To access the Output option press the Remux Mode softkey in the 1 Service Menu 14 This name changes to be the same as the Service Name There could be more menus depending upon the number of inputs to the Remux card Page 4 98 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 120 Output Options Selected Option Description Off The service is not included in the output On The service is included in the output unscrambled On RAS The service is included in the output scrambled and using RAS On BISS Mux Key The service is included in the output scrambled and the Session Word entered in the Mux Menu On BISS Mode 1 The service is included
372. t PID option 4 46 telnet 2 22 temperature option 4 27 terrestrial bandwidth option 4 73 FEC rate HP and LP option 4 74 guard interval option 4 75 hierarchy option 4 74 test mode option 4 69 test pattern 1 8 test tone audio 1 12 text colour option 4 34 time code option 4 36 time to live option 4 89 top level menu 4 16 trademarks registered v transmission option 4 87 evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 transport stream id option 4 23 ts pkts UDP frm option 4 88 TT7000 system manager 4 29 tx bandwidth factor option 4 81 4 84 tx bandwidth option 4 81 4 84 type of service option 4 89 U universal time co ordinate UTC 4 27 universal time co ordinate UTC offset option 4 27 unlock keyboard softkeys 4 13 upconverter power option 4 85 upgrade encoder licence key 4 28 upgrade encoder option 4 28 user configurations 4 119 user interface 1 16 UTC See universal time co ordinate UTC V VBI See vertical blanking interval VBI vbi in picture 1 13 VBI in picture option 4 47 vbi in pid 1 14 VBI line n option 4 48 VBI on PID option 4 46 VBI PID option 4 46 4 102 VBI structure implemented by TANDBERG for 525 line systems 4 50 VBI structure implemented by TANDBERG for 625 line systems 4 51 vbi user data 1 14 VBR mode option 4 39 ventilation 2 6 version aguan 4 69 vertical blanking interval VBI data formats 1 14 line number range 1 14
373. t Parts and GC ONMOCTONS ress antaccstss raiat aaar G ia Figure 2 8 Equipment Connections for the Basic Unit i Figure 2 9 Main Telnet Menu ssccccccrrrrcncccncnnnnrs Page 2 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Installing the Equipment 2 1 Introduction 2 1 1 Read This First The Encoder must be handled carefully and thoughtfully to prevent safety hazards and damage It is usually supplied as part of a system installed by TANDBERG Television engineers In any case ensure the personnel designated to install the unit have the appropriate skills and knowledge If in any doubt contact Customer Services Follow the instructions for installation and only use installation accessories recommended by the manufacturers 2 1 2 General Installation of the Encoder is normally performed by TANDBERG Television personnel This chapter provides configuration and connection information for planning installations checking the final set up in the event of a fault modifying the requirements or moving the equipment to another location In the event of problems contact Customer Services 2 1 3 Site Requirements Power Supplies See Annex B Technical Specification for a full specification Environment See Annex B Technical Specification for a full specification Do not install this product in areas of high humidity or where there is danger of water ingress Lightning Protection
374. t Up Internet Explorer For the Web Browser Interface To set up Internet Explorer proceed as follows 1 In Internet Explorer version 5 on the menu bar click Tools Internet Options This displays the Internet Options dialog box with tabs across the top 2 In the General tab click Settings see Figure 5 1 General Security Content Connections Programs Advanced m Home page You can change which page to use for your home page Address Use Current Use Default Use Blank m Temporary Internet files TA Pages you view on the Internet are stored in a special folder for quick viewing later Delete Files Settings Settings History i The History folder contains links to pages you ve visited for quick access to recently viewed pages Days to keep pages in history 20 aa Clear History Colors Fonts Languages Accessibilty Figure 5 1 Internet Options Dialog Box 3 This opens the Settings dialog box see Figure 5 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 5 3 ST TM E10076 3 Web Browser Interface Page 5 4 Settings 21x iv Bios for newer versions of stored pages 7 Every visit to the page C a time you start nera Explorer C Automatically C Never Temporary Internet files folder Current location C WINNT Profiles barberc T emporary Internet Files Amount of disk space to u
375. t the input and output of a transmission path Coded OFDM COFDM adds forward error correction to the OFDM transmission consisting of Reed Solomon RS coding followed by convolutional coding to add extra bits to the transmitted signal This allows a large number of errors at the receive end to be corrected by convolutional Viterbi decoding followed by RS decoding Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Compression Compression System CrCp CRC CVCT dB DCE DCT DDS Decoder Decoding Time stamp DID Differential Coding DIL DIN Dolby Digital Downlink Downconvert DPCM DSNG DSP DTE DTH DTS DVB DVB SI DVB PI Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Glossary Reduction in the number of bits used to represent the same information For the purposes of a broadcast system it is the process of reducing digital picture information by discarding redundant portions of information that are not required when reconstituting the picture to produce viewing clarity Compression allows a higher bite rate to be transmitted through a given bandwidth Responsible for compressing and multiplexing the video audio data bit streams together with the authorisation stream The multiplexed data stream is then ready for transmission Digital Colour difference signals These signals in combination with the luminance signal Y
376. tandard allows for downmixing to either a Dolby Pro Logic compatible stereo signal designated LT RT or a conventional stereo signal designated LO RO Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 113 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 114 Table 4 153 Downmix Mode Options Selected Option Description Stereo Pair Dolby Pro Logic Stereo Mute State Option To access the Mute State option press the Mute State softkey in the IRD Audio Menu The Mute State can either be set On i e no audio output or Off audio output present Audio Output Option To access the Audio Output option press the Audio Output softkey in the IRD Audio Menu Table 4 154 Audio Output Options Selected Option Description Analogue Output Analogue Audio on both left and right channels IEC958 Consumer Uncompressed stereo on right output that conforms to SPDIF formatting IEC958 Pro AES EBU Uncompressed stereo on right output that conforms to AES EBU formatting AC 3 as IEC958 Consumer Compressed up to 5 1 on right output only Only if the input stream is Dolby Digital AC 3 encoded NOTE To obtain a linear PCM digital output the Audio Output must be set to IEC 958 Prof Left Sys Clip Option To access the Left Sys Clip option press the Left Sys Clip softkey in the IRD Audio Menu This sets the audio clip level of the left channel between 6 dBm and 18 dBm Right Sys
377. ternal PSIP generation is not supported in Build versions 2 1 0 and 2 2 0 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 15 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder 1 4 1 4 1 1 4 2 1 4 3 Page 1 16 Guided Tour Enclosure There are two sizes of enclosure 1U and 2U versions The enclosure is used as a stand alone unit All inputs and outputs are via rear panel connectors The User I nterface The Encoder itself provides no controls at the rear panel but there is a display and keypad at the front panel All connectors are provided at the rear panel Control and monitoring may be performed in a variety of ways see Section 1 3 7 Control and Monitoring Once configured the system runs without the need for further intervention unless system configuration requirements change Front Panel Description Front Panel Display Navigation Keys Softkeys Keyboard The 1U Encoder provides navigation keys to access and input data The 2U Encoder provides a keypad and softkeys to access and input data There are two LED indicators located on the left of the front panel see Figure 1 7 and Figure 1 9 The front panel display and navigation keys softkeys keyboard are used as a local control method to set up and configure the Encoder see Chapter 4 Operating the Equipment Locally They can also be used as quick method for accessing the status of the equipment Table 1 7 Front Panel Indicato
378. that the left and right signals are output from the Receiver is dependent on how the routing is set up on the Receiver Both the left and the right may be output or the left only or the right only This is typically used for multilingual services Available in MPEG 1 layer 2 and Linear PCM e Stereo A stereo pair is coded as two mono signals the two signals are output as stereo at the receiving end e Joint stereo A stereo pair is coded taking advantage of the stereo nature of the channels the two signals are output as stereo at the receiving end Available in MPEG 1 layer 2 only e Audio Description Service Dolby Digital AC 3 Encoding Modes e 1 0 centre e 2 0 left and right 17 See Annex G Audio Modes for details of setting up the audio Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 1 11 ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder Test Tones The equipment can be configured to generate a test tone for alignment purposes Refer to Annex B Technical Specification for level and frequency Audio Variable Bit rate MPEG 1 audio output bit rate see Table 1 5 is selectable in the range 32 kbit s 384 kbit s dependent on configuration Table 1 5 MPEG 1 Audio Encoding Bitrates Bit rate Single Dual Stereo J oint Stereo kbit s Channel Mono Mono 32 v 48 v 56 v 64 s J J s 80 v 96 v v v v 112 J Jv vA Jv 128 s J J Vv 160 s J J Vv 192 s J J y 224 v v vA 256 v Jv s 32
379. the Basic Encoder 1U Chassis IF OutMain IF Out Monitor Option Slot2 Im B T Base Board Alarm RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 Ethernet ASI Outputs SDIIn HSync Composite Audio In and Data Data RS 485 Video Audio Control Reference Out Figure 1 10 E5714 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors IF Out 1 IF Out 2 Olo con Gope e FEA Base Board H REMOTA CONTROL 1 gETHERNET 2 Alarm RS 422 RS 232 RS 232 Ethernet ASIOutputs SDIIn HSync Composite Audio In and Data Data RS 485 Video Audio Control Reference Out Figure 1 11 5715 1U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors 2U Chassis RS 232 Audio In and RS 422 RS 232 RS 485 ASI Composite Audio Alarm Data Data Control Ethernet Outputs SDIIn H Sync Video Reference Out Base Board Option Slots 4 6 Option Slot 1 IF OutMain IF Out Monitor TANDBERG Television use only Figure 1 12 E5740 2U Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors Page 1 18 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Introduction to the Basic Encoder RS 232 Audio In and RS 422 RS 232 RS 485 ASI Composite Audio Alarm Data Data Control Ethernet Outputs SDIIn H Sync Video Reference Out i joc JZ M i RS 422 DATA RS Option Slots 4 5 Option Slot 4 ee Option Sl
380. then only the FEC Rate parameter is used and shown on the display Page 4 74 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally If the Hierarchy option is set to Alpha n then the FEC HP and FEC LP parameters provide two levels of modulation Transmission starts with the code rate for the HP level of modulation and ends with the code rate for the LP level The screen for the FEC LP option is the same except that LP replaces HP Table 4 78 FEC HP and FEC LP Options Selected Option Description 1 2 Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP LP is 1 2 2 3 Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP LP is 2 3 3 4 Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP LP is 3 4 5 6 Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP LP is 5 6 718 Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP LP is 7 8 Guard Interval Option To access the Guard Interval option press the Guard Interval softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This enables the guard interval of the terrestrial transmitter to be specified Table 4 79 Guard Interval Options Selected Option Description 1 4 Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1 4 1 8 Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1 8 1 16 Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1 16 1 32 Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1 32 Carriers Options To access the Carriers option press the Carriers softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu
381. through a boot sequence boot time with Remux option module is approximately 90 seconds An initial Input Monitor screen is shown This displays a picture of the currently selected video source the service name of the video channel being encoded the audio A and B channels in the form of bargraphs and the multiplexer and video bit rates NOTE The screen may vary slightly in detail between Encoders Figure 4 3 2U Input Monitor Pressing the More softkey displays the Summary Screen see Section 4 4 2 Summary Screen Pressing the A V softkey displays the A udio V ideo Menu see Section 4 4 3 A udio V ideo Menu 4 4 2 Summary Screen On or Off Air Clear or Scrambled Will say Host Service if the Indicates whether or not the mux Indicates whether or not the R tion is fitted ir option i t ff i emux option is fitte On Air option is set to on or o output is scrambled Press the Ops softkey to access the Operations menu where available This gives quick access to the Configurations menu Press More softkey to access the Advanced Top Level menu NOTE The screen may vary slightly in detail between Encoders Figure 4 4 2U Summary Screen NOTE The Configurations Menu can also be accessed through the Advanced Menu see Figure 4 8 Page 4 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 4 3 4 4 4 Key icon 4 5 4 5 1 Operating the Equipment Loca
382. tiOn c cscssssessresssesees 2 3 2 1 4 EMC Compliance Statements 2 3 EN 55022 AS NZS 3548s 2 3 O E EE E cree eereitias tee 2 4 2 2 Preliminary Checks cccsesssssesstsssstssssssssesessseeersees 2 4 2 2 1 Mechanical Inspection cscscsssssessesesees 2 4 2 2 2 Moving the Equipment Safely css 2 4 2 3 Installing the Equipment 2 4 2 3 1 Fixing Method vu cesses 2 4 2 3 2 Cable ROuUtINg c eects 2 5 2 3 3 Equipment ACCESS eeseeceesteseeseeseenteeteees 2 5 2 3 4 Ventilation errr 2 5 2 4 AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing 0 2 7 2 4 1 AC Power Supply cccssscssssssessresssesees 2 7 2 4 2 Power Cable and Earthing eccer 2 7 Generalisasi a 2 7 Protective Earth Technical Earth csen 2 7 Connecting the Encoder to the AC Power SUPP epaien 2 8 2 5 DC Operating Voltage and Earthing eee 2 8 2 5 1 DC Power Supply sceneries 2 8 2 5 2 DC Power Cable and Earthing cceeeee 2 9 General unsin 2 9 DC Power Connector Encoder seee 2 10 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Chapter 2 Installing the Equipment 2 6 Signal Connections For the Basic Unit 2 10 2 6 1 UNTODUCHON orasini 2 10 2 6 2 Connecting Up the Basic Encoder 2 12 2 6 3 Power SUPPLY eects testers 2 13 2 6 4 Technical Earth sssri 2 13 2 05 Vide IMPUS ninina 2 13 SDM IN prnaos 2 13 FUSING erisin a 2 13 COMP VIDEO iirinn 2 14 2 6 6 Audio INPUTS cscesessesstsstestesess
383. ting Code M2 VOY E5740 _ A code which identifies the product for marketing purposes Figure 1 3 Information Label 1 Evolution 5000 Encoder ProductName Serial No NNN A name which identifies the type of Cod product tion in he DEUUDOOTETT OTET Used for unit identification in the manufacturing process E10076_ XX _XX _XX _XX_XX_XX M2 VOY E5740 Figure 1 4 Information Label 2 Hardware Configuration Each piece of hardware has a specific reference number These are linked to give a hardware configuration number see Figure 1 3 for the whole unit The first part of the number refers to the enclosure and any modules forming part of the basic unit and each subsequent part of the number refers to an option module Refer to Chapter 3 Options and Upgrades for the possible positions of each option module Build Revision The build revision refers to the physical status of the enclosure and any option modules at the time the equipment was shipped from the factory It is NOT the same as the Build version which relates to software and firmware 1 2 Role of the Encoder in a System 1 2 1 Typical System The Encoder is a transportable digital exciter designed specifically for mobile contribution applications It is compact and lightweight fully MPEG 2 and DVB or ATSC compliant and has high performance for the transmission of studio quality video material The equipment is designed to be suitabl
384. tion NOTE The frame rate is only shown when the video input is Serial Digital any Test Pattern or Off To access the Frame Rate option press the Frame Rate softkey from the Video Source Menu Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 33 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 34 Table 4 25 Frame Rate Options Selected Option Description 29 97 Hz Used in 525 lines NTSC M PAL M 25 Hz Used in 625 lines PAL Video Locked Option This option indicates whether the video is locked It is for status only and cannot be changed Ident Text Option To access the Ident Text option press the Ident Text softkey from the Video Source Menu This is the text that is displayed if the video output is lost see OP Video Loss Option on page 4 35 Text Colour Option To access the Text Colour option press the Text Colour softkey from the Video Source Menu This gives a choice of colours for the text which is displayed when the video output is lost if that option has been selected Table 4 26 Text Colour Options Available Options White Blue Magenta Yellow Green Pink Background Colour Option To access the Background Colour option press the Background Colour softkey from the Video Source Menu This gives a choice of colours for the background to the text which is displayed when the video output is lost if that option has been selected CAUTION Make the backgroun
385. tion BB CPLD F W Release Option BB DSP F W Release Option BB RNF F W Release Option L Band Output Card Type Option DPC Card Type Option 4 11 10 Output Format OFDM Modulator 3 1 and later Output Option To access the Output option press the Output softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu This enables the modulator outputs to be switched On or Off Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 85 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page 4 86 Bandwidth Option To access the Bandwidth option press the Bandwidth softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu Table 4 104 Bandwidth Options Selected Option Description 6 MHz 6 MHz transmission bandwidth 7 MHz 7 MHz transmission bandwidth 8 MHz 8 MHz transmission bandwidth Modulation Mode Option To access the Modulation Mode option press the Modulation Mode softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu Table 4 105 Modulation Mode Options Selected Option Description QPSK OFDM Modulator uses QPSK modulation 16QAM OFDM Modulator uses 16QAM modulation 64QAM OFDM Modulator uses 64QAM modulation Guard Interval Option To access the Guard Interval option press the Guard Interval softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu Table 4 106 Guard Interval Options Selected Option Description 1 32 OFDM Modulator uses 1 32 Guard Interval 1 16 OFDM Modulator uses 1 16 Guard Interval 1 8 OFDM Modulator uses 1 8 Guard Interval 1 4 OFDM Modulator uses 1 4 G
386. tion press the Original softkey in the Audio A Menu This indicates whether the bit stream is an original or a copy of an original bit stream This option can be turned On an original or Off a copy of an original bit stream Dynamic Range Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the Dynamic Range option press the Dynamic Range softkey in the Audio A Menu The dynamic range of audio material can vary according to its origin This function determines which compression profile is applied to the encoding process The dynamic range compression profile determines the characteristic curve of the dynamic range compression algorithm each profile has its own boost null band and cut parameters Table 4 60 Dynamic Range Options Selected Option Description None Custom Program reproduction with the original dynamic range Film Standard Film Light Music Standard Music Light Speech Page 4 62 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally RF Protection Option NOTE This option is only shown when the Coding Standard is Dolby Digital AC 3 To access the RF Protection option press the RF Protection softkey in the Audio A Menu The option can be turned On with RF Protection or Off without RF Overmodulation Protection is used in situations where the audio signal of a decoded AC 3 bit strea
387. tsenseineinei 4 12 Table 4 35 Aspect Ratio OptONS u 4 41 Figure 4 5 Keyboard LOCK ssssssssssssssssssstrsrsnsnrsnnnrnnnnrnnnnannnet 4 13 Table 4 36 AFD Options i 4 41 Figure 4 6 2U Keypad and Display Functions 4 14 Table 4 37 AFD Information ccccsccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscsssssececcccccccccc 4 42 Figure 4 7 Accessing Inscriptions on the Keypad s sss 4 14 Table 4 38 Group of Pictures Structure OptionS ccceee 4 42 Figure 4 8 Menu Hierarchy Summary Screen and Table 4 39 Group of Pictures Length Options Long GOPs Advanced MENUS oe eseseeseeseesnereeseeeeseeneeresanereea 4 16 Disabled s in 4 43 Figure 4 9 Menu Hierarchy Setup System Menu 0 0004 4 18 Table 4 40 Field Frame Options ascscsvsssessvssssesessenstsseeeee 4 44 Figure 4 10 Menu Hierarchy Setup Video Menu cee 4 32 Table 4 41 VBI in Picture Options cccsscssscssssscssenssssesessenee 4 47 Figure 4 11 Setting up the Video INpUt teenie 4 33 Table 4 42 CC Format Options csssssssssesssssssssesssestssetvee 4 48 Figure 4 12 VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for Table 4 43 VBI Line n Options ssccssvsssessessnsesessestsesseeee 4 49 SABE OPS NS keringan gi i Table 4 44 Source Options ccssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssssseseeees 4 54 Figure 4 13 VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for Table 4 45 Coding Standard OptONS v v 4 54 625 lin SYStOMS eesceeeseesessesesseetest
388. u This shows the Entitlement Control Message Conditional Access Packet Identifier PID Table 4 127 ECM CA PID Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 VBI PID Option NOTE This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services Available prior to Build version 2 2 0 The VBI PID option is selected from the 2 Service Menu by pressing the VBI PID softkey The option is used for entering or updating the VBI PID Table 4 128 VBI PID Options Selected Option Description Min 1 Max 8190 1FFEh Step Size 1 Audio Type of Audio Option NOTES 1 This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services Available from Build version 2 2 0 and later 2 The option could be Audio MPEG 2 Audio Dolby Digital etc The words in the brackets change according to the type of audio that was previously selected The Audio Type of Audio option is selected from the 2 Service Menu by pressing the Audio Type of Audio softkey The option is used for entering or updating audio PIDs To be DVB compliant PIDs below 32 are reserved Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are available for use In the event of a clash one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder s internal checking algorithm Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 103 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Page
389. uard Interval FEC Rate Option To access the FEC Rate option press the FEC Rate softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu Table 4 107 FEC Rate Options Selected Option Description 1 2 OFDM Modulator uses 1 2 FEC Rate 2 3 OFDM Modulator uses 2 3 FEC Rate 3 4 OFDM Modulator uses 3 4 FEC Rate 5 6 OFDM Modulator uses 5 6 FEC Rate 7 8 OFDM Modulator uses 7 8 FEC Rate Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Transmission Option To access the Transmission option press the Transmission softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu Table 4 108 Transmission Options Selected Option Description 2k Mode OFDM Modulator uses 2k carriers 8k Mode OFDM Modulator uses 8k carriers Spectral Pol Option To access the Spectral Pol option press the Spectral Pol softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu Table 4 109 Spectral Polarity Options Selected Option Description High Side IF The spectrum is inverted thus allowing a subsequent upconverter LO to be on the high side of the spectrum Low Side IF The spectrum is not inverted thus allowing a subsequent upconverter LO to be on the low side of the spectrum Centre Frequency Option To access the Centre Frequency option press the Centre Frequency softkey in the OFDM Modulator Menu This is the centre frequency to be put in the SI of the output transport stream Table 4 110 Centre Frequency Options Valid Input Range Des
390. udio Input Audio input AUDIO IN Alarm AES EBU Reference Main Output 10BaseT ETHERNET 1 OUT MAIN P OUT MONITOR Monitor Output 10BaseT RS 232 RS 485 RS 232 data input RS 422 data input ETHERNET 2 REMOTE CONTROL RS 232 DATA RS 422 DATA Figure 2 8 Equipment Connections for the Basic Unit Page 2 12 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 2 6 3 2 6 4 2 6 5 Installing the Equipment Do not move or install equipment whilst it is still attached to the mains supply Ensure ESD precautions are observed whilst interconnecting equipment NOTE See Chapter 3 for information relating to Options and Upgrades Power Supply Section 2 4 AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing provides details of power supply connection Protective earthing and safety Read all the instructions carefully and take note of all warnings and cautions Also see Section 2 5 DC Operating Voltage and Earthing Technical Earth Connect the Encoder s Technical earth to a suitable point Video Inputs SDI IN A 75 BNC connector provides a serial digital video input to the unit See Chapter 4 Operating the ww Equipment Locally Video Input Option for the types of video and selection method This input is terminated in 75 Q The serial input supports error detection and handling EDH as defined by the specification SMPTE RP 165 1994 Error Detection Checkword
391. udio and video access units and transported as packets Each PES packet consists of a header and a payload of variable length and subject to a maximum of 64 kbytes A time stamp is provided by the MPEG 2 systems layer to ensure correct synchronisation between related elementary streams at the Decoder Packet Identifier The header on a packet in an elementary data stream which identifies that data stream An MPEG 2 DVB standard Personal Identification Number A password used to control access to programming and to set purchase limits Each subscriber household can activate several PINs and may use them to set individual parental rating or spending limits for each family member PIX picture Element The digital representation of the smallest area of a television picture capable of being delineated by the bit stream See Pel for more information peak to peak Measurement of a signal or waveform from its most negative point to its most positive point Phase Locked Loop A phase locked loop is a control system which controls the rotation of an object by comparing its rotational position phase with another rotating object as in the case of a sine wave or other repeating signal This type of control system can synchronise not only the speed but also the angular position of two waveforms that are not derived from the same source Program Map Table Part of the MPEG 2 Program Specific Information PSI data and is mandatory for MPEG 2 compliance
392. uency range of approximately 4 GHz to 6 GHz Used by communications satellites Preferred in tropical climates because it is not susceptible to fading See ITU R See ITU T A narrow range of frequencies part of a frequency band for the transmission of radio and television signals without interference from other channels In the case of OFDM a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies are allocated to a channel A way of encoding data in a communications channel that adds patterns of redundancy into the transmission path in order to improve the error rate Such methods are widely used in wireless communications The colour part of a TV picture signal relating to the hue and saturation but not to the luminance brightness of the signal In a composite coded colour system the colour information chrominance often referred to as chroma is modulated onto a high frequency carrier and added to the monochrome format video signal carrying the luminance Y In a component coded colour system the two colour difference signals R Y B Y usually referred to as CrCe digital or PRPs analogue are used to convey colour information When CrCe PrPs is added to the luminance Y the complete picture information is conveyed as YCrCs YPrPp A TV picture subtitling system used with 525 line analogue transmissions Create Once Distribute Everywhere The combination of an Encoder and a complementary Decoder located respectively a
393. uency to tune to Symbol Rate Option To access the Symbol Rate option press the Symbol Rate softkey in the IRD Demod Menu If the IRD is in tracking mode then this value is tied to that set for the satellite modulator and cannot be altered Table 4 134 Symbol Rate Options Valid Input Range Description Min Low Sym Rate 0 3000 Msym s Minimum with low symbol rate option M2 ESO2 LSYM Min 1 0000 Msym s Max 30 0000 Msym s Stepsize 0 0001 Msym s FEC Rate Option To access the FEC Rate option press the FEC Rate softkey in the IRD Demod Menu If the IRD is in tracking mode this value is tied to that set for the satellite modulator and cannot be altered Table 4 135 FEC Rate Options Selected Option Description 1 2 IRD uses 1 2 FEC Rate 2 3 IRD uses 2 3 FEC Rate 3 4 IRD uses 3 4 FEC Rate 5 6 IRD uses 5 6 FEC Rate 7 8 IRD uses 7 8 FEC Rate 8 9 IRD uses 8 9 FEC Rate only applicable if the modulation type is 8PSK Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Page 4 107 ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally Polarisation Option To access the Polarisation option press the Polarisation softkey in the IRD Demod Menu Table 4 136 Polarisation Options Selected Option Description Horizontal If LNB power is enabled output 18V to signal horizontal polarisation Vertical If LNB power is enabled output 13V to signal vertical polarisation Sat Input Option
394. ulation 256 QAM Cable channel uses 256QAM modulation FEC Outer Option To access the FEC Outer option press the FEC Outer softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This screen enables the outer FEC rate used by the cable channel to be specified Table 4 83 FEC Outer Options Selected Option Description No outer FEC coding Cable channel does not use outer FEC RS 204 188 FEC Inner Option To access the FEC Inner option press the FEC Inner softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu This screen enables the inner FEC rate used by the cable channel to be specified Page 4 76 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 11 7 Operating the Equipment Locally Table 4 84 FEC Inner Options Selected Option Description No conv coding Cable channel does not use inner FEC rate 1 2 Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 1 2 2 3 Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 2 3 3 4 Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 3 4 5 6 Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 5 6 7 8 Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 7 8 8 9 Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 8 9 Symbol Rate Option To access the Symbol Rate option press the Symbol Rate softkey in the Delivery Descriptor Menu Table 4 85 Symbol Rate Options Valid Input Range Description Min 0 4688 Msym s Symbol rate Max 30 0000 Msym s Step Size 0 0001 Msym s Changing the symbol rate aff
395. ure 3 5 Block Diagram Two Stages of Remultiplexing 3 14 Figure 3 6 Remultiplexer Block Diagram 3 15 Figure 3 7 XLR Expander Card Option M2 EOM2 XLR 3 19 Figure 3 8 IP Output Protocol StacKk uscsssssssssesesessssessesees 3 25 Page 3 2 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 3 1 What s Available 3 1 1 Option Functions The basic Encoder functionality can be enhanced with the inclusion of options hardware and software Options and Upgrades Each hardware option module consists of a horizontally mounted PCB with rear panel connector space except the M2 EDCOM2 BISS which has no external connectors and does not occupy an option slot At reset the software of the Encoder detects which modules are fitted and configures them as necessary The modules can be fitted into the positions indicated in Table 3 1 When the appropriate software option has been purchased it is enabled in the Encoder which resets and displays the appropriate menu items See Table 3 2 for the software options Table 3 1 Hardware Option Module Positions Marketing Code Name Assembly Card Slot No Slot No Max No of Part No Part No in 1U in 2U Cards in 2U Daughter Card Options M2 EDCOM2 BISS BISS scrambling 12284 11484 option Mode 0 1 and BISS E only with secure key entry Hardware Options M2 EOM2 AUDLIN Additional Audio 12293 11976 2 1 4 5 3 Linear PC
396. ved in the backup FLASH Store Configs in Backup CAUTION Any user configuration that is not write protected will be overwritten when Factory Default or Backup configurations are loaded to the user FLASH Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 17 5 4 17 6 4 17 7 4 17 8 Operating the Equipment Locally Backup Configurations Backup FLASH stores a copy of each of the 16 user configurations when you select Store Configs in Backup you will be asked for the password here If unsure of the user configurations or they become inadvertently modified the user configurations can be returned to a known state at any time by the command Load Configs from Backup This loads the 16 backup configurations to the User FLASH overwriting all user configurations that are not write protected Individual configurations cannot be selected for loading to the User FLASH The active current configuration is unaltered when you select Load Configs from Backup Factory Default Configurations There are 16 default configurations for both 525 and 625 line standards They are provided as examples and can be used as they are if their settings suit your needs They are non editable The 16 default configurations 525 or 625 can be loaded to the user FLASH at any time by selecting Factory 525 or 625 Defaults This will overwrite all user configurations that are not write protected Individua
397. ves details of how to access the inscriptions Press the key three times in rapid succession plese ne Key gnoe 1o Navea 2 to have a B appear on the display screen appear on the display screen Press the key twice in rapid Press the key four times in rapid succession succession for an A to appear on the to have a C appear on the display screen display screen Figure 4 7 Accessing Inscriptions on the Keypad Page 4 14 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally 4 5 3 How to Use the Functions Associated with Softkeys The following display screens show the different functions associated with the options On Air Off Air Scrambled means that indicates whether the scrambling is enabled Press Left and Right mux On Air option is Clear means that it is to move the set to on or off not underscore to the next letter that you want to change Press and to scroll through the choices in the option Press Ins to insert a space where the underscore is Press Enter to accept the option choice Press Del to delete Softkeys mean those at where the the side of the screen underscore is and those on the keypad NOTE A black diagonal cross enclosed by a white circle X means that the Encoder is under remote control and the user does not have access to change that parameter Indicates the number of screens in the menu Press PgUp and PgDn
398. vice Info Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the Service I nfo softkey This menu provides options for configuring the Service Information SI parameters transmitted in the output transport stream See Figure 4 9 for the menu structure when the Syntax option has been set to ATSC Short Channel Name Option This is associated with the field short_name and is a seven character name for the channel To access the Short Channel Name option press the Short Channel Name softkey in the Service Info Menu This option allows the Short Channel name to be changed The information is included in the Virtual Channel Table VCT Long Channel Name Option This is associated with the field extended_channel_name and gives the full name of the channel To access the Long Channel Name option press the Long Channel Name softkey in the Service Info Menu Syntax Option To access the Syntax option for the output Transport Stream and associated SI PSIP press the Syntax softkey in the Service Info Menu This enables the syntax to be specified Use the and softkeys to scroll through the options and then press the Enter softkey after selecting one of them Table 4 2 Syntax Options Selected Option Description Comments ATSC Advanced Television Standards Committee DVB Digital Video Broadcasting See page 4 21 SI Level Option To access the SI Level option press the SI Level softkey in the Service Info Menu This e
399. wer option 4 83 mod type option 4 84 modulation option 4 84 polarisation option 4 85 preset pwr low option 4 84 preset pwr norm option 4 85 roll off factor option 4 84 sat deliv freq option 4 85 sat orb pos option 4 85 sat west east option 4 85 spectrum invert option 4 84 status only option 4 85 symbol rate option 4 84 tx bandwidth factor option 4 84 upconverter power option 4 85 output format IP streamer destination IP address option 4 88 destination UDP port option 4 88 multicast IP address option 4 88 network mask option 4 88 own IP address option 4 88 router IP address option 4 88 time to live option 4 89 ts pkts UDP frm option 4 88 type of service option 4 89 output format option 4 72 Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder Index 9 ST TM E10076 3 Indexes R remote control menu 4 24 gateway address 4 24 IP address 4 24 last SNMP master 4 25 last SNMP poll 4 25 MAC address 4 24 network mask 4 24 sabus address 4 25 sabus baud rate 4 25 sabus data bits 4 26 SNMP master 4 25 SNMP trap IP 4 25 remote control menu syntax DVB serial protocol 4 25 remux module menu bit rate option 4 97 packet lengi option 4 97 remux mode option 4 97 status only options 4 97 remux option module M2 EOM2 REMUX 4 96 S service info menu syntax ATSC 4 19 dolby AC 3 descriptor 4 23 DST end date 4 21 DST start date 4 21 long channel name
400. xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 4 14 7 Operating the Equipment Locally IRD Audio 1 and Audio 2 Menus NOTE The menu structures are identical for Audio Channel 1 and Audio Channel 2 Audio Stream This shows the currently selected audio stream To access the Audio Stream option press the Audio Stream softkey in the IRD Audio Menu It is then possible to select the audio stream to be decoded from the audio streams present in the currently selected service Audio Routing Option To access the Audio Routing option press the Audio Routing softkey in the IRD Audio Menu Table 4 152 Audio Routing Options Selected Option Description Normal Stereo Normal stereo output Left Both Left channel routed to both outputs Right Both Right channel routed to both outputs NOTE The Audio Routing setting has no effect if the audio stream is Dolby Digital AC 3 encoded Default Language Option To access the Default Language option press the Default Language softkey in the IRD Audio Menu If a service contains more than one audio stream the decoder defaults to the first audio stream of the default language Downmix Mode Option NOTE This option is only applicable with Dolby AC 3 audio services To access the Downmix Mode option press the Downmix Mode softkey in the IRD Audio Menu If the AC 3 service has more than two channels the audio decoder downmixes to produce a stereo pair The AC 3 s
401. y Option s s s 4 115 BISS Mode Option cceecceceeeeees 4 115 Session Word Option ccecee 4 115 Enc Session Word Option ce 4 115 4 14 9 IRD VBI Menu cceceessesesesesteseeeeees 4 116 VITS Enable Option 0 ccecceeeee 4 116 CCVC Enable Option ccceceee 4 116 VITC Enable Option ccceceeeeeeceee 4 116 GCR Enable Option ecccceeeee 4 116 Status Only Options for the IRD VBI MENU ananasai aa anara 4 116 4 14 40 IRD Data Menu ccecseeseseseesteseetesees 4 117 Async Stream Option sssi 4 117 Async Baudrate eeeeeee 4 117 Sync Stream Option 4 117 SYNC Bitrate sian 4 117 Subtitle Stream Option 0 ceeeee 4 117 Subtitles Language Option eee 4 117 Subtitles Type Option ccceeee 4 117 Subtitles Enable Option cecceee 4 117 Teletext Stream Option c ccceeee 4 118 4 14 11 IRD System Status Menu eee 4 118 Errors MeN itivetsiiatisericsniarnvenccne nite 4 118 4 15 1 OVOIVIOW ceececceccceseeseseceeeseseeeeseseteneeeees 4 118 4 15 2 Active Errors Option c ccececcee 4 118 4 15 3 Error Masks Menu 4 118 Status of Error MasKS ccceceeeeeees 4 118 Restore Defaults ccecccecetcesteeeeeees 4 119 Diagnostics M nu ceccescesessesesestesesteeeeesetenees 4 119 Configs Men sisine 4 119 4 17 1 Accessing the Menu c ceeeeee 4 119 AAT2 OVGIVIOW riiin 4 119
402. y available when Frame Rate is 25 Hz To access the Teletext All lines option press the Teletext All lines softkey in the VBI Menu This option can be turned On or Off When on it enables extraction of Teletext System B WST data from lines 7 to 22 and 320 to 335 of the video input Teletext Data Out Option This option indicates whether or not the Encoder is actually outputting Teletext data at that instant It is for status only and cannot be changed Teletext PID Option NOTE This option is only available when Frame Rate is 25 Hz To access the Teletext PID option press the Teletext PID softkey in the VBI Menu This enables the Teletext PID to be changed VBI on PID Option To access the VBI on PID option press the VBI on PID softkey in the vBI Menu This enables the VBI on a separate PID to be turned On or Off VBI PID Option The VBI PID option is selected from the VBI Menu by pressing the VBI PID softkey The option is used for entering or updating the VBI PID Enter a PID using the softkeys then press the Enter softkey to accept it Instruction Manual evolution 5000 E57xx DSNG and DENG Voyager Encoder ST TM E10076 3 Operating the Equipment Locally VBI In Picture Option NOTES 1 The VBI in Picture option is only accessible if the selected video profile level is 422P ML 2 VBI in Picture transmits the VBI waveform as part of the picture and as such will be subject to some disto
403. y range Differential Pulse Code Modulation An audio digitisation technique that codes the difference between samples rather than coding an absolute measurement at each sample point Digital Satellite News Gathering Digital Signal Processor Data circuit Terminating Equipment A communications device that originates is the source or is the end receiving unit destination of signals on a network It is typically a terminal or computer Direct To Home The term used to describe uninterrupted transmission from the satellite directly to the subscriber that is no intermediary cable or terrestrial network utilised Digital Theater Systems A motion picture digital sound system Digital Video Broadcasting A European project which has defined transmission standards for digital broadcasting systems using satellite DVB S cable DVB C and terrestrial DVB T medium created by the EP DVB group and approved by the ITU Specifies modulation error correction etc see EN 300 421 for satellite EN 300 429 for cable and EN 300 744 for terrestrial Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information DVB Professional Interfaces TTV Lan search shows DVB Physical Interfaces Page A 3 Glossary Earth EBU ECM EDI EIA EIT Elementary Stream EMC EMM Encryption EPG Ethernet ETS ETSI FCC FDM FEC FFT FIFO Footprint FTP G 703 GOP GUI HDTV HPA HSYNC Hub ICAM IEC Page A 4 Technical Earth Ensure
404. ype software selectable balanced analogue or digital AES EBU with AES EBU on left only A break out cable is supplied which plugs into this connector and provides a more convenient means of connecting the audio inputs via five connectors There are four XLR female connectors with the fifth cable being a BNC which provides an AES EBU 75 Q digital reference output e Alternatively audio can be input embedded as AES EBU on the serial digital interface SDI In this mode a maximum of four stereo pairs can be extracted from any two Data Identifiers DIDs Audio may be converted to either of the standard output sampling frequencies 32 kHz or 48 kHz by use of the built in asynchronous sample rate converters This applies only to audio which is not pre encoded Audio Channels The Encoder Base Board is capable of processing two stereo pairs from any of the following e SDI Embedded source e Digital source AES EBU e Analogue source termination impedance 600 or 20 kQ These signals may be processed using the encoding modes in the following section MPEG Encoding Modes The two stereo pairs may be configured in various encoding modes e Single mono the left channel is encoded the signal is output to both XLR connectors at the receiving end Not available in Linear PCM e Dual mono the left and right signals are encoded and carried in the transport stream as a single Packetised Elementary Stream PES data stream The way
405. yright Option 4 45 Original Option cesses 4 45 Bandwidth Option cccceeeeeeeeeseeeees 4 45 Encoder Type Option c esescceeeeeee 4 45 S W Release Option ccecceceeeeeeee 4 45 4 8 4 Vertical Blanking Interval VBI Menu 4 46 OVOIVIOW escececceeeeccseeceeestseeseeeeteteneetseess 4 46 Teletext All lines Option eee 4 46 Teletext Data Out Option eee 4 46 Teletext PID Option 0 cesses 4 46 VBI on PID Option cece 4 46 VBI PID Option cceseecceesecssseeseesesneees 4 46 VBI In Picture Option ccsccseeeeeee 4 47 VPS Line 16 Option cccceeceeeeee 4 47 WSS Line 23 Option cece 4 48 Closed Caption Option ceeeee 4 48 CC Format Option c cccccceseeceeeeeeees 4 48 Auto Detect VITC Option c cece 4 48 VBI Line n Option cece 4 48 4 9 Audio MONu ceccccceeseeceeeceseseeeeeeeetsnseeeeeeeeeeneees 4 52 AIO OVGIVIOW aissscianveriindinnsnimacraaras 4 52 4 9 2 Audio A and B Menus 4 52 IMtrOGUCTION eeseceeceeeeeesesteeesestsnseeeeeeeeees 4 52 Source OptON s isssati iieiaeie 4 54 Coding Standard Option 0 cscs 4 54 Audio Bit rate Option cceeeeeeee 4 55 Input Level L Option oo eee 4 55 Input Level R Option essere 4 56 Coding Mode Option ccccssseeeeeeeeeee 4 56 Auto Lip Sync Option ceeceeeee 4 56 Lip Sync Offset Option cecese

TANDBERG E5714 Flat Panel Television User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents